rooty/LibrePilot
1
0
Fork 0
mirror of https://bitbucket.org/librepilot/librepilot.git synced 2025-01-18 03:52:11 +01:00
Code Issues Releases Activity

OP-901 Updated F4 StdPeriph Driver Library to V1.1.0

Browse Source
This commit is contained in:
Alessio Morale 2013-05-18 13:57:45 +02:00
parent 448e98b336
commit f0c01d0eff
58 changed files with 7329 additions and 4367 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

978
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/Release_Notes.html Normal file
View File

File diff suppressed because one or more lines are too long

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/misc.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file misc.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the miscellaneous
* firmware library functions (add-on to CMSIS functions).
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -169,4 +175,4 @@ void SysTick_CLKSourceConfig(uint32_t SysTick_CLKSource);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_adc.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_adc.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the ADC firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -640,4 +646,4 @@ void ADC_ClearITPendingBit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t ADC_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_can.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_can.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the CAN firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -635,4 +641,4 @@ void CAN_ClearITPendingBit(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint32_t CAN_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_crc.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_crc.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the CRC firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -74,4 +80,4 @@ uint8_t CRC_GetIDRegister(void);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

114
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_cryp.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_cryp.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the Cryptographic
* processor(CRYP) firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -46,14 +52,14 @@
*/
typedef struct
{
uint16_t CRYP_AlgoDir; /*!< Encrypt or Decrypt. This parameter can be a
uint32_t CRYP_AlgoDir; /*!< Encrypt or Decrypt. This parameter can be a
value of @ref CRYP_Algorithm_Direction */
uint16_t CRYP_AlgoMode; /*!< TDES-ECB, TDES-CBC, DES-ECB, DES-CBC, AES-ECB,
AES-CBC, AES-CTR, AES-Key. This parameter can be
a value of @ref CRYP_Algorithm_Mode */
uint16_t CRYP_DataType; /*!< 32-bit data, 16-bit data, bit data or bit-string.
uint32_t CRYP_AlgoMode; /*!< TDES-ECB, TDES-CBC, DES-ECB, DES-CBC, AES-ECB,
AES-CBC, AES-CTR, AES-Key, AES-GCM and AES-CCM.
This parameter can be a value of @ref CRYP_Algorithm_Mode */
uint32_t CRYP_DataType; /*!< 32-bit data, 16-bit data, bit data or bit string.
This parameter can be a value of @ref CRYP_Data_Type */
uint16_t CRYP_KeySize; /*!< Used only in AES mode only : 128, 192 or 256 bit
uint32_t CRYP_KeySize; /*!< Used only in AES mode only : 128, 192 or 256 bit
key length. This parameter can be a value of
@ref CRYP_Key_Size_for_AES_only */
}CRYP_InitTypeDef;
@ -88,14 +94,14 @@ typedef struct
*/
typedef struct
{
/*!< Configuration */
uint32_t CR_bits9to2;
/*!< KEY */
/*!< Current Configuration */
uint32_t CR_CurrentConfig;
/*!< IV */
uint32_t CRYP_IV0LR;
uint32_t CRYP_IV0RR;
uint32_t CRYP_IV1LR;
uint32_t CRYP_IV1RR;
/*!< IV */
/*!< KEY */
uint32_t CRYP_K0LR;
uint32_t CRYP_K0RR;
uint32_t CRYP_K1LR;
@ -104,6 +110,8 @@ typedef struct
uint32_t CRYP_K2RR;
uint32_t CRYP_K3LR;
uint32_t CRYP_K3RR;
uint32_t CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[8];
uint32_t CRYP_CSGCMR[8];
}CRYP_Context;
@ -130,31 +138,54 @@ typedef struct
*/
/*!< TDES Modes */
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_TDES_ECB ((uint16_t)0x0000)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_TDES_CBC ((uint16_t)0x0008)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_TDES_ECB ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_TDES_CBC ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
/*!< DES Modes */
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_DES_ECB ((uint16_t)0x0010)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_DES_CBC ((uint16_t)0x0018)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_DES_ECB ((uint32_t)0x00000010)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_DES_CBC ((uint32_t)0x00000018)
/*!< AES Modes */
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_ECB ((uint16_t)0x0020)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CBC ((uint16_t)0x0028)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CTR ((uint16_t)0x0030)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_Key ((uint16_t)0x0038)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_ECB ((uint32_t)0x00000020)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CBC ((uint32_t)0x00000028)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CTR ((uint32_t)0x00000030)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_Key ((uint32_t)0x00000038)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_GCM ((uint32_t)0x00080000)
#define CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CCM ((uint32_t)0x00080008)
#define IS_CRYP_ALGOMODE(ALGOMODE) (((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_TDES_ECB) || \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_TDES_CBC)|| \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_DES_ECB)|| \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_DES_ECB) || \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_DES_CBC) || \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_ECB) || \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CBC) || \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CTR) || \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_Key))
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_Key) || \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_GCM) || \
((ALGOMODE) == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CCM))
/**
* @}
*/
/** @defgroup CRYP_Phase
* @{
*/
/*!< The phases are valid only for AES-GCM and AES-CCM modes */
#define CRYP_Phase_Init ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
#define CRYP_Phase_Header CRYP_CR_GCM_CCMPH_0
#define CRYP_Phase_Payload CRYP_CR_GCM_CCMPH_1
#define CRYP_Phase_Final CRYP_CR_GCM_CCMPH
#define IS_CRYP_PHASE(PHASE) (((PHASE) == CRYP_Phase_Init) || \
((PHASE) == CRYP_Phase_Header) || \
((PHASE) == CRYP_Phase_Payload) || \
((PHASE) == CRYP_Phase_Final))
/**
* @}
*/
/** @defgroup CRYP_Data_Type
* @{
*/
@ -260,23 +291,24 @@ void CRYP_KeyStructInit(CRYP_KeyInitTypeDef* CRYP_KeyInitStruct);
void CRYP_IVInit(CRYP_IVInitTypeDef* CRYP_IVInitStruct);
void CRYP_IVStructInit(CRYP_IVInitTypeDef* CRYP_IVInitStruct);
void CRYP_Cmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void CRYP_PhaseConfig(uint32_t CRYP_Phase);
void CRYP_FIFOFlush(void);
/* CRYP Data processing functions *********************************************/
void CRYP_DataIn(uint32_t Data);
uint32_t CRYP_DataOut(void);
void CRYP_FIFOFlush(void);
/* CRYP Context swapping functions ********************************************/
ErrorStatus CRYP_SaveContext(CRYP_Context* CRYP_ContextSave,
CRYP_KeyInitTypeDef* CRYP_KeyInitStruct);
void CRYP_RestoreContext(CRYP_Context* CRYP_ContextRestore);
/* CRYP's DMA interface function **********************************************/
/* CRYP DMA interface function ************************************************/
void CRYP_DMACmd(uint8_t CRYP_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState);
/* Interrupts and flags management functions **********************************/
void CRYP_ITConfig(uint8_t CRYP_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
ITStatus CRYP_GetITStatus(uint8_t CRYP_IT);
FunctionalState CRYP_GetCmdStatus(void);
FlagStatus CRYP_GetFlagStatus(uint8_t CRYP_FLAG);
/* High Level AES functions **************************************************/
@ -297,6 +329,20 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_CTR(uint8_t Mode,
uint8_t *Input, uint32_t Ilength,
uint8_t *Output);
ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_GCM(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t InitVectors[16],
uint8_t *Key, uint16_t Keysize,
uint8_t *Input, uint32_t ILength,
uint8_t *Header, uint32_t HLength,
uint8_t *Output, uint8_t *AuthTAG);
ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_CCM(uint8_t Mode,
uint8_t* Nonce, uint32_t NonceSize,
uint8_t* Key, uint16_t Keysize,
uint8_t* Input, uint32_t ILength,
uint8_t* Header, uint32_t HLength, uint8_t *HBuffer,
uint8_t* Output,
uint8_t* AuthTAG, uint32_t TAGSize);
/* High Level TDES functions **************************************************/
ErrorStatus CRYP_TDES_ECB(uint8_t Mode,
uint8_t Key[24],
@ -335,4 +381,4 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_DES_CBC(uint8_t Mode,
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_dac.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_dac.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the DAC firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -295,4 +301,4 @@ void DAC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_dbgmcu.h
View File

@ -2,20 +2,26 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_dbgmcu.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the DBGMCU firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -100,4 +106,4 @@ void DBGMCU_APB2PeriphConfig(uint32_t DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_dcmi.h
View File

@ -2,20 +2,26 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_dcmi.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the DCMI firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -303,4 +309,4 @@ void DCMI_ClearITPendingBit(uint16_t DCMI_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

28
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_dma.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_dma.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the DMA firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -393,7 +399,7 @@ typedef struct
#define DMA_FLAG_TCIF7 ((uint32_t)0x28000000)
#define IS_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(FLAG) ((((FLAG) & 0x30000000) != 0x30000000) && (((FLAG) & 0x30000000) != 0) && \
(((FLAG) & 0xC082F082) == 0x00) && ((FLAG) != 0x00))
(((FLAG) & 0xC002F082) == 0x00) && ((FLAG) != 0x00))
#define IS_DMA_GET_FLAG(FLAG) (((FLAG) == DMA_FLAG_TCIF0) || ((FLAG) == DMA_FLAG_HTIF0) || \
((FLAG) == DMA_FLAG_TEIF0) || ((FLAG) == DMA_FLAG_DMEIF0) || \
@ -600,4 +606,4 @@ void DMA_ClearITPendingBit(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_IT);
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_exti.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_exti.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the EXTI firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -174,4 +180,4 @@ void EXTI_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t EXTI_Line);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

220
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_flash.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_flash.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the FLASH
* firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -64,23 +70,24 @@ typedef enum
/** @defgroup Flash_Latency
* @{
*/
#define FLASH_Latency_0 ((uint8_t)0x0000) /*!< FLASH Zero Latency cycle */
#define FLASH_Latency_1 ((uint8_t)0x0001) /*!< FLASH One Latency cycle */
#define FLASH_Latency_2 ((uint8_t)0x0002) /*!< FLASH Two Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_3 ((uint8_t)0x0003) /*!< FLASH Three Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_4 ((uint8_t)0x0004) /*!< FLASH Four Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_5 ((uint8_t)0x0005) /*!< FLASH Five Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_6 ((uint8_t)0x0006) /*!< FLASH Six Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_7 ((uint8_t)0x0007) /*!< FLASH Seven Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_0 ((uint8_t)0x0000) /*!< FLASH Zero Latency cycle */
#define FLASH_Latency_1 ((uint8_t)0x0001) /*!< FLASH One Latency cycle */
#define FLASH_Latency_2 ((uint8_t)0x0002) /*!< FLASH Two Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_3 ((uint8_t)0x0003) /*!< FLASH Three Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_4 ((uint8_t)0x0004) /*!< FLASH Four Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_5 ((uint8_t)0x0005) /*!< FLASH Five Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_6 ((uint8_t)0x0006) /*!< FLASH Six Latency cycles */
#define FLASH_Latency_7 ((uint8_t)0x0007) /*!< FLASH Seven Latency cycles */
#define IS_FLASH_LATENCY(LATENCY) (((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_0) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_1) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_2) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_3) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_4) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_5) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_6) || \
#define IS_FLASH_LATENCY(LATENCY) (((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_0) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_1) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_2) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_3) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_4) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_5) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_6) || \
((LATENCY) == FLASH_Latency_7))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -103,26 +110,46 @@ typedef enum
/** @defgroup FLASH_Sectors
* @{
*/
#define FLASH_Sector_0 ((uint16_t)0x0000) /*!< Sector Number 0 */
#define FLASH_Sector_1 ((uint16_t)0x0008) /*!< Sector Number 1 */
#define FLASH_Sector_2 ((uint16_t)0x0010) /*!< Sector Number 2 */
#define FLASH_Sector_3 ((uint16_t)0x0018) /*!< Sector Number 3 */
#define FLASH_Sector_4 ((uint16_t)0x0020) /*!< Sector Number 4 */
#define FLASH_Sector_5 ((uint16_t)0x0028) /*!< Sector Number 5 */
#define FLASH_Sector_6 ((uint16_t)0x0030) /*!< Sector Number 6 */
#define FLASH_Sector_7 ((uint16_t)0x0038) /*!< Sector Number 7 */
#define FLASH_Sector_8 ((uint16_t)0x0040) /*!< Sector Number 8 */
#define FLASH_Sector_9 ((uint16_t)0x0048) /*!< Sector Number 9 */
#define FLASH_Sector_10 ((uint16_t)0x0050) /*!< Sector Number 10 */
#define FLASH_Sector_11 ((uint16_t)0x0058) /*!< Sector Number 11 */
#define IS_FLASH_SECTOR(SECTOR) (((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_0) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_1) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_2) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_3) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_4) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_5) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_6) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_7) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_8) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_9) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_10) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_11))
#define IS_FLASH_ADDRESS(ADDRESS) ((((ADDRESS) >= 0x08000000) && ((ADDRESS) < 0x080FFFFF)) ||\
*/
#define FLASH_Sector_0 ((uint16_t)0x0000) /*!< Sector Number 0 */
#define FLASH_Sector_1 ((uint16_t)0x0008) /*!< Sector Number 1 */
#define FLASH_Sector_2 ((uint16_t)0x0010) /*!< Sector Number 2 */
#define FLASH_Sector_3 ((uint16_t)0x0018) /*!< Sector Number 3 */
#define FLASH_Sector_4 ((uint16_t)0x0020) /*!< Sector Number 4 */
#define FLASH_Sector_5 ((uint16_t)0x0028) /*!< Sector Number 5 */
#define FLASH_Sector_6 ((uint16_t)0x0030) /*!< Sector Number 6 */
#define FLASH_Sector_7 ((uint16_t)0x0038) /*!< Sector Number 7 */
#define FLASH_Sector_8 ((uint16_t)0x0040) /*!< Sector Number 8 */
#define FLASH_Sector_9 ((uint16_t)0x0048) /*!< Sector Number 9 */
#define FLASH_Sector_10 ((uint16_t)0x0050) /*!< Sector Number 10 */
#define FLASH_Sector_11 ((uint16_t)0x0058) /*!< Sector Number 11 */
#define FLASH_Sector_12 ((uint16_t)0x0080) /*!< Sector Number 12 */
#define FLASH_Sector_13 ((uint16_t)0x0088) /*!< Sector Number 13 */
#define FLASH_Sector_14 ((uint16_t)0x0090) /*!< Sector Number 14 */
#define FLASH_Sector_15 ((uint16_t)0x0098) /*!< Sector Number 15 */
#define FLASH_Sector_16 ((uint16_t)0x00A0) /*!< Sector Number 16 */
#define FLASH_Sector_17 ((uint16_t)0x00A8) /*!< Sector Number 17 */
#define FLASH_Sector_18 ((uint16_t)0x00B0) /*!< Sector Number 18 */
#define FLASH_Sector_19 ((uint16_t)0x00B8) /*!< Sector Number 19 */
#define FLASH_Sector_20 ((uint16_t)0x00C0) /*!< Sector Number 20 */
#define FLASH_Sector_21 ((uint16_t)0x00C8) /*!< Sector Number 21 */
#define FLASH_Sector_22 ((uint16_t)0x00D0) /*!< Sector Number 22 */
#define FLASH_Sector_23 ((uint16_t)0x00D8) /*!< Sector Number 23 */
#define IS_FLASH_SECTOR(SECTOR) (((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_0) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_1) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_2) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_3) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_4) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_5) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_6) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_7) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_8) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_9) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_10) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_11) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_12) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_13) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_14) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_15) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_16) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_17) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_18) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_19) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_20) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_21) ||\
((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_22) || ((SECTOR) == FLASH_Sector_23))
#define IS_FLASH_ADDRESS(ADDRESS) ((((ADDRESS) >= 0x08000000) && ((ADDRESS) < 0x081FFFFF)) ||\
(((ADDRESS) >= 0x1FFF7800) && ((ADDRESS) < 0x1FFF7A0F)))
/**
* @}
@ -131,18 +158,30 @@ typedef enum
/** @defgroup Option_Bytes_Write_Protection
* @{
*/
#define OB_WRP_Sector_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000001) /*!< Write protection of Sector0 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_1 ((uint32_t)0x00000002) /*!< Write protection of Sector1 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_2 ((uint32_t)0x00000004) /*!< Write protection of Sector2 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_3 ((uint32_t)0x00000008) /*!< Write protection of Sector3 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_4 ((uint32_t)0x00000010) /*!< Write protection of Sector4 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_5 ((uint32_t)0x00000020) /*!< Write protection of Sector5 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_6 ((uint32_t)0x00000040) /*!< Write protection of Sector6 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_7 ((uint32_t)0x00000080) /*!< Write protection of Sector7 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_8 ((uint32_t)0x00000100) /*!< Write protection of Sector8 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_9 ((uint32_t)0x00000200) /*!< Write protection of Sector9 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_10 ((uint32_t)0x00000400) /*!< Write protection of Sector10 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_11 ((uint32_t)0x00000800) /*!< Write protection of Sector11 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_0 ((uint32_t)0x00000001) /*!< Write protection of Sector0 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_1 ((uint32_t)0x00000002) /*!< Write protection of Sector1 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_2 ((uint32_t)0x00000004) /*!< Write protection of Sector2 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_3 ((uint32_t)0x00000008) /*!< Write protection of Sector3 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_4 ((uint32_t)0x00000010) /*!< Write protection of Sector4 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_5 ((uint32_t)0x00000020) /*!< Write protection of Sector5 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_6 ((uint32_t)0x00000040) /*!< Write protection of Sector6 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_7 ((uint32_t)0x00000080) /*!< Write protection of Sector7 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_8 ((uint32_t)0x00000100) /*!< Write protection of Sector8 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_9 ((uint32_t)0x00000200) /*!< Write protection of Sector9 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_10 ((uint32_t)0x00000400) /*!< Write protection of Sector10 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_11 ((uint32_t)0x00000800) /*!< Write protection of Sector11 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_12 ((uint32_t)0x00000001) /*!< Write protection of Sector12 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_13 ((uint32_t)0x00000002) /*!< Write protection of Sector13 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_14 ((uint32_t)0x00000004) /*!< Write protection of Sector14 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_15 ((uint32_t)0x00000008) /*!< Write protection of Sector15 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_16 ((uint32_t)0x00000010) /*!< Write protection of Sector16 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_17 ((uint32_t)0x00000020) /*!< Write protection of Sector17 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_18 ((uint32_t)0x00000040) /*!< Write protection of Sector18 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_19 ((uint32_t)0x00000080) /*!< Write protection of Sector19 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_20 ((uint32_t)0x00000100) /*!< Write protection of Sector20 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_21 ((uint32_t)0x00000200) /*!< Write protection of Sector21 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_22 ((uint32_t)0x00000400) /*!< Write protection of Sector22 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_23 ((uint32_t)0x00000800) /*!< Write protection of Sector23 */
#define OB_WRP_Sector_All ((uint32_t)0x00000FFF) /*!< Write protection of all Sectors */
#define IS_OB_WRP(SECTOR)((((SECTOR) & (uint32_t)0xFFFFF000) == 0x00000000) && ((SECTOR) != 0x00000000))
@ -221,15 +260,15 @@ typedef enum
/** @defgroup FLASH_Flags
* @{
*/
#define FLASH_FLAG_EOP ((uint32_t)0x00000001) /*!< FLASH End of Operation flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_OPERR ((uint32_t)0x00000002) /*!< FLASH operation Error flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR ((uint32_t)0x00000010) /*!< FLASH Write protected error flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR ((uint32_t)0x00000020) /*!< FLASH Programming Alignment error flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_EOP ((uint32_t)0x00000001) /*!< FLASH End of Operation flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_OPERR ((uint32_t)0x00000002) /*!< FLASH operation Error flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR ((uint32_t)0x00000010) /*!< FLASH Write protected error flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR ((uint32_t)0x00000020) /*!< FLASH Programming Alignment error flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_PGPERR ((uint32_t)0x00000040) /*!< FLASH Programming Parallelism error flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_PGSERR ((uint32_t)0x00000080) /*!< FLASH Programming Sequence error flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_BSY ((uint32_t)0x00010000) /*!< FLASH Busy flag */
#define IS_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLAG) ((((FLAG) & (uint32_t)0xFFFFFF0C) == 0x00000000) && ((FLAG) != 0x00000000))
#define IS_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLAG) (((FLAG) == FLASH_FLAG_EOP) || ((FLAG) == FLASH_FLAG_OPERR) || \
#define FLASH_FLAG_PGSERR ((uint32_t)0x00000080) /*!< FLASH Programming Sequence error flag */
#define FLASH_FLAG_BSY ((uint32_t)0x00010000) /*!< FLASH Busy flag */
#define IS_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLAG) ((((FLAG) & (uint32_t)0xFFFFFE0C) == 0x00000000) && ((FLAG) != 0x00000000))
#define IS_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLAG) (((FLAG) == FLASH_FLAG_EOP) || ((FLAG) == FLASH_FLAG_OPERR) || \
((FLAG) == FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR) || ((FLAG) == FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR) || \
((FLAG) == FLASH_FLAG_PGPERR) || ((FLAG) == FLASH_FLAG_PGSERR) || \
((FLAG) == FLASH_FLAG_BSY))
@ -262,15 +301,30 @@ typedef enum
*/
/**
* @brief ACR register byte 0 (Bits[8:0]) base address
* @brief ACR register byte 0 (Bits[7:0]) base address
*/
#define ACR_BYTE0_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40023C00)
/**
* @brief OPTCR register byte 3 (Bits[24:16]) base address
* @brief OPTCR register byte 0 (Bits[7:0]) base address
*/
#define OPTCR_BYTE0_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40023C14)
/**
* @brief OPTCR register byte 1 (Bits[15:8]) base address
*/
#define OPTCR_BYTE1_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40023C15)
/**
* @brief OPTCR register byte 2 (Bits[23:16]) base address
*/
#define OPTCR_BYTE2_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40023C16)
/**
* @brief OPTCR register byte 3 (Bits[31:24]) base address
*/
#define OPTCR_BYTE3_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40023C17)
/**
* @brief OPTCR1 register byte 0 (Bits[7:0]) base address
*/
#define OPTCR1_BYTE2_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40023C1A)
/**
* @}
@ -288,8 +342,8 @@ void FLASH_InstructionCacheReset(void);
void FLASH_DataCacheReset(void);
/* FLASH Memory Programming functions *****************************************/
void FLASH_Unlock(void);
void FLASH_Lock(void);
void FLASH_Unlock(void);
void FLASH_Lock(void);
FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseSector(uint32_t FLASH_Sector, uint8_t VoltageRange);
FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllSectors(uint8_t VoltageRange);
FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramDoubleWord(uint32_t Address, uint64_t Data);
@ -298,22 +352,24 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data);
FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data);
/* Option Bytes Programming functions *****************************************/
void FLASH_OB_Unlock(void);
void FLASH_OB_Lock(void);
void FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState);
void FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP);
void FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY);
void FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR);
void FLASH_OB_Unlock(void);
void FLASH_OB_Lock(void);
void FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState);
void FLASH_OB_WRP1Config(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState);
void FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP);
void FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY);
void FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR);
FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_Launch(void);
uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void);
uint16_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void);
FlagStatus FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void);
uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetBOR(void);
uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void);
uint16_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void);
uint16_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP1(void);
FlagStatus FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void);
uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetBOR(void);
/* Interrupts and flags management functions **********************************/
void FLASH_ITConfig(uint32_t FLASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
FlagStatus FLASH_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG);
void FLASH_ClearFlag(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG);
void FLASH_ITConfig(uint32_t FLASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
FlagStatus FLASH_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG);
void FLASH_ClearFlag(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG);
FLASH_Status FLASH_GetStatus(void);
FLASH_Status FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(void);
@ -331,4 +387,4 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(void);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

44
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_fsmc.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_fsmc.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the FSMC firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -91,7 +97,7 @@ typedef struct
This parameter can be a value of @ref FSMC_NORSRAM_Bank */
uint32_t FSMC_DataAddressMux; /*!< Specifies whether the address and data values are
multiplexed on the databus or not.
multiplexed on the data bus or not.
This parameter can be a value of @ref FSMC_Data_Address_Bus_Multiplexing */
uint32_t FSMC_MemoryType; /*!< Specifies the type of external memory attached to
@ -125,7 +131,7 @@ typedef struct
uint32_t FSMC_WriteOperation; /*!< Enables or disables the write operation in the selected bank by the FSMC.
This parameter can be a value of @ref FSMC_Write_Operation */
uint32_t FSMC_WaitSignal; /*!< Enables or disables the wait-state insertion via wait
uint32_t FSMC_WaitSignal; /*!< Enables or disables the wait state insertion via wait
signal, valid for Flash memory access in burst mode.
This parameter can be a value of @ref FSMC_Wait_Signal */
@ -135,9 +141,9 @@ typedef struct
uint32_t FSMC_WriteBurst; /*!< Enables or disables the write burst operation.
This parameter can be a value of @ref FSMC_Write_Burst */
FSMC_NORSRAMTimingInitTypeDef* FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct; /*!< Timing Parameters for write and read access if the ExtendedMode is not used*/
FSMC_NORSRAMTimingInitTypeDef* FSMC_ReadWriteTimingStruct; /*!< Timing Parameters for write and read access if the Extended Mode is not used*/
FSMC_NORSRAMTimingInitTypeDef* FSMC_WriteTimingStruct; /*!< Timing Parameters for write access if the ExtendedMode is used*/
FSMC_NORSRAMTimingInitTypeDef* FSMC_WriteTimingStruct; /*!< Timing Parameters for write access if the Extended Mode is used*/
}FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef;
/**
@ -146,26 +152,26 @@ typedef struct
typedef struct
{
uint32_t FSMC_SetupTime; /*!< Defines the number of HCLK cycles to setup address before
the command assertion for NAND-Flash read or write access
the command assertion for NAND Flash read or write access
to common/Attribute or I/O memory space (depending on
the memory space timing to be configured).
This parameter can be a value between 0 and 0xFF.*/
uint32_t FSMC_WaitSetupTime; /*!< Defines the minimum number of HCLK cycles to assert the
command for NAND-Flash read or write access to
command for NAND Flash read or write access to
common/Attribute or I/O memory space (depending on the
memory space timing to be configured).
This parameter can be a number between 0x00 and 0xFF */
uint32_t FSMC_HoldSetupTime; /*!< Defines the number of HCLK clock cycles to hold address
(and data for write access) after the command deassertion
for NAND-Flash read or write access to common/Attribute
(and data for write access) after the command de-assertion
for NAND Flash read or write access to common/Attribute
or I/O memory space (depending on the memory space timing
to be configured).
This parameter can be a number between 0x00 and 0xFF */
uint32_t FSMC_HiZSetupTime; /*!< Defines the number of HCLK clock cycles during which the
databus is kept in HiZ after the start of a NAND-Flash
data bus is kept in HiZ after the start of a NAND Flash
write access to common/Attribute or I/O memory space (depending
on the memory space timing to be configured).
This parameter can be a number between 0x00 and 0xFF */
@ -666,4 +672,4 @@ void FSMC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t FSMC_Bank, uint32_t FSMC_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

99
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_gpio.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_gpio.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the GPIO firmware
* library.
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -50,7 +56,8 @@
((PERIPH) == GPIOG) || \
((PERIPH) == GPIOH) || \
((PERIPH) == GPIOI))
/**
* @brief GPIO Configuration Mode enumeration
*/
@ -264,8 +271,11 @@ typedef struct
/**
* @brief AF 5 selection
*/
#define GPIO_AF_SPI1 ((uint8_t)0x05) /* SPI1 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_SPI1 ((uint8_t)0x05) /* SPI1 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_SPI2 ((uint8_t)0x05) /* SPI2/I2S2 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_SPI4 ((uint8_t)0x05) /* SPI4 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_SPI5 ((uint8_t)0x05) /* SPI5 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_SPI6 ((uint8_t)0x05) /* SPI6 Alternate Function mapping */
/**
* @brief AF 6 selection
@ -275,23 +285,25 @@ typedef struct
/**
* @brief AF 7 selection
*/
#define GPIO_AF_USART1 ((uint8_t)0x07) /* USART1 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_USART2 ((uint8_t)0x07) /* USART2 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_USART3 ((uint8_t)0x07) /* USART3 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_USART1 ((uint8_t)0x07) /* USART1 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_USART2 ((uint8_t)0x07) /* USART2 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_USART3 ((uint8_t)0x07) /* USART3 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_I2S3ext ((uint8_t)0x07) /* I2S3ext Alternate Function mapping */
/**
* @brief AF 8 selection
*/
#define GPIO_AF_UART4 ((uint8_t)0x08) /* UART4 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_UART5 ((uint8_t)0x08) /* UART5 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_UART4 ((uint8_t)0x08) /* UART4 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_UART5 ((uint8_t)0x08) /* UART5 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_USART6 ((uint8_t)0x08) /* USART6 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_UART7 ((uint8_t)0x08) /* UART7 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_UART8 ((uint8_t)0x08) /* UART8 Alternate Function mapping */
/**
* @brief AF 9 selection
*/
#define GPIO_AF_CAN1 ((uint8_t)0x09) /* CAN1 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_CAN2 ((uint8_t)0x09) /* CAN2 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_CAN1 ((uint8_t)0x09) /* CAN1 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_CAN2 ((uint8_t)0x09) /* CAN2 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_TIM12 ((uint8_t)0x09) /* TIM12 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_TIM13 ((uint8_t)0x09) /* TIM13 Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_TIM14 ((uint8_t)0x09) /* TIM14 Alternate Function mapping */
@ -310,9 +322,10 @@ typedef struct
/**
* @brief AF 12 selection
*/
#define GPIO_AF_FSMC ((uint8_t)0xC) /* FSMC Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_OTG_HS_FS ((uint8_t)0xC) /* OTG HS configured in FS, Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_SDIO ((uint8_t)0xC) /* SDIO Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_FSMC ((uint8_t)0xC) /* FSMC Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_OTG_HS_FS ((uint8_t)0xC) /* OTG HS configured in FS, Alternate Function mapping */
#define GPIO_AF_SDIO ((uint8_t)0xC) /* SDIO Alternate Function mapping */
/**
* @brief AF 13 selection
@ -324,24 +337,28 @@ typedef struct
*/
#define GPIO_AF_EVENTOUT ((uint8_t)0x0F) /* EVENTOUT Alternate Function mapping */
#define IS_GPIO_AF(AF) (((AF) == GPIO_AF_RTC_50Hz) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM14) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_MCO) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TAMPER) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_SWJ) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TRACE) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM1) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM2) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM3) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM4) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM5) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM8) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_I2C1) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_I2C2) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_I2C3) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_SPI1) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_SPI2) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM13) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_SPI3) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM14) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_USART1) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_USART2) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_USART3) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_UART4) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_UART5) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_USART6) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_CAN1) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_CAN2) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_OTG_FS) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_OTG_HS) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_ETH) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_FSMC) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_OTG_HS_FS) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_SDIO) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_DCMI) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_EVENTOUT))
#define IS_GPIO_AF(AF) (((AF) == GPIO_AF_RTC_50Hz) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM14) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_MCO) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TAMPER) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_SWJ) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TRACE) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM1) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM2) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM3) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM4) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM5) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM8) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_I2C1) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_I2C2) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_I2C3) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_SPI1) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_SPI2) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM13) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_SPI3) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_TIM14) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_USART1) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_USART2) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_USART3) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_UART4) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_UART5) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_USART6) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_CAN1) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_CAN2) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_OTG_FS) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_OTG_HS) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_ETH) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_OTG_HS_FS) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_SDIO) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_DCMI) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_EVENTOUT) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_SPI4) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_SPI5) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_SPI6) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_UART7) || ((AF) == GPIO_AF_UART8) || \
((AF) == GPIO_AF_FSMC))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -403,4 +420,4 @@ void GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_PinSource, uint8_t GPIO
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

93
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_hash.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_hash.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the HASH
* firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -46,12 +52,12 @@
*/
typedef struct
{
uint32_t HASH_AlgoSelection; /*!< SHA-1 or MD5. This parameter can be a value
of @ref HASH_Algo_Selection */
uint32_t HASH_AlgoSelection; /*!< SHA-1, SHA-224, SHA-256 or MD5. This parameter
can be a value of @ref HASH_Algo_Selection */
uint32_t HASH_AlgoMode; /*!< HASH or HMAC. This parameter can be a value
of @ref HASH_processor_Algorithm_Mode */
uint32_t HASH_DataType; /*!< 32-bit data, 16-bit data, 8-bit data or
bit-string. This parameter can be a value of
bit string. This parameter can be a value of
@ref HASH_Data_Type */
uint32_t HASH_HMACKeyType; /*!< HMAC Short key or HMAC Long Key. This parameter
can be a value of @ref HASH_HMAC_Long_key_only_for_HMAC_mode */
@ -62,7 +68,9 @@ typedef struct
*/
typedef struct
{
uint32_t Data[5]; /*!< Message digest result : 5x 32bit words for SHA1 or
uint32_t Data[8]; /*!< Message digest result : 8x 32bit wors for SHA-256,
7x 32bit wors for SHA-224,
5x 32bit words for SHA-1 or
4x 32bit words for MD5 */
} HASH_MsgDigest;
@ -74,7 +82,7 @@ typedef struct
uint32_t HASH_IMR;
uint32_t HASH_STR;
uint32_t HASH_CR;
uint32_t HASH_CSR[51];
uint32_t HASH_CSR[54];
}HASH_Context;
/* Exported constants --------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -86,10 +94,14 @@ typedef struct
/** @defgroup HASH_Algo_Selection
* @{
*/
#define HASH_AlgoSelection_SHA1 ((uint16_t)0x0000) /*!< HASH function is SHA1 */
#define HASH_AlgoSelection_MD5 ((uint16_t)0x0080) /*!< HASH function is MD5 */
#define HASH_AlgoSelection_SHA1 ((uint32_t)0x0000) /*!< HASH function is SHA1 */
#define HASH_AlgoSelection_SHA224 HASH_CR_ALGO_1 /*!< HASH function is SHA224 */
#define HASH_AlgoSelection_SHA256 HASH_CR_ALGO /*!< HASH function is SHA256 */
#define HASH_AlgoSelection_MD5 HASH_CR_ALGO_0 /*!< HASH function is MD5 */
#define IS_HASH_ALGOSELECTION(ALGOSELECTION) (((ALGOSELECTION) == HASH_AlgoSelection_SHA1) || \
((ALGOSELECTION) == HASH_AlgoSelection_SHA224) || \
((ALGOSELECTION) == HASH_AlgoSelection_SHA256) || \
((ALGOSELECTION) == HASH_AlgoSelection_MD5))
/**
* @}
@ -98,8 +110,8 @@ typedef struct
/** @defgroup HASH_processor_Algorithm_Mode
* @{
*/
#define HASH_AlgoMode_HASH ((uint16_t)0x0000) /*!< Algorithm is HASH */
#define HASH_AlgoMode_HMAC ((uint16_t)0x0040) /*!< Algorithm is HMAC */
#define HASH_AlgoMode_HASH ((uint32_t)0x00000000) /*!< Algorithm is HASH */
#define HASH_AlgoMode_HMAC HASH_CR_MODE /*!< Algorithm is HMAC */
#define IS_HASH_ALGOMODE(ALGOMODE) (((ALGOMODE) == HASH_AlgoMode_HASH) || \
((ALGOMODE) == HASH_AlgoMode_HMAC))
@ -110,14 +122,14 @@ typedef struct
/** @defgroup HASH_Data_Type
* @{
*/
#define HASH_DataType_32b ((uint16_t)0x0000)
#define HASH_DataType_16b ((uint16_t)0x0010)
#define HASH_DataType_8b ((uint16_t)0x0020)
#define HASH_DataType_1b ((uint16_t)0x0030)
#define HASH_DataType_32b ((uint32_t)0x0000) /*!< 32-bit data. No swapping */
#define HASH_DataType_16b HASH_CR_DATATYPE_0 /*!< 16-bit data. Each half word is swapped */
#define HASH_DataType_8b HASH_CR_DATATYPE_1 /*!< 8-bit data. All bytes are swapped */
#define HASH_DataType_1b HASH_CR_DATATYPE /*!< 1-bit data. In the word all bits are swapped */
#define IS_HASH_DATATYPE(DATATYPE) (((DATATYPE) == HASH_DataType_32b)|| \
((DATATYPE) == HASH_DataType_16b)|| \
((DATATYPE) == HASH_DataType_8b)|| \
((DATATYPE) == HASH_DataType_8b) || \
((DATATYPE) == HASH_DataType_1b))
/**
* @}
@ -127,10 +139,10 @@ typedef struct
* @{
*/
#define HASH_HMACKeyType_ShortKey ((uint32_t)0x00000000) /*!< HMAC Key is <= 64 bytes */
#define HASH_HMACKeyType_LongKey ((uint32_t)0x00010000) /*!< HMAC Key is > 64 bytes */
#define HASH_HMACKeyType_LongKey HASH_CR_LKEY /*!< HMAC Key is > 64 bytes */
#define IS_HASH_HMAC_KEYTYPE(KEYTYPE) (((KEYTYPE) == HASH_HMACKeyType_ShortKey) || \
((KEYTYPE) == HASH_HMACKeyType_LongKey))
((KEYTYPE) == HASH_HMACKeyType_LongKey))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -147,10 +159,10 @@ typedef struct
/** @defgroup HASH_interrupts_definition
* @{
*/
#define HASH_IT_DINI ((uint8_t)0x01) /*!< A new block can be entered into the input buffer (DIN)*/
#define HASH_IT_DCI ((uint8_t)0x02) /*!< Digest calculation complete */
#define HASH_IT_DINI HASH_IMR_DINIM /*!< A new block can be entered into the input buffer (DIN) */
#define HASH_IT_DCI HASH_IMR_DCIM /*!< Digest calculation complete */
#define IS_HASH_IT(IT) ((((IT) & (uint8_t)0xFC) == 0x00) && ((IT) != 0x00))
#define IS_HASH_IT(IT) ((((IT) & (uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFC) == 0x00000000) && ((IT) != 0x00000000))
#define IS_HASH_GET_IT(IT) (((IT) == HASH_IT_DINI) || ((IT) == HASH_IT_DCI))
/**
@ -160,11 +172,11 @@ typedef struct
/** @defgroup HASH_flags_definition
* @{
*/
#define HASH_FLAG_DINIS ((uint16_t)0x0001) /*!< 16 locations are free in the DIN : A new block can be entered into the input buffer.*/
#define HASH_FLAG_DCIS ((uint16_t)0x0002) /*!< Digest calculation complete */
#define HASH_FLAG_DMAS ((uint16_t)0x0004) /*!< DMA interface is enabled (DMAE=1) or a transfer is ongoing */
#define HASH_FLAG_BUSY ((uint16_t)0x0008) /*!< The hash core is Busy : processing a block of data */
#define HASH_FLAG_DINNE ((uint16_t)0x1000) /*!< DIN not empty : The input buffer contains at least one word of data */
#define HASH_FLAG_DINIS HASH_SR_DINIS /*!< 16 locations are free in the DIN : A new block can be entered into the input buffer */
#define HASH_FLAG_DCIS HASH_SR_DCIS /*!< Digest calculation complete */
#define HASH_FLAG_DMAS HASH_SR_DMAS /*!< DMA interface is enabled (DMAE=1) or a transfer is ongoing */
#define HASH_FLAG_BUSY HASH_SR_BUSY /*!< The hash core is Busy : processing a block of data */
#define HASH_FLAG_DINNE HASH_CR_DINNE /*!< DIN not empty : The input buffer contains at least one word of data */
#define IS_HASH_GET_FLAG(FLAG) (((FLAG) == HASH_FLAG_DINIS) || \
((FLAG) == HASH_FLAG_DCIS) || \
@ -199,21 +211,22 @@ void HASH_DataIn(uint32_t Data);
uint8_t HASH_GetInFIFOWordsNbr(void);
void HASH_SetLastWordValidBitsNbr(uint16_t ValidNumber);
void HASH_StartDigest(void);
void HASH_AutoStartDigest(FunctionalState NewState);
void HASH_GetDigest(HASH_MsgDigest* HASH_MessageDigest);
/* HASH Context swapping functions ********************************************/
void HASH_SaveContext(HASH_Context* HASH_ContextSave);
void HASH_RestoreContext(HASH_Context* HASH_ContextRestore);
/* HASH's DMA interface function **********************************************/
/* HASH DMA interface function ************************************************/
void HASH_DMACmd(FunctionalState NewState);
/* HASH Interrupts and flags management functions *****************************/
void HASH_ITConfig(uint8_t HASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
FlagStatus HASH_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t HASH_FLAG);
void HASH_ClearFlag(uint16_t HASH_FLAG);
ITStatus HASH_GetITStatus(uint8_t HASH_IT);
void HASH_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t HASH_IT);
void HASH_ITConfig(uint32_t HASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
FlagStatus HASH_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t HASH_FLAG);
void HASH_ClearFlag(uint32_t HASH_FLAG);
ITStatus HASH_GetITStatus(uint32_t HASH_IT);
void HASH_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t HASH_IT);
/* High Level SHA1 functions **************************************************/
ErrorStatus HASH_SHA1(uint8_t *Input, uint32_t Ilen, uint8_t Output[20]);
@ -241,4 +254,4 @@ ErrorStatus HMAC_MD5(uint8_t *Key, uint32_t Keylen,
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

39
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_i2c.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_i2c.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the I2C firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -76,6 +82,17 @@ typedef struct
#define IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(PERIPH) (((PERIPH) == I2C1) || \
((PERIPH) == I2C2) || \
((PERIPH) == I2C3))
/** @defgroup I2C_Digital_Filter
* @{
*/
#define IS_I2C_DIGITAL_FILTER(FILTER) ((FILTER) <= 0x0000000F)
/**
* @}
*/
/** @defgroup I2C_mode
* @{
*/
@ -534,6 +551,8 @@ void I2C_DeInit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx);
void I2C_Init(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, I2C_InitTypeDef* I2C_InitStruct);
void I2C_StructInit(I2C_InitTypeDef* I2C_InitStruct);
void I2C_Cmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState);
void I2C_DigitalFilterConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t I2C_DigitalFilter);
void I2C_AnalogFilterCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState);
void I2C_GenerateSTART(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState);
void I2C_GenerateSTOP(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState);
void I2C_Send7bitAddress(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint8_t Address, uint8_t I2C_Direction);
@ -689,4 +708,4 @@ void I2C_ClearITPendingBit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_iwdg.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_iwdg.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the IWDG
* firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -122,4 +128,4 @@ FlagStatus IWDG_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t IWDG_FLAG);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

35
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_pwr.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_pwr.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the PWR firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -92,9 +98,12 @@
* @{
*/
#define PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale1 ((uint32_t)0x00004000)
#define PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale2 ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
#define IS_PWR_REGULATOR_VOLTAGE(VOLTAGE) (((VOLTAGE) == PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale1) || ((VOLTAGE) == PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale2))
#define PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale1 ((uint32_t)0x0000C000)
#define PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale2 ((uint32_t)0x00008000)
#define PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale3 ((uint32_t)0x00004000)
#define IS_PWR_REGULATOR_VOLTAGE(VOLTAGE) (((VOLTAGE) == PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale1) || \
((VOLTAGE) == PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale2) || \
((VOLTAGE) == PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale3))
/**
* @}
@ -176,4 +185,4 @@ void PWR_ClearFlag(uint32_t PWR_FLAG);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

121
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_rcc.h
View File

@ -2,20 +2,26 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_rcc.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the RCC firmware library.
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the RCC firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -42,9 +48,9 @@
typedef struct
{
uint32_t SYSCLK_Frequency; /*!< SYSCLK clock frequency expressed in Hz */
uint32_t HCLK_Frequency; /*!< HCLK clock frequency expressed in Hz */
uint32_t PCLK1_Frequency; /*!< PCLK1 clock frequency expressed in Hz */
uint32_t PCLK2_Frequency; /*!< PCLK2 clock frequency expressed in Hz */
uint32_t HCLK_Frequency; /*!< HCLK clock frequency expressed in Hz */
uint32_t PCLK1_Frequency; /*!< PCLK1 clock frequency expressed in Hz */
uint32_t PCLK2_Frequency; /*!< PCLK2 clock frequency expressed in Hz */
}RCC_ClocksTypeDef;
/* Exported constants --------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -78,8 +84,9 @@ typedef struct
#define IS_RCC_PLLQ_VALUE(VALUE) ((4 <= (VALUE)) && ((VALUE) <= 15))
#define IS_RCC_PLLI2SN_VALUE(VALUE) ((192 <= (VALUE)) && ((VALUE) <= 432))
#define IS_RCC_PLLI2SR_VALUE(VALUE) ((2 <= (VALUE)) && ((VALUE) <= 7))
/**
#define IS_RCC_PLLI2SR_VALUE(VALUE) ((2 <= (VALUE)) && ((VALUE) <= 7))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -142,12 +149,14 @@ typedef struct
#define RCC_IT_PLLRDY ((uint8_t)0x10)
#define RCC_IT_PLLI2SRDY ((uint8_t)0x20)
#define RCC_IT_CSS ((uint8_t)0x80)
#define IS_RCC_IT(IT) ((((IT) & (uint8_t)0xC0) == 0x00) && ((IT) != 0x00))
#define IS_RCC_GET_IT(IT) (((IT) == RCC_IT_LSIRDY) || ((IT) == RCC_IT_LSERDY) || \
((IT) == RCC_IT_HSIRDY) || ((IT) == RCC_IT_HSERDY) || \
((IT) == RCC_IT_PLLRDY) || ((IT) == RCC_IT_CSS) || \
((IT) == RCC_IT_PLLI2SRDY))
#define IS_RCC_CLEAR_IT(IT) ((((IT) & (uint8_t)0x40) == 0x00) && ((IT) != 0x00))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -245,6 +254,17 @@ typedef struct
/**
* @}
*/
/** @defgroup RCC_TIM_PRescaler_Selection
* @{
*/
#define RCC_TIMPrescDesactivated ((uint8_t)0x00)
#define RCC_TIMPrescActivated ((uint8_t)0x01)
#define IS_RCC_TIMCLK_PRESCALER(VALUE) (((VALUE) == RCC_TIMPrescDesactivated) || ((VALUE) == RCC_TIMPrescActivated))
/**
* @}
*/
/** @defgroup RCC_AHB1_Peripherals
* @{
@ -263,6 +283,7 @@ typedef struct
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_SRAM1 ((uint32_t)0x00010000)
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_SRAM2 ((uint32_t)0x00020000)
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_BKPSRAM ((uint32_t)0x00040000)
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_SRAM3 ((uint32_t)0x00080000)
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_CCMDATARAMEN ((uint32_t)0x00100000)
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA1 ((uint32_t)0x00200000)
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA2 ((uint32_t)0x00400000)
@ -272,9 +293,12 @@ typedef struct
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_ETH_MAC_PTP ((uint32_t)0x10000000)
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_OTG_HS ((uint32_t)0x20000000)
#define RCC_AHB1Periph_OTG_HS_ULPI ((uint32_t)0x40000000)
#define IS_RCC_AHB1_CLOCK_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0x818BEE00) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
#define IS_RCC_AHB1_RESET_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0xDD9FEE00) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
#define IS_RCC_AHB1_LPMODE_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0x81986E00) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
#define IS_RCC_AHB1_LPMODE_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0x81906E00) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -295,7 +319,8 @@ typedef struct
/** @defgroup RCC_AHB3_Peripherals
* @{
*/
#define RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
#define RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
#define IS_RCC_AHB3_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0xFFFFFFFE) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
/**
* @}
@ -327,7 +352,9 @@ typedef struct
#define RCC_APB1Periph_CAN2 ((uint32_t)0x04000000)
#define RCC_APB1Periph_PWR ((uint32_t)0x10000000)
#define RCC_APB1Periph_DAC ((uint32_t)0x20000000)
#define IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0xC9013600) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
#define RCC_APB1Periph_UART7 ((uint32_t)0x40000000)
#define RCC_APB1Periph_UART8 ((uint32_t)0x80000000)
#define IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0x09013600) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -345,12 +372,18 @@ typedef struct
#define RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3 ((uint32_t)0x00000400)
#define RCC_APB2Periph_SDIO ((uint32_t)0x00000800)
#define RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1 ((uint32_t)0x00001000)
#define RCC_APB2Periph_SPI4 ((uint32_t)0x00002000)
#define RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG ((uint32_t)0x00004000)
#define RCC_APB2Periph_TIM9 ((uint32_t)0x00010000)
#define RCC_APB2Periph_TIM10 ((uint32_t)0x00020000)
#define RCC_APB2Periph_TIM11 ((uint32_t)0x00040000)
#define IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0xFFF8A0CC) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
#define IS_RCC_APB2_RESET_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0xFFF8A6CC) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
#define RCC_APB2Periph_SPI5 ((uint32_t)0x00100000)
#define RCC_APB2Periph_SPI6 ((uint32_t)0x00200000)
#define IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0xFFC880CC) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
#define IS_RCC_APB2_RESET_PERIPH(PERIPH) ((((PERIPH) & 0xFFC886CC) == 0x00) && ((PERIPH) != 0x00))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -415,6 +448,7 @@ typedef struct
#define RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST ((uint8_t)0x7D)
#define RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST ((uint8_t)0x7E)
#define RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST ((uint8_t)0x7F)
#define IS_RCC_FLAG(FLAG) (((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY) || ((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) || \
((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY) || ((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_LSERDY) || \
((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY) || ((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_BORRST) || \
@ -422,6 +456,7 @@ typedef struct
((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_SFTRST) || ((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST)|| \
((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST)|| ((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST)|| \
((FLAG) == RCC_FLAG_PLLI2SRDY))
#define IS_RCC_CALIBRATION_VALUE(VALUE) ((VALUE) <= 0x1F)
/**
* @}
@ -438,35 +473,35 @@ typedef struct
void RCC_DeInit(void);
/* Internal/external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions *********/
void RCC_HSEConfig(uint8_t RCC_HSE);
void RCC_HSEConfig(uint8_t RCC_HSE);
ErrorStatus RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp(void);
void RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue(uint8_t HSICalibrationValue);
void RCC_HSICmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_LSEConfig(uint8_t RCC_LSE);
void RCC_LSICmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue(uint8_t HSICalibrationValue);
void RCC_HSICmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_LSEConfig(uint8_t RCC_LSE);
void RCC_LSICmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_PLLConfig(uint32_t RCC_PLLSource, uint32_t PLLM, uint32_t PLLN, uint32_t PLLP, uint32_t PLLQ);
void RCC_PLLCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_PLLI2SConfig(uint32_t PLLI2SN, uint32_t PLLI2SR);
void RCC_PLLI2SCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_MCO1Config(uint32_t RCC_MCO1Source, uint32_t RCC_MCO1Div);
void RCC_MCO2Config(uint32_t RCC_MCO2Source, uint32_t RCC_MCO2Div);
void RCC_PLLConfig(uint32_t RCC_PLLSource, uint32_t PLLM, uint32_t PLLN, uint32_t PLLP, uint32_t PLLQ);
void RCC_PLLCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_PLLI2SConfig(uint32_t PLLI2SN, uint32_t PLLI2SR);
void RCC_PLLI2SCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_MCO1Config(uint32_t RCC_MCO1Source, uint32_t RCC_MCO1Div);
void RCC_MCO2Config(uint32_t RCC_MCO2Source, uint32_t RCC_MCO2Div);
/* System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration functions ******************/
void RCC_SYSCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_SYSCLKSource);
void RCC_SYSCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_SYSCLKSource);
uint8_t RCC_GetSYSCLKSource(void);
void RCC_HCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_SYSCLK);
void RCC_PCLK1Config(uint32_t RCC_HCLK);
void RCC_PCLK2Config(uint32_t RCC_HCLK);
void RCC_GetClocksFreq(RCC_ClocksTypeDef* RCC_Clocks);
void RCC_HCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_SYSCLK);
void RCC_PCLK1Config(uint32_t RCC_HCLK);
void RCC_PCLK2Config(uint32_t RCC_HCLK);
void RCC_GetClocksFreq(RCC_ClocksTypeDef* RCC_Clocks);
/* Peripheral clocks configuration functions **********************************/
void RCC_RTCCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_RTCCLKSource);
void RCC_RTCCLKCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_BackupResetCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_I2SCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_I2SCLKSource);
void RCC_TIMCLKPresConfig(uint32_t RCC_TIMCLKPrescaler);
void RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState);
@ -487,11 +522,11 @@ void RCC_APB1PeriphClockLPModeCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewSt
void RCC_APB2PeriphClockLPModeCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState);
/* Interrupts and flags management functions **********************************/
void RCC_ITConfig(uint8_t RCC_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
void RCC_ITConfig(uint8_t RCC_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
FlagStatus RCC_GetFlagStatus(uint8_t RCC_FLAG);
void RCC_ClearFlag(void);
ITStatus RCC_GetITStatus(uint8_t RCC_IT);
void RCC_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t RCC_IT);
void RCC_ClearFlag(void);
ITStatus RCC_GetITStatus(uint8_t RCC_IT);
void RCC_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t RCC_IT);
#ifdef __cplusplus
}
@ -507,4 +542,4 @@ void RCC_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t RCC_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_rng.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_rng.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the Random
* Number Generator(RNG) firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -111,4 +117,4 @@ void RNG_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t RNG_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_rtc.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_rtc.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the RTC firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -872,4 +878,4 @@ void RTC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t RTC_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

28
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_sdio.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_sdio.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the SDIO firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -77,7 +83,7 @@ typedef struct
uint32_t SDIO_Response; /*!< Specifies the SDIO response type.
This parameter can be a value of @ref SDIO_Response_Type */
uint32_t SDIO_Wait; /*!< Specifies whether SDIO wait-for-interrupt request is enabled or disabled.
uint32_t SDIO_Wait; /*!< Specifies whether SDIO wait for interrupt request is enabled or disabled.
This parameter can be a value of @ref SDIO_Wait_Interrupt_State */
uint32_t SDIO_CPSM; /*!< Specifies whether SDIO Command path state machine (CPSM)
@ -527,4 +533,4 @@ void SDIO_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t SDIO_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

46
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_spi.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_spi.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the SPI
* firmware library.
* firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -112,19 +118,25 @@ typedef struct
#define IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(PERIPH) (((PERIPH) == SPI1) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI2) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI3))
((PERIPH) == SPI3) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI4) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI5) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI6))
#define IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH_EXT(PERIPH) (((PERIPH) == SPI1) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI2) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI3) || \
#define IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH_EXT(PERIPH) (((PERIPH) == SPI1) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI2) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI3) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI4) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI5) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI6) || \
((PERIPH) == I2S2ext) || \
((PERIPH) == I2S3ext))
#define IS_SPI_23_PERIPH(PERIPH) (((PERIPH) == SPI2) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI3))
#define IS_SPI_23_PERIPH_EXT(PERIPH) (((PERIPH) == SPI2) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI3) || \
#define IS_SPI_23_PERIPH_EXT(PERIPH) (((PERIPH) == SPI2) || \
((PERIPH) == SPI3) || \
((PERIPH) == I2S2ext) || \
((PERIPH) == I2S3ext))
@ -534,4 +546,4 @@ void SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

96
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_syscfg.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_syscfg.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the SYSCFG firmware
* library.
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -58,16 +64,17 @@
#define EXTI_PortSourceGPIOG ((uint8_t)0x06)
#define EXTI_PortSourceGPIOH ((uint8_t)0x07)
#define EXTI_PortSourceGPIOI ((uint8_t)0x08)
#define IS_EXTI_PORT_SOURCE(PORTSOURCE) (((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOA) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOB) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOC) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOD) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOE) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOF) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOG) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOH) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOI))
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOB) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOC) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOD) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOE) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOF) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOG) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOH) || \
((PORTSOURCE) == EXTI_PortSourceGPIOI))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -92,16 +99,16 @@
#define EXTI_PinSource13 ((uint8_t)0x0D)
#define EXTI_PinSource14 ((uint8_t)0x0E)
#define EXTI_PinSource15 ((uint8_t)0x0F)
#define IS_EXTI_PIN_SOURCE(PINSOURCE) (((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource0) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource1) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource2) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource3) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource4) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource5) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource6) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource7) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource8) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource9) || \
#define IS_EXTI_PIN_SOURCE(PINSOURCE) (((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource0) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource1) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource2) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource3) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource4) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource5) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource6) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource7) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource8) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource9) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource10) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource11) || \
((PINSOURCE) == EXTI_PinSource12) || \
@ -118,13 +125,14 @@
*/
#define SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_Flash ((uint8_t)0x00)
#define SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SystemFlash ((uint8_t)0x01)
#define SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_FSMC ((uint8_t)0x02)
#define SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM ((uint8_t)0x03)
#define IS_SYSCFG_MEMORY_REMAP_CONFING(REMAP) (((REMAP) == SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_Flash) || \
((REMAP) == SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SystemFlash) || \
((REMAP) == SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM) || \
((REMAP) == SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_FSMC))
#define SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_FSMC ((uint8_t)0x02)
#define IS_SYSCFG_MEMORY_REMAP_CONFING(REMAP) (((REMAP) == SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_Flash) || \
((REMAP) == SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SystemFlash) || \
((REMAP) == SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM) || \
((REMAP) == SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_FSMC))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -133,11 +141,11 @@
/** @defgroup SYSCFG_ETHERNET_Media_Interface
* @{
*/
#define SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterface_MII ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
#define SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterface_RMII ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
#define SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterface_MII ((uint32_t)0x00000000)
#define SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterface_RMII ((uint32_t)0x00000001)
#define IS_SYSCFG_ETH_MEDIA_INTERFACE(INTERFACE) (((INTERFACE) == SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterface_MII) || \
((INTERFACE) == SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterface_RMII))
((INTERFACE) == SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterface_RMII))
/**
* @}
*/
@ -149,11 +157,11 @@
/* Exported macro ------------------------------------------------------------*/
/* Exported functions --------------------------------------------------------*/
void SYSCFG_DeInit(void);
void SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig(uint8_t SYSCFG_MemoryRemap);
void SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig(uint8_t EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx, uint8_t EXTI_PinSourcex);
void SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterfaceConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterface);
void SYSCFG_CompensationCellCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
void SYSCFG_DeInit(void);
void SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig(uint8_t SYSCFG_MemoryRemap);
void SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig(uint8_t EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx, uint8_t EXTI_PinSourcex);
void SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterfaceConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterface);
void SYSCFG_CompensationCellCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
FlagStatus SYSCFG_GetCompensationCellStatus(void);
#ifdef __cplusplus
@ -170,4 +178,4 @@ FlagStatus SYSCFG_GetCompensationCellStatus(void);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_tim.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_tim.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the TIM firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -1141,4 +1147,4 @@ void TIM_RemapConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_Remap);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

32
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_usart.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_usart.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the USART
* firmware library.
* firmware library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -106,7 +112,9 @@ typedef struct
((PERIPH) == USART3) || \
((PERIPH) == UART4) || \
((PERIPH) == UART5) || \
((PERIPH) == USART6))
((PERIPH) == USART6) || \
((PERIPH) == UART7) || \
((PERIPH) == UART8))
#define IS_USART_1236_PERIPH(PERIPH) (((PERIPH) == USART1) || \
((PERIPH) == USART2) || \
@ -420,4 +428,4 @@ void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/stm32f4xx_wwdg.h
View File

@ -2,21 +2,27 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_wwdg.h
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the WWDG firmware
* library.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -102,4 +108,4 @@ void WWDG_ClearFlag(void);
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/misc.c
View File

@ -2,8 +2,8 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file misc.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides all the miscellaneous firmware functions (add-on
* to CMSIS functions).
*
@ -55,14 +55,20 @@
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -240,4 +246,4 @@ void SysTick_CLKSourceConfig(uint32_t SysTick_CLKSource)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

503
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_adc.c
View File

@ -2,95 +2,103 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_adc.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Analog to Digital Convertor (ADC) peripheral:
* - Initialization and Configuration (in addition to ADC multi mode
* + Initialization and Configuration (in addition to ADC multi mode
* selection)
* - Analog Watchdog configuration
* - Temperature Sensor & Vrefint (Voltage Reference internal) & VBAT
* + Analog Watchdog configuration
* + Temperature Sensor & Vrefint (Voltage Reference internal) & VBAT
* management
* - Regular Channels Configuration
* - Regular Channels DMA Configuration
* - Injected channels Configuration
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Regular Channels Configuration
* + Regular Channels DMA Configuration
* + Injected channels Configuration
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable the ADC interface clock using
* RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADCx, ENABLE);
*
* 2. ADC pins configuration
* - Enable the clock for the ADC GPIOs using the following function:
* RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
* - Configure these ADC pins in analog mode using GPIO_Init();
*
* 3. Configure the ADC Prescaler, conversion resolution and data
* alignment using the ADC_Init() function.
* 4. Activate the ADC peripheral using ADC_Cmd() function.
*
* Regular channels group configuration
* ====================================
* - To configure the ADC regular channels group features, use
* ADC_Init() and ADC_RegularChannelConfig() functions.
* - To activate the continuous mode, use the ADC_continuousModeCmd()
* function.
* - To configurate and activate the Discontinuous mode, use the
* ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig() and ADC_DiscModeCmd() functions.
* - To read the ADC converted values, use the ADC_GetConversionValue()
* function.
*
* Multi mode ADCs Regular channels configuration
* ===============================================
* - Refer to "Regular channels group configuration" description to
* configure the ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3 regular channels.
* - Select the Multi mode ADC regular channels features (dual or
* triple mode) using ADC_CommonInit() function and configure
* the DMA mode using ADC_MultiModeDMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd()
* functions.
* - Read the ADCs converted values using the
* ADC_GetMultiModeConversionValue() function.
*
* DMA for Regular channels group features configuration
* ======================================================
* - To enable the DMA mode for regular channels group, use the
* ADC_DMACmd() function.
* - To enable the generation of DMA requests continuously at the end
* of the last DMA transfer, use the ADC_DMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd()
* function.
*
* Injected channels group configuration
* =====================================
* - To configure the ADC Injected channels group features, use
* ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() and ADC_InjectedSequencerLengthConfig()
* functions.
* - To activate the continuous mode, use the ADC_continuousModeCmd()
* function.
* - To activate the Injected Discontinuous mode, use the
* ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd() function.
* - To activate the AutoInjected mode, use the ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd()
* function.
* - To read the ADC converted values, use the ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue()
* function.
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable the ADC interface clock using
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_ADCx, ENABLE);
(#) ADC pins configuration
(++) Enable the clock for the ADC GPIOs using the following function:
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
(++) Configure these ADC pins in analog mode using GPIO_Init();
(#) Configure the ADC Prescaler, conversion resolution and data
alignment using the ADC_Init() function.
(#) Activate the ADC peripheral using ADC_Cmd() function.
*** Regular channels group configuration ***
============================================
[..]
(+) To configure the ADC regular channels group features, use
ADC_Init() and ADC_RegularChannelConfig() functions.
(+) To activate the continuous mode, use the ADC_continuousModeCmd()
function.
(+) To configurate and activate the Discontinuous mode, use the
ADC_DiscModeChannelCountConfig() and ADC_DiscModeCmd() functions.
(+) To read the ADC converted values, use the ADC_GetConversionValue()
function.
*** Multi mode ADCs Regular channels configuration ***
======================================================
[..]
(+) Refer to "Regular channels group configuration" description to
configure the ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3 regular channels.
(+) Select the Multi mode ADC regular channels features (dual or
triple mode) using ADC_CommonInit() function and configure
the DMA mode using ADC_MultiModeDMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd()
functions.
(+) Read the ADCs converted values using the
ADC_GetMultiModeConversionValue() function.
*** DMA for Regular channels group features configuration ***
=============================================================
[..]
(+) To enable the DMA mode for regular channels group, use the
ADC_DMACmd() function.
(+) To enable the generation of DMA requests continuously at the end
of the last DMA transfer, use the ADC_DMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd()
function.
*** Injected channels group configuration ***
=============================================
[..]
(+) To configure the ADC Injected channels group features, use
ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() and ADC_InjectedSequencerLengthConfig()
functions.
(+) To activate the continuous mode, use the ADC_continuousModeCmd()
function.
(+) To activate the Injected Discontinuous mode, use the
ADC_InjectedDiscModeCmd() function.
(+) To activate the AutoInjected mode, use the ADC_AutoInjectedConvCmd()
function.
(+) To read the ADC converted values, use the ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue()
function.
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -176,23 +184,22 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to:
- Initialize and configure the ADC Prescaler
- ADC Conversion Resolution (12bit..6bit)
- Scan Conversion Mode (multichannels or one channel) for regular group
- ADC Continuous Conversion Mode (Continuous or Single conversion) for
regular group
- External trigger Edge and source of regular group,
- Converted data alignment (left or right)
- The number of ADC conversions that will be done using the sequencer for
regular channel group
- Multi ADC mode selection
- Direct memory access mode selection for multi ADC mode
- Delay between 2 sampling phases (used in dual or triple interleaved modes)
- Enable or disable the ADC peripheral
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
[..] This section provides functions allowing to:
(+) Initialize and configure the ADC Prescaler
(+) ADC Conversion Resolution (12bit..6bit)
(+) Scan Conversion Mode (multichannel or one channel) for regular group
(+) ADC Continuous Conversion Mode (Continuous or Single conversion) for
regular group
(+) External trigger Edge and source of regular group,
(+) Converted data alignment (left or right)
(+) The number of ADC conversions that will be done using the sequencer for
regular channel group
(+) Multi ADC mode selection
(+) Direct memory access mode selection for multi ADC mode
(+) Delay between 2 sampling phases (used in dual or triple interleaved modes)
(+) Enable or disable the ADC peripheral
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -414,20 +421,18 @@ void ADC_Cmd(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Analog Watchdog configuration functions
##### Analog Watchdog configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the Analog Watchdog
(AWD) feature in the ADC.
[..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the Analog Watchdog
(AWD) feature in the ADC.
A typical configuration Analog Watchdog is done following these steps :
1. the ADC guarded channel(s) is (are) selected using the
ADC_AnalogWatchdogSingleChannelConfig() function.
2. The Analog watchdog lower and higher threshold are configured using the
ADC_AnalogWatchdogThresholdsConfig() function.
3. The Analog watchdog is enabled and configured to enable the check, on one
or more channels, using the ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd() function.
[..] A typical configuration Analog Watchdog is done following these steps :
(#) the ADC guarded channel(s) is (are) selected using the
ADC_AnalogWatchdogSingleChannelConfig() function.
(#) The Analog watchdog lower and higher threshold are configured using the
ADC_AnalogWatchdogThresholdsConfig() function.
(#) The Analog watchdog is enabled and configured to enable the check, on one
or more channels, using the ADC_AnalogWatchdogCmd() function.
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -546,30 +551,29 @@ void ADC_AnalogWatchdogSingleChannelConfig(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_Channe
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Temperature Sensor, Vrefint and VBAT management functions
##### Temperature Sensor, Vrefint and VBAT management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to enable/ disable the internal
connections between the ADC and the Temperature Sensor, the Vrefint and the
Vbat sources.
[..] This section provides functions allowing to enable/ disable the internal
connections between the ADC and the Temperature Sensor, the Vrefint and
the Vbat sources.
A typical configuration to get the Temperature sensor and Vrefint channels
voltages is done following these steps :
1. Enable the internal connection of Temperature sensor and Vrefint sources
with the ADC channels using ADC_TempSensorVrefintCmd() function.
2. Select the ADC_Channel_TempSensor and/or ADC_Channel_Vrefint using
ADC_RegularChannelConfig() or ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() functions
3. Get the voltage values, using ADC_GetConversionValue() or
ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue().
[..] A typical configuration to get the Temperature sensor and Vrefint channels
voltages is done following these steps :
(#) Enable the internal connection of Temperature sensor and Vrefint sources
with the ADC channels using ADC_TempSensorVrefintCmd() function.
(#) Select the ADC_Channel_TempSensor and/or ADC_Channel_Vrefint using
ADC_RegularChannelConfig() or ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() functions
(#) Get the voltage values, using ADC_GetConversionValue() or
ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue().
A typical configuration to get the VBAT channel voltage is done following
these steps :
1. Enable the internal connection of VBAT source with the ADC channel using
ADC_VBATCmd() function.
2. Select the ADC_Channel_Vbat using ADC_RegularChannelConfig() or
ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() functions
3. Get the voltage value, using ADC_GetConversionValue() or
ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue().
[..] A typical configuration to get the VBAT channel voltage is done following
these steps :
(#) Enable the internal connection of VBAT source with the ADC channel using
ADC_VBATCmd() function.
(#) Select the ADC_Channel_Vbat using ADC_RegularChannelConfig() or
ADC_InjectedChannelConfig() functions
(#) Get the voltage value, using ADC_GetConversionValue() or
ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue().
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -629,40 +633,39 @@ void ADC_VBATCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Regular Channels Configuration functions
##### Regular Channels Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to manage the ADC's regular channels,
it is composed of 2 sub sections :
[..] This section provides functions allowing to manage the ADC's regular channels,
it is composed of 2 sub sections :
1. Configuration and management functions for regular channels: This subsection
provides functions allowing to configure the ADC regular channels :
- Configure the rank in the regular group sequencer for each channel
- Configure the sampling time for each channel
- select the conversion Trigger for regular channels
- select the desired EOC event behavior configuration
- Activate the continuous Mode (*)
- Activate the Discontinuous Mode
Please Note that the following features for regular channels are configurated
using the ADC_Init() function :
- scan mode activation
- continuous mode activation (**)
- External trigger source
- External trigger edge
- number of conversion in the regular channels group sequencer.
(#) Configuration and management functions for regular channels: This subsection
provides functions allowing to configure the ADC regular channels :
(++) Configure the rank in the regular group sequencer for each channel
(++) Configure the sampling time for each channel
(++) select the conversion Trigger for regular channels
(++) select the desired EOC event behavior configuration
(++) Activate the continuous Mode (*)
(++) Activate the Discontinuous Mode
-@@- Please Note that the following features for regular channels
are configurated using the ADC_Init() function :
(+@@) scan mode activation
(+@@) continuous mode activation (**)
(+@@) External trigger source
(+@@) External trigger edge
(+@@) number of conversion in the regular channels group sequencer.
@note (*) and (**) are performing the same configuration
-@@- (*) and (**) are performing the same configuration
2. Get the conversion data: This subsection provides an important function in
the ADC peripheral since it returns the converted data of the current
regular channel. When the Conversion value is read, the EOC Flag is
automatically cleared.
(#) Get the conversion data: This subsection provides an important function in
the ADC peripheral since it returns the converted data of the current
regular channel. When the Conversion value is read, the EOC Flag is
automatically cleared.
@note For multi ADC mode, the last ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3 regular conversions
results data (in the selected multi mode) can be returned in the same
time using ADC_GetMultiModeConversionValue() function.
-@- For multi ADC mode, the last ADC1, ADC2 and ADC3 regular conversions
results data (in the selected multi mode) can be returned in the same
time using ADC_GetMultiModeConversionValue() function.
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -1010,29 +1013,26 @@ uint32_t ADC_GetMultiModeConversionValue(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions
##### Regular Channels DMA Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the DMA for ADC regular
channels.
Since converted regular channel values are stored into a unique data register,
it is useful to use DMA for conversion of more than one regular channel. This
avoids the loss of the data already stored in the ADC Data register.
When the DMA mode is enabled (using the ADC_DMACmd() function), after each
conversion of a regular channel, a DMA request is generated.
Depending on the "DMA disable selection for Independent ADC mode"
configuration (using the ADC_DMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd() function),
at the end of the last DMA transfer, two possibilities are allowed:
- No new DMA request is issued to the DMA controller (feature DISABLED)
- Requests can continue to be generated (feature ENABLED).
Depending on the "DMA disable selection for multi ADC mode" configuration
(using the void ADC_MultiModeDMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd() function),
at the end of the last DMA transfer, two possibilities are allowed:
- No new DMA request is issued to the DMA controller (feature DISABLED)
- Requests can continue to be generated (feature ENABLED).
[..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the DMA for ADC
regular channels.
Since converted regular channel values are stored into a unique data
register, it is useful to use DMA for conversion of more than one regular
channel. This avoids the loss of the data already stored in the ADC
Data register.
When the DMA mode is enabled (using the ADC_DMACmd() function), after each
conversion of a regular channel, a DMA request is generated.
[..] Depending on the "DMA disable selection for Independent ADC mode"
configuration (using the ADC_DMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd() function),
at the end of the last DMA transfer, two possibilities are allowed:
(+) No new DMA request is issued to the DMA controller (feature DISABLED)
(+) Requests can continue to be generated (feature ENABLED).
[..] Depending on the "DMA disable selection for multi ADC mode" configuration
(using the void ADC_MultiModeDMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd() function),
at the end of the last DMA transfer, two possibilities are allowed:
(+) No new DMA request is issued to the DMA controller (feature DISABLED)
(+) Requests can continue to be generated (feature ENABLED).
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1120,26 +1120,26 @@ void ADC_MultiModeDMARequestAfterLastTransferCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Injected channels Configuration functions
##### Injected channels Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to configure the ADC Injected channels,
it is composed of 2 sub sections :
[..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the ADC Injected channels,
it is composed of 2 sub sections :
1. Configuration functions for Injected channels: This subsection provides
functions allowing to configure the ADC injected channels :
- Configure the rank in the injected group sequencer for each channel
- Configure the sampling time for each channel
- Activate the Auto injected Mode
- Activate the Discontinuous Mode
- scan mode activation
- External/software trigger source
- External trigger edge
- injected channels sequencer.
(#) Configuration functions for Injected channels: This subsection provides
functions allowing to configure the ADC injected channels :
(++) Configure the rank in the injected group sequencer for each channel
(++) Configure the sampling time for each channel
(++) Activate the Auto injected Mode
(++) Activate the Discontinuous Mode
(++) scan mode activation
(++) External/software trigger source
(++) External trigger edge
(++) injected channels sequencer.
2. Get the Specified Injected channel conversion data: This subsection
provides an important function in the ADC peripheral since it returns the
converted data of the specific injected channel.
(#) Get the Specified Injected channel conversion data: This subsection
provides an important function in the ADC peripheral since it returns the
converted data of the specific injected channel.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1493,75 +1493,74 @@ uint16_t ADC_GetInjectedConversionValue(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint8_t ADC_InjectedC
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the ADC Interrupts and
to get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
[..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the ADC Interrupts
and to get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
Each ADC provides 4 Interrupts sources and 6 Flags which can be divided into
3 groups:
[..] Each ADC provides 4 Interrupts sources and 6 Flags which can be divided
into 3 groups:
I. Flags and Interrupts for ADC regular channels
=================================================
Flags :
----------
1. ADC_FLAG_OVR : Overrun detection when regular converted data are lost
*** Flags and Interrupts for ADC regular channels ***
=====================================================
[..]
(+) Flags :
(##) ADC_FLAG_OVR : Overrun detection when regular converted data are lost
2. ADC_FLAG_EOC : Regular channel end of conversion ==> to indicate (depending
on EOCS bit, managed by ADC_EOCOnEachRegularChannelCmd() ) the end of:
==> a regular CHANNEL conversion
==> sequence of regular GROUP conversions .
(##) ADC_FLAG_EOC : Regular channel end of conversion ==> to indicate
(depending on EOCS bit, managed by ADC_EOCOnEachRegularChannelCmd() )
the end of:
(+++) a regular CHANNEL conversion
(+++) sequence of regular GROUP conversions .
3. ADC_FLAG_STRT: Regular channel start ==> to indicate when regular CHANNEL
conversion starts.
Interrupts :
------------
1. ADC_IT_OVR : specifies the interrupt source for Overrun detection event.
2. ADC_IT_EOC : specifies the interrupt source for Regular channel end of
conversion event.
(##) ADC_FLAG_STRT: Regular channel start ==> to indicate when regular
CHANNEL conversion starts.
[..]
(+) Interrupts :
(##) ADC_IT_OVR : specifies the interrupt source for Overrun detection
event.
(##) ADC_IT_EOC : specifies the interrupt source for Regular channel end
of conversion event.
II. Flags and Interrupts for ADC Injected channels
=================================================
Flags :
----------
1. ADC_FLAG_JEOC : Injected channel end of conversion ==> to indicate at
the end of injected GROUP conversion
*** Flags and Interrupts for ADC Injected channels ***
======================================================
[..]
(+) Flags :
(##) ADC_FLAG_JEOC : Injected channel end of conversion ==> to indicate
at the end of injected GROUP conversion
2. ADC_FLAG_JSTRT: Injected channel start ==> to indicate hardware when
injected GROUP conversion starts.
(##) ADC_FLAG_JSTRT: Injected channel start ==> to indicate hardware when
injected GROUP conversion starts.
[..]
(+) Interrupts :
(##) ADC_IT_JEOC : specifies the interrupt source for Injected channel
end of conversion event.
Interrupts :
------------
1. ADC_IT_JEOC : specifies the interrupt source for Injected channel end of
conversion event.
III. General Flags and Interrupts for the ADC
=================================================
Flags :
----------
1. ADC_FLAG_AWD: Analog watchdog ==> to indicate if the converted voltage
crosses the programmed thresholds values.
Interrupts :
------------
1. ADC_IT_AWD : specifies the interrupt source for Analog watchdog event.
*** General Flags and Interrupts for the ADC ***
================================================
[..]
(+)Flags :
(##) ADC_FLAG_AWD: Analog watchdog ==> to indicate if the converted voltage
crosses the programmed thresholds values.
[..]
(+) Interrupts :
(##) ADC_IT_AWD : specifies the interrupt source for Analog watchdog event.
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the ADC controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
[..] The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to
manage the ADC controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- ADC_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
- ADC_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events.
[..] In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(+) ADC_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
(+) ADC_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events.
In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- ADC_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
- ADC_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
- ADC_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit
(corresponding Flag).
[..] In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(+) ADC_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
(+) ADC_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
(+) ADC_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit
(corresponding Flag).
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -1739,4 +1738,4 @@ void ADC_ClearITPendingBit(ADC_TypeDef* ADCx, uint16_t ADC_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

449
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_can.c
View File

@ -2,77 +2,82 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_can.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Controller area network (CAN) peripheral:
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - CAN Frames Transmission
* - CAN Frames Reception
* - Operation modes switch
* - Error management
* - Interrupts and flags
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + CAN Frames Transmission
* + CAN Frames Reception
* + Operation modes switch
* + Error management
* + Interrupts and flags
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable the CAN controller interface clock using
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1, ENABLE); for CAN1
and RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN2, ENABLE); for CAN2
-@- In case you are using CAN2 only, you have to enable the CAN1 clock.
(#) CAN pins configuration
(++) Enable the clock for the CAN GPIOs using the following function:
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
(++) Connect the involved CAN pins to AF9 using the following function
GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_CANx);
(++) Configure these CAN pins in alternate function mode by calling
the function GPIO_Init();
(#) Initialise and configure the CAN using CAN_Init() and
CAN_FilterInit() functions.
(#) Transmit the desired CAN frame using CAN_Transmit() function.
(#) Check the transmission of a CAN frame using CAN_TransmitStatus()
function.
(#) Cancel the transmission of a CAN frame using CAN_CancelTransmit()
function.
(#) Receive a CAN frame using CAN_Recieve() function.
(#) Release the receive FIFOs using CAN_FIFORelease() function.
(#) Return the number of pending received frames using
CAN_MessagePending() function.
(#) To control CAN events you can use one of the following two methods:
(++) Check on CAN flags using the CAN_GetFlagStatus() function.
(++) Use CAN interrupts through the function CAN_ITConfig() at
initialization phase and CAN_GetITStatus() function into
interrupt routines to check if the event has occurred or not.
After checking on a flag you should clear it using CAN_ClearFlag()
function. And after checking on an interrupt event you should
clear it using CAN_ClearITPendingBit() function.
* 1. Enable the CAN controller interface clock using
* RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN1, ENABLE); for CAN1
* and RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CAN2, ENABLE); for CAN2
* @note In case you are using CAN2 only, you have to enable the CAN1 clock.
*
* 2. CAN pins configuration
* - Enable the clock for the CAN GPIOs using the following function:
* RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
* - Connect the involved CAN pins to AF9 using the following function
* GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_CANx);
* - Configure these CAN pins in alternate function mode by calling
* the function GPIO_Init();
*
* 3. Initialise and configure the CAN using CAN_Init() and
* CAN_FilterInit() functions.
*
* 4. Transmit the desired CAN frame using CAN_Transmit() function.
*
* 5. Check the transmission of a CAN frame using CAN_TransmitStatus()
* function.
*
* 6. Cancel the transmission of a CAN frame using CAN_CancelTransmit()
* function.
*
* 7. Receive a CAN frame using CAN_Recieve() function.
*
* 8. Release the receive FIFOs using CAN_FIFORelease() function.
*
* 9. Return the number of pending received frames using
* CAN_MessagePending() function.
*
* 10. To control CAN events you can use one of the following two methods:
* - Check on CAN flags using the CAN_GetFlagStatus() function.
* - Use CAN interrupts through the function CAN_ITConfig() at
* initialization phase and CAN_GetITStatus() function into
* interrupt routines to check if the event has occurred or not.
* After checking on a flag you should clear it using CAN_ClearFlag()
* function. And after checking on an interrupt event you should
* clear it using CAN_ClearITPendingBit() function.
*
*
* @endverbatim
*
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -138,17 +143,17 @@ static ITStatus CheckITStatus(uint32_t CAN_Reg, uint32_t It_Bit);
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to
- Initialize the CAN peripherals : Prescaler, operating mode, the maximum number
of time quanta to perform resynchronization, the number of time quanta in
Bit Segment 1 and 2 and many other modes.
Refer to @ref CAN_InitTypeDef for more details.
- Configures the CAN reception filter.
- Select the start bank filter for slave CAN.
- Enables or disables the Debug Freeze mode for CAN
- Enables or disables the CAN Time Trigger Operation communication mode
[..] This section provides functions allowing to
(+) Initialize the CAN peripherals : Prescaler, operating mode, the maximum
number of time quanta to perform resynchronization, the number of time
quanta in Bit Segment 1 and 2 and many other modes.
Refer to @ref CAN_InitTypeDef for more details.
(+) Configures the CAN reception filter.
(+) Select the start bank filter for slave CAN.
(+) Enables or disables the Debug Freeze mode for CAN
(+)Enables or disables the CAN Time Trigger Operation communication mode
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -551,12 +556,12 @@ void CAN_TTComModeCmd(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
CAN Frames Transmission functions
##### CAN Frames Transmission functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to
- Initiate and transmit a CAN frame message (if there is an empty mailbox).
- Check the transmission status of a CAN Frame
- Cancel a transmit request
[..] This section provides functions allowing to
(+) Initiate and transmit a CAN frame message (if there is an empty mailbox).
(+) Check the transmission status of a CAN Frame
(+) Cancel a transmit request
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -723,12 +728,12 @@ void CAN_CancelTransmit(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint8_t Mailbox)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
CAN Frames Reception functions
##### CAN Frames Reception functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to
- Receive a correct CAN frame
- Release a specified receive FIFO (2 FIFOs are available)
- Return the number of the pending received CAN frames
[..] This section provides functions allowing to
(+) Receive a correct CAN frame
(+) Release a specified receive FIFO (2 FIFOs are available)
(+) Return the number of the pending received CAN frames
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -844,12 +849,12 @@ uint8_t CAN_MessagePending(CAN_TypeDef* CANx, uint8_t FIFONumber)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
CAN Operation modes functions
##### CAN Operation modes functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to select the CAN Operation modes
- sleep mode
- normal mode
- initialization mode
[..] This section provides functions allowing to select the CAN Operation modes
(+) sleep mode
(+) normal mode
(+) initialization mode
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1004,16 +1009,16 @@ uint8_t CAN_WakeUp(CAN_TypeDef* CANx)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
CAN Bus Error management functions
##### CAN Bus Error management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to
- Return the CANx's last error code (LEC)
- Return the CANx Receive Error Counter (REC)
- Return the LSB of the 9-bit CANx Transmit Error Counter(TEC).
[..] This section provides functions allowing to
(+) Return the CANx's last error code (LEC)
(+) Return the CANx Receive Error Counter (REC)
(+) Return the LSB of the 9-bit CANx Transmit Error Counter(TEC).
@note If TEC is greater than 255, The CAN is in bus-off state.
@note if REC or TEC are greater than 96, an Error warning flag occurs.
@note if REC or TEC are greater than 127, an Error Passive Flag occurs.
-@- If TEC is greater than 255, The CAN is in bus-off state.
-@- if REC or TEC are greater than 96, an Error warning flag occurs.
-@- if REC or TEC are greater than 127, an Error Passive Flag occurs.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1099,163 +1104,161 @@ uint8_t CAN_GetLSBTransmitErrorCounter(CAN_TypeDef* CANx)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the CAN Interrupts and
to get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
[..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the CAN Interrupts
and to get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
The CAN provides 14 Interrupts sources and 15 Flags:
The CAN provides 14 Interrupts sources and 15 Flags:
===============
Flags :
===============
The 15 flags can be divided on 4 groups:
*** Flags ***
=============
[..] The 15 flags can be divided on 4 groups:
A. Transmit Flags
-----------------------
CAN_FLAG_RQCP0,
CAN_FLAG_RQCP1,
CAN_FLAG_RQCP2 : Request completed MailBoxes 0, 1 and 2 Flags
Set when when the last request (transmit or abort) has
been performed.
(+) Transmit Flags
(++) CAN_FLAG_RQCP0,
(++) CAN_FLAG_RQCP1,
(++) CAN_FLAG_RQCP2 : Request completed MailBoxes 0, 1 and 2 Flags
Set when when the last request (transmit or abort)
has been performed.
B. Receive Flags
-----------------------
(+) Receive Flags
CAN_FLAG_FMP0,
CAN_FLAG_FMP1 : FIFO 0 and 1 Message Pending Flags
set to signal that messages are pending in the receive
FIFO.
These Flags are cleared only by hardware.
CAN_FLAG_FF0,
CAN_FLAG_FF1 : FIFO 0 and 1 Full Flags
set when three messages are stored in the selected
FIFO.
(++) CAN_FLAG_FMP0,
(++) CAN_FLAG_FMP1 : FIFO 0 and 1 Message Pending Flags
set to signal that messages are pending in the receive
FIFO.
These Flags are cleared only by hardware.
CAN_FLAG_FOV0
CAN_FLAG_FOV1 : FIFO 0 and 1 Overrun Flags
set when a new message has been received and passed
the filter while the FIFO was full.
(++) CAN_FLAG_FF0,
(++) CAN_FLAG_FF1 : FIFO 0 and 1 Full Flags
set when three messages are stored in the selected
FIFO.
C. Operating Mode Flags
-----------------------
CAN_FLAG_WKU : Wake up Flag
set to signal that a SOF bit has been detected while
the CAN hardware was in Sleep mode.
(++) CAN_FLAG_FOV0
(++) CAN_FLAG_FOV1 : FIFO 0 and 1 Overrun Flags
set when a new message has been received and passed
the filter while the FIFO was full.
(+) Operating Mode Flags
(++) CAN_FLAG_WKU : Wake up Flag
set to signal that a SOF bit has been detected while
the CAN hardware was in Sleep mode.
CAN_FLAG_SLAK : Sleep acknowledge Flag
Set to signal that the CAN has entered Sleep Mode.
(++) CAN_FLAG_SLAK : Sleep acknowledge Flag
Set to signal that the CAN has entered Sleep Mode.
D. Error Flags
-----------------------
CAN_FLAG_EWG : Error Warning Flag
Set when the warning limit has been reached (Receive
Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter greater than 96).
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(+) Error Flags
(++) CAN_FLAG_EWG : Error Warning Flag
Set when the warning limit has been reached (Receive
Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter greater than 96).
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
CAN_FLAG_EPV : Error Passive Flag
Set when the Error Passive limit has been reached
(Receive Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter
greater than 127).
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(++) CAN_FLAG_EPV : Error Passive Flag
Set when the Error Passive limit has been reached
(Receive Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter
greater than 127).
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
CAN_FLAG_BOF : Bus-Off Flag
set when CAN enters the bus-off state. The bus-off
state is entered on TEC overflow, greater than 255.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(++) CAN_FLAG_BOF : Bus-Off Flag
set when CAN enters the bus-off state. The bus-off
state is entered on TEC overflow, greater than 255.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
CAN_FLAG_LEC : Last error code Flag
set If a message has been transferred (reception or
transmission) with error, and the error code is hold.
===============
Interrupts :
===============
The 14 interrupts can be divided on 4 groups:
(++) CAN_FLAG_LEC : Last error code Flag
set If a message has been transferred (reception or
transmission) with error, and the error code is hold.
*** Interrupts ***
==================
[..] The 14 interrupts can be divided on 4 groups:
A. Transmit interrupt
-----------------------
CAN_IT_TME : Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
no transmit request are pending for Tx mailboxes.
(+) Transmit interrupt
(++) CAN_IT_TME : Transmit mailbox empty Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
no transmit request are pending for Tx mailboxes.
B. Receive Interrupts
-----------------------
CAN_IT_FMP0,
CAN_IT_FMP1 : FIFO 0 and FIFO1 message pending Interrupts
if enabled, these interrupt sources are pending when
messages are pending in the receive FIFO.
The corresponding interrupt pending bits are cleared
only by hardware.
(+) Receive Interrupts
(++) CAN_IT_FMP0,
(++) CAN_IT_FMP1 : FIFO 0 and FIFO1 message pending Interrupts
if enabled, these interrupt sources are pending
when messages are pending in the receive FIFO.
The corresponding interrupt pending bits are cleared
only by hardware.
CAN_IT_FF0,
CAN_IT_FF1 : FIFO 0 and FIFO1 full Interrupts
if enabled, these interrupt sources are pending when
three messages are stored in the selected FIFO.
(++) CAN_IT_FF0,
(++) CAN_IT_FF1 : FIFO 0 and FIFO1 full Interrupts
if enabled, these interrupt sources are pending
when three messages are stored in the selected FIFO.
CAN_IT_FOV0,
CAN_IT_FOV1 : FIFO 0 and FIFO1 overrun Interrupts
if enabled, these interrupt sources are pending when
a new message has been received and passed the filter
while the FIFO was full.
(++) CAN_IT_FOV0,
(++) CAN_IT_FOV1 : FIFO 0 and FIFO1 overrun Interrupts
if enabled, these interrupt sources are pending
when a new message has been received and passed
the filter while the FIFO was full.
C. Operating Mode Interrupts
-------------------------------
CAN_IT_WKU : Wake-up Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
a SOF bit has been detected while the CAN hardware was
in Sleep mode.
(+) Operating Mode Interrupts
(++) CAN_IT_WKU : Wake-up Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
a SOF bit has been detected while the CAN hardware
was in Sleep mode.
CAN_IT_SLK : Sleep acknowledge Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
the CAN has entered Sleep Mode.
(++) CAN_IT_SLK : Sleep acknowledge Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
the CAN has entered Sleep Mode.
D. Error Interrupts
-----------------------
CAN_IT_EWG : Error warning Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
the warning limit has been reached (Receive Error
Counter or Transmit Error Counter=96).
(+) Error Interrupts
(++) CAN_IT_EWG : Error warning Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
the warning limit has been reached (Receive Error
Counter or Transmit Error Counter=96).
CAN_IT_EPV : Error passive Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
the Error Passive limit has been reached (Receive
Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter>127).
(++) CAN_IT_EPV : Error passive Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
the Error Passive limit has been reached (Receive
Error Counter or Transmit Error Counter>127).
CAN_IT_BOF : Bus-off Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
CAN enters the bus-off state. The bus-off state is
entered on TEC overflow, greater than 255.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(++) CAN_IT_BOF : Bus-off Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
CAN enters the bus-off state. The bus-off state is
entered on TEC overflow, greater than 255.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
CAN_IT_LEC : Last error code Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
a message has been transferred (reception or
transmission) with error, and the error code is hold.
(++) CAN_IT_LEC : Last error code Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
a message has been transferred (reception or
transmission) with error, and the error code is hold.
CAN_IT_ERR : Error Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
an error condition is pending.
(++) CAN_IT_ERR : Error Interrupt
if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when
an error condition is pending.
Managing the CAN controller events :
------------------------------------
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the CAN controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
[..] Managing the CAN controller events :
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to
manage the CAN controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
1. In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- CAN_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
- CAN_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events.
(#) In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(++) CAN_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
(++) CAN_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events.
2. In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- CAN_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
- CAN_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
- CAN_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit (corresponding Flag).
@note This function has no impact on CAN_IT_FMP0 and CAN_IT_FMP1 Interrupts
(#) In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(++) CAN_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
(++) CAN_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
(++) CAN_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit
(corresponding Flag).
-@@- This function has no impact on CAN_IT_FMP0 and CAN_IT_FMP1 Interrupts
pending bits since there are cleared only by hardware.
@endverbatim
@ -1695,4 +1698,4 @@ static ITStatus CheckITStatus(uint32_t CAN_Reg, uint32_t It_Bit)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_crc.c
View File

@ -2,20 +2,26 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_crc.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides all the CRC firmware functions.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -124,4 +130,4 @@ uint8_t CRC_GetIDRegister(void)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

602
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_cryp.c
View File

@ -2,156 +2,161 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_cryp.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Cryptographic processor (CRYP) peripheral:
* - Initialization and Configuration functions
* - Data treatment functions
* - Context swapping functions
* - DMA interface function
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Initialization and Configuration functions
* + Data treatment functions
* + Context swapping functions
* + DMA interface function
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable the CRYP controller clock using
* RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_CRYP, ENABLE); function.
*
* 2. Initialise the CRYP using CRYP_Init(), CRYP_KeyInit() and if
* needed CRYP_IVInit().
*
* 3. Flush the IN and OUT FIFOs by using CRYP_FIFOFlush() function.
*
* 4. Enable the CRYP controller using the CRYP_Cmd() function.
*
* 5. If using DMA for Data input and output transfer,
* Activate the needed DMA Requests using CRYP_DMACmd() function
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable the CRYP controller clock using
RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_CRYP, ENABLE); function.
* 6. If DMA is not used for data transfer, use CRYP_DataIn() and
* CRYP_DataOut() functions to enter data to IN FIFO and get result
* from OUT FIFO.
*
* 7. To control CRYP events you can use one of the following
* two methods:
* - Check on CRYP flags using the CRYP_GetFlagStatus() function.
* - Use CRYP interrupts through the function CRYP_ITConfig() at
* initialization phase and CRYP_GetITStatus() function into
* interrupt routines in processing phase.
*
* 8. Save and restore Cryptographic processor context using
* CRYP_SaveContext() and CRYP_RestoreContext() functions.
*
*
* ===================================================================
* Procedure to perform an encryption or a decryption
* ===================================================================
*
* Initialization
* ===============
* 1. Initialize the peripheral using CRYP_Init(), CRYP_KeyInit() and
* CRYP_IVInit functions:
* - Configure the key size (128-, 192- or 256-bit, in the AES only)
* - Enter the symmetric key
* - Configure the data type
* - In case of decryption in AES-ECB or AES-CBC, you must prepare
* the key: configure the key preparation mode. Then Enable the CRYP
* peripheral using CRYP_Cmd() function: the BUSY flag is set.
* Wait until BUSY flag is reset : the key is prepared for decryption
* - Configure the algorithm and chaining (the DES/TDES in ECB/CBC, the
* AES in ECB/CBC/CTR)
* - Configure the direction (encryption/decryption).
* - Write the initialization vectors (in CBC or CTR modes only)
*
* 2. Flush the IN and OUT FIFOs using the CRYP_FIFOFlush() function
*
*
* Basic Processing mode (polling mode)
* ====================================
* 1. Enable the cryptographic processor using CRYP_Cmd() function.
*
* 2. Write the first blocks in the input FIFO (2 to 8 words) using
* CRYP_DataIn() function.
*
* 3. Repeat the following sequence until the complete message has been
* processed:
*
* a) Wait for flag CRYP_FLAG_OFNE occurs (using CRYP_GetFlagStatus()
* function), then read the OUT-FIFO using CRYP_DataOut() function
* (1 block or until the FIFO is empty)
*
* b) Wait for flag CRYP_FLAG_IFNF occurs, (using CRYP_GetFlagStatus()
* function then write the IN FIFO using CRYP_DataIn() function
* (1 block or until the FIFO is full)
*
* 4. At the end of the processing, CRYP_FLAG_BUSY flag will be reset and
* both FIFOs are empty (CRYP_FLAG_IFEM is set and CRYP_FLAG_OFNE is
* reset). You can disable the peripheral using CRYP_Cmd() function.
*
* Interrupts Processing mode
* ===========================
* In this mode, Processing is done when the data are transferred by the
* CPU during interrupts.
*
* 1. Enable the interrupts CRYP_IT_INI and CRYP_IT_OUTI using
* CRYP_ITConfig() function.
*
* 2. Enable the cryptographic processor using CRYP_Cmd() function.
*
* 3. In the CRYP_IT_INI interrupt handler : load the input message into the
* IN FIFO using CRYP_DataIn() function . You can load 2 or 4 words at a
* time, or load data until the IN FIFO is full. When the last word of
* the message has been entered into the IN FIFO, disable the CRYP_IT_INI
* interrupt (using CRYP_ITConfig() function).
*
* 4. In the CRYP_IT_OUTI interrupt handler : read the output message from
* the OUT FIFO using CRYP_DataOut() function. You can read 1 block (2 or
* 4 words) at a time or read data until the FIFO is empty.
* When the last word has been read, INIM=0, BUSY=0 and both FIFOs are
* empty (CRYP_FLAG_IFEM is set and CRYP_FLAG_OFNE is reset).
* You can disable the CRYP_IT_OUTI interrupt (using CRYP_ITConfig()
* function) and you can disable the peripheral using CRYP_Cmd() function.
*
* DMA Processing mode
* ====================
* In this mode, Processing is done when the DMA is used to transfer the
* data from/to the memory.
*
* 1. Configure the DMA controller to transfer the input data from the
* memory using DMA_Init() function.
* The transfer length is the length of the message.
* As message padding is not managed by the peripheral, the message
* length must be an entire number of blocks. The data are transferred
* in burst mode. The burst length is 4 words in the AES and 2 or 4
* words in the DES/TDES. The DMA should be configured to set an
* interrupt on transfer completion of the output data to indicate that
* the processing is finished.
* Refer to DMA peripheral driver for more details.
*
* 2. Enable the cryptographic processor using CRYP_Cmd() function.
* Enable the DMA requests CRYP_DMAReq_DataIN and CRYP_DMAReq_DataOUT
* using CRYP_DMACmd() function.
*
* 3. All the transfers and processing are managed by the DMA and the
* cryptographic processor. The DMA transfer complete interrupt indicates
* that the processing is complete. Both FIFOs are normally empty and
* CRYP_FLAG_BUSY flag is reset.
*
* @endverbatim
(#) Initialise the CRYP using CRYP_Init(), CRYP_KeyInit() and if needed
CRYP_IVInit().
(#) Flush the IN and OUT FIFOs by using CRYP_FIFOFlush() function.
(#) Enable the CRYP controller using the CRYP_Cmd() function.
(#) If using DMA for Data input and output transfer, activate the needed DMA
Requests using CRYP_DMACmd() function
(#) If DMA is not used for data transfer, use CRYP_DataIn() and CRYP_DataOut()
functions to enter data to IN FIFO and get result from OUT FIFO.
(#) To control CRYP events you can use one of the following two methods:
(++) Check on CRYP flags using the CRYP_GetFlagStatus() function.
(++) Use CRYP interrupts through the function CRYP_ITConfig() at
initialization phase and CRYP_GetITStatus() function into interrupt
routines in processing phase.
(#) Save and restore Cryptographic processor context using CRYP_SaveContext()
and CRYP_RestoreContext() functions.
*** Procedure to perform an encryption or a decryption ***
==========================================================
*** Initialization ***
======================
[..]
(#) Initialize the peripheral using CRYP_Init(), CRYP_KeyInit() and CRYP_IVInit
functions:
(++) Configure the key size (128-, 192- or 256-bit, in the AES only)
(++) Enter the symmetric key
(++) Configure the data type
(++) In case of decryption in AES-ECB or AES-CBC, you must prepare
the key: configure the key preparation mode. Then Enable the CRYP
peripheral using CRYP_Cmd() function: the BUSY flag is set.
Wait until BUSY flag is reset : the key is prepared for decryption
(++) Configure the algorithm and chaining (the DES/TDES in ECB/CBC, the
AES in ECB/CBC/CTR)
(++) Configure the direction (encryption/decryption).
(++) Write the initialization vectors (in CBC or CTR modes only)
(#) Flush the IN and OUT FIFOs using the CRYP_FIFOFlush() function
*** Basic Processing mode (polling mode) ***
============================================
[..]
(#) Enable the cryptographic processor using CRYP_Cmd() function.
(#) Write the first blocks in the input FIFO (2 to 8 words) using
CRYP_DataIn() function.
(#) Repeat the following sequence until the complete message has been
processed:
(++) Wait for flag CRYP_FLAG_OFNE occurs (using CRYP_GetFlagStatus()
function), then read the OUT-FIFO using CRYP_DataOut() function
(1 block or until the FIFO is empty)
(++) Wait for flag CRYP_FLAG_IFNF occurs, (using CRYP_GetFlagStatus()
function then write the IN FIFO using CRYP_DataIn() function
(1 block or until the FIFO is full)
(#) At the end of the processing, CRYP_FLAG_BUSY flag will be reset and
both FIFOs are empty (CRYP_FLAG_IFEM is set and CRYP_FLAG_OFNE is
reset). You can disable the peripheral using CRYP_Cmd() function.
*** Interrupts Processing mode ***
==================================
[..] In this mode, Processing is done when the data are transferred by the
CPU during interrupts.
(#) Enable the interrupts CRYP_IT_INI and CRYP_IT_OUTI using CRYP_ITConfig()
function.
(#) Enable the cryptographic processor using CRYP_Cmd() function.
(#) In the CRYP_IT_INI interrupt handler : load the input message into the
IN FIFO using CRYP_DataIn() function . You can load 2 or 4 words at a
time, or load data until the IN FIFO is full. When the last word of
the message has been entered into the IN FIFO, disable the CRYP_IT_INI
interrupt (using CRYP_ITConfig() function).
(#) In the CRYP_IT_OUTI interrupt handler : read the output message from
the OUT FIFO using CRYP_DataOut() function. You can read 1 block (2 or
4 words) at a time or read data until the FIFO is empty.
When the last word has been read, INIM=0, BUSY=0 and both FIFOs are
empty (CRYP_FLAG_IFEM is set and CRYP_FLAG_OFNE is reset).
You can disable the CRYP_IT_OUTI interrupt (using CRYP_ITConfig()
function) and you can disable the peripheral using CRYP_Cmd() function.
*** DMA Processing mode ***
===========================
[..] In this mode, Processing is done when the DMA is used to transfer the
data from/to the memory.
(#) Configure the DMA controller to transfer the input data from the
memory using DMA_Init() function.
The transfer length is the length of the message.
As message padding is not managed by the peripheral, the message
length must be an entire number of blocks. The data are transferred
in burst mode. The burst length is 4 words in the AES and 2 or 4
words in the DES/TDES. The DMA should be configured to set an
interrupt on transfer completion of the output data to indicate that
the processing is finished.
Refer to DMA peripheral driver for more details.
(#) Enable the cryptographic processor using CRYP_Cmd() function.
Enable the DMA requests CRYP_DMAReq_DataIN and CRYP_DMAReq_DataOUT
using CRYP_DMACmd() function.
(#) All the transfers and processing are managed by the DMA and the
cryptographic processor. The DMA transfer complete interrupt indicates
that the processing is complete. Both FIFOs are normally empty and
CRYP_FLAG_BUSY flag is reset.
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -187,23 +192,22 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to
- Initialize the cryptographic Processor using CRYP_Init() function
- Encrypt or Decrypt
- mode : TDES-ECB, TDES-CBC,
DES-ECB, DES-CBC,
AES-ECB, AES-CBC, AES-CTR, AES-Key
- DataType : 32-bit data, 16-bit data, bit data or bit-string
- Key Size (only in AES modes)
- Configure the Encrypt or Decrypt Key using CRYP_KeyInit() function
- Configure the Initialization Vectors(IV) for CBC and CTR modes using
CRYP_IVInit() function.
- Flushes the IN and OUT FIFOs : using CRYP_FIFOFlush() function.
- Enable or disable the CRYP Processor using CRYP_Cmd() function
[..] This section provides functions allowing to
(+) Initialize the cryptographic Processor using CRYP_Init() function
(++) Encrypt or Decrypt
(++) mode : TDES-ECB, TDES-CBC,
DES-ECB, DES-CBC,
AES-ECB, AES-CBC, AES-CTR, AES-Key, AES-GCM, AES-CCM
(++) DataType : 32-bit data, 16-bit data, bit data or bit-string
(++) Key Size (only in AES modes)
(+) Configure the Encrypt or Decrypt Key using CRYP_KeyInit() function
(+) Configure the Initialization Vectors(IV) for CBC and CTR modes using
CRYP_IVInit() function.
(+) Flushes the IN and OUT FIFOs : using CRYP_FIFOFlush() function.
(+) Enable or disable the CRYP Processor using CRYP_Cmd() function
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -244,10 +248,10 @@ void CRYP_Init(CRYP_InitTypeDef* CRYP_InitStruct)
CRYP->CR |= CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_DataType;
/* select Key size (used only with AES algorithm) */
if ((CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_AlgoMode == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_ECB) ||
(CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_AlgoMode == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CBC) ||
(CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_AlgoMode == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CTR) ||
(CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_AlgoMode == CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_Key))
if ((CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_AlgoMode != CRYP_AlgoMode_TDES_ECB) &&
(CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_AlgoMode != CRYP_AlgoMode_TDES_CBC) &&
(CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_AlgoMode != CRYP_AlgoMode_DES_ECB) &&
(CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_AlgoMode != CRYP_AlgoMode_DES_CBC))
{
assert_param(IS_CRYP_KEYSIZE(CRYP_InitStruct->CRYP_KeySize));
CRYP->CR &= ~CRYP_CR_KEYSIZE;
@ -348,6 +352,35 @@ void CRYP_IVStructInit(CRYP_IVInitTypeDef* CRYP_IVInitStruct)
CRYP_IVInitStruct->CRYP_IV1Right = 0;
}
/**
* @brief Configures the AES-CCM and AES-GCM phases
* @note This function is used only with AES-CCM or AES-GCM Algorithms
* @param CRYP_Phase: specifies the CRYP AES-CCM and AES-GCM phase to be configured.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg CRYP_Phase_Init: Initialization phase
* @arg CRYP_Phase_Header: Header phase
* @arg CRYP_Phase_Payload: Payload phase
* @arg CRYP_Phase_Final: Final phase
* @retval None
*/
void CRYP_PhaseConfig(uint32_t CRYP_Phase)
{ uint32_t tempcr = 0;
/* Check the parameter */
assert_param(IS_CRYP_PHASE(CRYP_Phase));
/* Get the CR register */
tempcr = CRYP->CR;
/* Reset the phase configuration bits: GCMP_CCMPH */
tempcr &= (uint32_t)(~CRYP_CR_GCM_CCMPH);
/* Set the selected phase */
tempcr |= (uint32_t)CRYP_Phase;
/* Set the CR register */
CRYP->CR = tempcr;
}
/**
* @brief Flushes the IN and OUT FIFOs (that is read and write pointers of the
* FIFOs are reset)
@ -392,12 +425,12 @@ void CRYP_Cmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
CRYP Data processing functions
##### CRYP Data processing functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing the encryption and decryption
operations:
- Enter data to be treated in the IN FIFO : using CRYP_DataIn() function.
- Get the data result from the OUT FIFO : using CRYP_DataOut() function.
[..] This section provides functions allowing the encryption and decryption
operations:
(+) Enter data to be treated in the IN FIFO : using CRYP_DataIn() function.
(+) Get the data result from the OUT FIFO : using CRYP_DataOut() function.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -433,20 +466,18 @@ uint32_t CRYP_DataOut(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Context swapping functions
##### Context swapping functions #####
===============================================================================
[..] This section provides functions allowing to save and store CRYP Context
This section provides functions allowing to save and store CRYP Context
It is possible to interrupt an encryption/ decryption/ key generation process
to perform another processing with a higher priority, and to complete the
interrupted process later on, when the higher-priority task is complete. To do
so, the context of the interrupted task must be saved from the CRYP registers
to memory, and then be restored from memory to the CRYP registers.
[..] It is possible to interrupt an encryption/ decryption/ key generation process
to perform another processing with a higher priority, and to complete the
interrupted process later on, when the higher-priority task is complete. To do
so, the context of the interrupted task must be saved from the CRYP registers
to memory, and then be restored from memory to the CRYP registers.
1. To save the current context, use CRYP_SaveContext() function
2. To restore the saved context, use CRYP_RestoreContext() function
(#) To save the current context, use CRYP_SaveContext() function
(#) To restore the saved context, use CRYP_RestoreContext() function
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -506,11 +537,12 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_SaveContext(CRYP_Context* CRYP_ContextSave,
CRYP->DMACR &= ~(uint32_t)CRYP_DMACR_DOEN;
CRYP->CR &= ~(uint32_t)CRYP_CR_CRYPEN;
/* Save the current configuration (bits [9:2] in the CRYP_CR register) */
CRYP_ContextSave->CR_bits9to2 = CRYP->CR & (CRYP_CR_KEYSIZE |
CRYP_CR_DATATYPE |
CRYP_CR_ALGOMODE |
CRYP_CR_ALGODIR);
/* Save the current configuration (bit 19, bit[17:16] and bits [9:2] in the CRYP_CR register) */
CRYP_ContextSave->CR_CurrentConfig = CRYP->CR & (CRYP_CR_GCM_CCMPH |
CRYP_CR_KEYSIZE |
CRYP_CR_DATATYPE |
CRYP_CR_ALGOMODE |
CRYP_CR_ALGODIR);
/* and, if not in ECB mode, the initialization vectors. */
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_IV0LR = CRYP->IV0LR;
@ -528,6 +560,25 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_SaveContext(CRYP_Context* CRYP_ContextSave,
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_K3LR = CRYP_KeyInitStruct->CRYP_Key3Left;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_K3RR = CRYP_KeyInitStruct->CRYP_Key3Right;
/* Save the content of context swap registers */
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[0] = CRYP->CSGCMCCM0R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[1] = CRYP->CSGCMCCM1R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[2] = CRYP->CSGCMCCM2R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[3] = CRYP->CSGCMCCM3R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[4] = CRYP->CSGCMCCM4R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[5] = CRYP->CSGCMCCM5R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[6] = CRYP->CSGCMCCM6R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[7] = CRYP->CSGCMCCM7R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMR[0] = CRYP->CSGCM0R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMR[1] = CRYP->CSGCM1R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMR[2] = CRYP->CSGCM2R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMR[3] = CRYP->CSGCM3R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMR[4] = CRYP->CSGCM4R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMR[5] = CRYP->CSGCM5R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMR[6] = CRYP->CSGCM6R;
CRYP_ContextSave->CRYP_CSGCMR[7] = CRYP->CSGCM7R;
/* When needed, save the DMA status (pointers for IN and OUT messages,
number of remaining bytes, etc.) */
@ -552,7 +603,7 @@ void CRYP_RestoreContext(CRYP_Context* CRYP_ContextRestore)
{
/* Configure the processor with the saved configuration */
CRYP->CR = CRYP_ContextRestore->CR_bits9to2;
CRYP->CR = CRYP_ContextRestore->CR_CurrentConfig;
/* restore The key value */
CRYP->K0LR = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_K0LR;
@ -570,6 +621,25 @@ void CRYP_RestoreContext(CRYP_Context* CRYP_ContextRestore)
CRYP->IV1LR = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_IV1LR;
CRYP->IV1RR = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_IV1RR;
/* Restore the content of context swap registers */
CRYP->CSGCMCCM0R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[0];
CRYP->CSGCMCCM1R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[1];
CRYP->CSGCMCCM2R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[2];
CRYP->CSGCMCCM3R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[3];
CRYP->CSGCMCCM4R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[4];
CRYP->CSGCMCCM5R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[5];
CRYP->CSGCMCCM6R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[6];
CRYP->CSGCMCCM7R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMCCMR[7];
CRYP->CSGCM0R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMR[0];
CRYP->CSGCM1R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMR[1];
CRYP->CSGCM2R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMR[2];
CRYP->CSGCM3R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMR[3];
CRYP->CSGCM4R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMR[4];
CRYP->CSGCM5R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMR[5];
CRYP->CSGCM6R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMR[6];
CRYP->CSGCM7R = CRYP_ContextRestore->CRYP_CSGCMR[7];
/* Enable the cryptographic processor */
CRYP->CR |= CRYP_CR_CRYPEN;
}
@ -582,18 +652,17 @@ void CRYP_RestoreContext(CRYP_Context* CRYP_ContextRestore)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
CRYP's DMA interface Configuration function
##### CRYP's DMA interface Configuration function #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the DMA interface for
CRYP data input and output transfer.
[..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the DMA interface for
CRYP data input and output transfer.
When the DMA mode is enabled (using the CRYP_DMACmd() function), data can be
transferred:
- From memory to the CRYP IN FIFO using the DMA peripheral by enabling
the CRYP_DMAReq_DataIN request.
- From the CRYP OUT FIFO to the memory using the DMA peripheral by enabling
the CRYP_DMAReq_DataOUT request.
[..] When the DMA mode is enabled (using the CRYP_DMACmd() function), data can be
transferred:
(+) From memory to the CRYP IN FIFO using the DMA peripheral by enabling
the CRYP_DMAReq_DataIN request.
(+) From the CRYP OUT FIFO to the memory using the DMA peripheral by enabling
the CRYP_DMAReq_DataOUT request.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -635,90 +704,83 @@ void CRYP_DMACmd(uint8_t CRYP_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
[..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the CRYP Interrupts and
to get the status and Interrupts pending bits.
This section provides functions allowing to configure the CRYP Interrupts and
to get the status and Interrupts pending bits.
[..] The CRYP provides 2 Interrupts sources and 7 Flags:
The CRYP provides 2 Interrupts sources and 7 Flags:
Flags :
-------
1. CRYP_FLAG_IFEM : Set when Input FIFO is empty.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
*** Flags : ***
===============
[..]
(#) CRYP_FLAG_IFEM : Set when Input FIFO is empty. This Flag is cleared only
by hardware.
2. CRYP_FLAG_IFNF : Set when Input FIFO is not full.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(#) CRYP_FLAG_IFNF : Set when Input FIFO is not full. This Flag is cleared
only by hardware.
3. CRYP_FLAG_INRIS : Set when Input FIFO Raw interrupt is pending
it gives the raw interrupt state prior to masking
of the input FIFO service interrupt.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(#) CRYP_FLAG_INRIS : Set when Input FIFO Raw interrupt is pending it gives
the raw interrupt state prior to masking of the input FIFO service interrupt.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
4. CRYP_FLAG_OFNE : Set when Output FIFO not empty.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(#) CRYP_FLAG_OFNE : Set when Output FIFO not empty. This Flag is cleared
only by hardware.
5. CRYP_FLAG_OFFU : Set when Output FIFO is full.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(#) CRYP_FLAG_OFFU : Set when Output FIFO is full. This Flag is cleared only
by hardware.
6. CRYP_FLAG_OUTRIS : Set when Output FIFO Raw interrupt is pending
it gives the raw interrupt state prior to masking
of the output FIFO service interrupt.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(#) CRYP_FLAG_OUTRIS : Set when Output FIFO Raw interrupt is pending it gives
the raw interrupt state prior to masking of the output FIFO service interrupt.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
7. CRYP_FLAG_BUSY : Set when the CRYP core is currently processing a
block of data or a key preparation (for AES
decryption).
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
To clear it, the CRYP core must be disabled and the
last processing has completed.
(#) CRYP_FLAG_BUSY : Set when the CRYP core is currently processing a block
of data or a key preparation (for AES decryption). This Flag is cleared
only by hardware. To clear it, the CRYP core must be disabled and the last
processing has completed.
Interrupts :
------------
*** Interrupts : ***
====================
[..]
(#) CRYP_IT_INI : The input FIFO service interrupt is asserted when there
are less than 4 words in the input FIFO. This interrupt is associated to
CRYP_FLAG_INRIS flag.
1. CRYP_IT_INI : The input FIFO service interrupt is asserted when there
are less than 4 words in the input FIFO.
This interrupt is associated to CRYP_FLAG_INRIS flag.
@note This interrupt is cleared by performing write operations
to the input FIFO until it holds 4 or more words. The
input FIFO service interrupt INMIS is enabled with the
CRYP enable bit. Consequently, when CRYP is disabled, the
INMIS signal is low even if the input FIFO is empty.
-@- This interrupt is cleared by performing write operations to the input FIFO
until it holds 4 or more words. The input FIFO service interrupt INMIS is
enabled with the CRYP enable bit. Consequently, when CRYP is disabled, the
INMIS signal is low even if the input FIFO is empty.
2. CRYP_IT_OUTI : The output FIFO service interrupt is asserted when there
is one or more (32-bit word) data items in the output FIFO.
This interrupt is associated to CRYP_FLAG_OUTRIS flag.
(#) CRYP_IT_OUTI : The output FIFO service interrupt is asserted when there
is one or more (32-bit word) data items in the output FIFO. This interrupt
is associated to CRYP_FLAG_OUTRIS flag.
@note This interrupt is cleared by reading data from the output
FIFO until there is no valid (32-bit) word left (that is,
the interrupt follows the state of the OFNE (output FIFO
not empty) flag).
-@- This interrupt is cleared by reading data from the output FIFO until there
is no valid (32-bit) word left (that is, the interrupt follows the state
of the OFNE (output FIFO not empty) flag).
*** Managing the CRYP controller events : ***
=============================================
[..] The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the CRYP controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
(#) In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(++) CRYP_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
-@@- The CRYPT flags do not need to be cleared since they are cleared as
soon as the associated event are reset.
Managing the CRYP controller events :
------------------------------------
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the CRYP controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
(#) In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(++) CRYP_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
(++) CRYP_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
1. In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- CRYP_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
@note The CRYPT flags do not need to be cleared since they are cleared as
soon as the associated event are reset.
2. In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- CRYP_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
- CRYP_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
@note The CRYPT interrupts have no pending bits, the interrupt is cleared as
soon as the associated event is reset.
-@@- The CRYPT interrupts have no pending bits, the interrupt is cleared as
soon as the associated event is reset.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -783,6 +845,28 @@ ITStatus CRYP_GetITStatus(uint8_t CRYP_IT)
return bitstatus;
}
/**
* @brief Returns whether CRYP peripheral is enabled or disabled.
* @param none.
* @retval Current state of the CRYP peripheral (ENABLE or DISABLE).
*/
FunctionalState CRYP_GetCmdStatus(void)
{
FunctionalState state = DISABLE;
if ((CRYP->CR & CRYP_CR_CRYPEN) != 0)
{
/* CRYPEN bit is set */
state = ENABLE;
}
else
{
/* CRYPEN bit is reset */
state = DISABLE;
}
return state;
}
/**
* @brief Checks whether the specified CRYP flag is set or not.
* @param CRYP_FLAG: specifies the CRYP flag to check.
@ -847,4 +931,4 @@ FlagStatus CRYP_GetFlagStatus(uint8_t CRYP_FLAG)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

1104
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_cryp_aes.c
View File

@ -2,43 +2,52 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_cryp_aes.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides high level functions to encrypt and decrypt an
* input message using AES in ECB/CBC/CTR modes.
* input message using AES in ECB/CBC/CTR/GCM/CCM modes.
* It uses the stm32f4xx_cryp.c/.h drivers to access the STM32F4xx CRYP
* peripheral.
* AES-ECB/CBC/CTR/GCM/CCM modes are available on STM32F437x Devices.
* For STM32F41xx Devices, only AES-ECB/CBC/CTR modes are available.
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable The CRYP controller clock using
* RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_CRYP, ENABLE); function.
*
* 2. Encrypt and decrypt using AES in ECB Mode using CRYP_AES_ECB()
* function.
*
* 3. Encrypt and decrypt using AES in CBC Mode using CRYP_AES_CBC()
* function.
*
* 4. Encrypt and decrypt using AES in CTR Mode using CRYP_AES_CTR()
* function.
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable The CRYP controller clock using
RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_CRYP, ENABLE); function.
(#) Encrypt and decrypt using AES in ECB Mode using CRYP_AES_ECB() function.
(#) Encrypt and decrypt using AES in CBC Mode using CRYP_AES_CBC() function.
(#) Encrypt and decrypt using AES in CTR Mode using CRYP_AES_CTR() function.
(#) Encrypt and decrypt using AES in GCM Mode using CRYP_AES_GCM() function.
(#) Encrypt and decrypt using AES in CCM Mode using CRYP_AES_CCM() function.
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -72,10 +81,9 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
High Level AES functions
##### High Level AES functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -214,6 +222,13 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_ECB(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t* Key, uint16_t Keysize,
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(i=0; ((i<Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i+=16)
{
@ -289,7 +304,7 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_CBC(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t InitVectors[16], uint8_t *Key,
uint32_t keyaddr = (uint32_t)Key;
uint32_t inputaddr = (uint32_t)Input;
uint32_t outputaddr = (uint32_t)Output;
uint32_t ivaddr = (uint32_t)InitVectors;
uint32_t ivaddr = (uint32_t)InitVectors;
uint32_t i = 0;
/* Crypto structures initialisation*/
@ -410,7 +425,13 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_CBC(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t InitVectors[16], uint8_t *Key,
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(i=0; ((i<Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i+=16)
{
@ -575,6 +596,13 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_CTR(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t InitVectors[16], uint8_t *Key,
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(i=0; ((i<Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i+=16)
{
@ -618,6 +646,1016 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_CTR(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t InitVectors[16], uint8_t *Key,
return status;
}
/**
* @brief Encrypt and decrypt using AES in GCM Mode. The GCM and CCM modes
* are available only on STM32F437x Devices.
* @param Mode: encryption or decryption Mode.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg MODE_ENCRYPT: Encryption
* @arg MODE_DECRYPT: Decryption
* @param InitVectors: Initialisation Vectors used for AES algorithm.
* @param Key: Key used for AES algorithm.
* @param Keysize: length of the Key, must be a 128, 192 or 256.
* @param Input: pointer to the Input buffer.
* @param Ilength: length of the Input buffer in bytes, must be a multiple of 16.
* @param Header: pointer to the header buffer.
* @param Hlength: length of the header buffer in bytes, must be a multiple of 16.
* @param Output: pointer to the returned buffer.
* @param AuthTAG: pointer to the authentication TAG buffer.
* @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
* - SUCCESS: Operation done
* - ERROR: Operation failed
*/
ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_GCM(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t InitVectors[16],
uint8_t *Key, uint16_t Keysize,
uint8_t *Input, uint32_t ILength,
uint8_t *Header, uint32_t HLength,
uint8_t *Output, uint8_t *AuthTAG)
{
CRYP_InitTypeDef AES_CRYP_InitStructure;
CRYP_KeyInitTypeDef AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure;
CRYP_IVInitTypeDef AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure;
__IO uint32_t counter = 0;
uint32_t busystatus = 0;
ErrorStatus status = SUCCESS;
uint32_t keyaddr = (uint32_t)Key;
uint32_t inputaddr = (uint32_t)Input;
uint32_t outputaddr = (uint32_t)Output;
uint32_t ivaddr = (uint32_t)InitVectors;
uint32_t headeraddr = (uint32_t)Header;
uint32_t tagaddr = (uint32_t)AuthTAG;
uint64_t headerlength = HLength * 8;/* header length in bits */
uint64_t inputlength = ILength * 8;/* input length in bits */
uint32_t loopcounter = 0;
/* Crypto structures initialisation*/
CRYP_KeyStructInit(&AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure);
switch(Keysize)
{
case 128:
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_KeySize = CRYP_KeySize_128b;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
break;
case 192:
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_KeySize = CRYP_KeySize_192b;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key1Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key1Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
break;
case 256:
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_KeySize = CRYP_KeySize_256b;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key0Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key0Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key1Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key1Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
break;
default:
break;
}
/* CRYP Initialization Vectors */
AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure.CRYP_IV0Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr));
ivaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure.CRYP_IV0Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr));
ivaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure.CRYP_IV1Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr));
ivaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure.CRYP_IV1Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(ivaddr));
/*------------------ AES Encryption ------------------*/
if(Mode == MODE_ENCRYPT) /* AES encryption */
{
/* Flush IN/OUT FIFOs */
CRYP_FIFOFlush();
/* Key Initialisation */
CRYP_KeyInit(&AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure);
/* CRYP Initialization Vectors */
CRYP_IVInit(&AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure);
/* Crypto Init for Key preparation for decryption process */
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_AlgoDir = CRYP_AlgoDir_Encrypt;
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_AlgoMode = CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_GCM;
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_DataType = CRYP_DataType_8b;
CRYP_Init(&AES_CRYP_InitStructure);
/***************************** Init phase *********************************/
/* Select init phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Init);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
/* Wait for CRYPEN bit to be 0 */
while(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == ENABLE)
{
}
/***************************** header phase *******************************/
if(HLength != 0)
{
/* Select header phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Header);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(loopcounter = 0; (loopcounter < HLength); loopcounter+=16)
{
/* Wait until the IFEM flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_IFEM) == RESET)
{
}
/* Write the Input block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
}
/* Wait until the complete message has been processed */
counter = 0;
do
{
busystatus = CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_BUSY);
counter++;
}while ((counter != AESBUSY_TIMEOUT) && (busystatus != RESET));
if (busystatus != RESET)
{
status = ERROR;
}
}
/**************************** payload phase *******************************/
if(ILength != 0)
{
/* Select payload phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Payload);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(loopcounter = 0; ((loopcounter < ILength) && (status != ERROR)); loopcounter+=16)
{
/* Wait until the IFEM flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_IFEM) == RESET)
{
}
/* Write the Input block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
/* Wait until the complete message has been processed */
counter = 0;
do
{
busystatus = CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_BUSY);
counter++;
}while ((counter != AESBUSY_TIMEOUT) && (busystatus != RESET));
if (busystatus != RESET)
{
status = ERROR;
}
else
{
/* Wait until the OFNE flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_OFNE) == RESET)
{
}
/* Read the Output block from the Output FIFO */
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
}
}
}
/***************************** final phase ********************************/
/* Select final phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Final);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
/* Write number of bits concatenated with header in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(__REV(headerlength>>32));
CRYP_DataIn(__REV(headerlength));
CRYP_DataIn(__REV(inputlength>>32));
CRYP_DataIn(__REV(inputlength));
/* Wait until the OFNE flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_OFNE) == RESET)
{
}
tagaddr = (uint32_t)AuthTAG;
/* Read the Auth TAG in the IN FIFO */
*(uint32_t*)(tagaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
tagaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(tagaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
tagaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(tagaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
tagaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(tagaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
tagaddr+=4;
}
/*------------------ AES Decryption ------------------*/
else /* AES decryption */
{
/* Flush IN/OUT FIFOs */
CRYP_FIFOFlush();
/* Key Initialisation */
CRYP_KeyInit(&AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure);
/* CRYP Initialization Vectors */
CRYP_IVInit(&AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure);
/* Crypto Init for Key preparation for decryption process */
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_AlgoDir = CRYP_AlgoDir_Decrypt;
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_AlgoMode = CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_GCM;
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_DataType = CRYP_DataType_8b;
CRYP_Init(&AES_CRYP_InitStructure);
/***************************** Init phase *********************************/
/* Select init phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Init);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
/* Wait for CRYPEN bit to be 0 */
while(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == ENABLE);
/***************************** header phase *******************************/
if(HLength != 0)
{
/* Select header phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Header);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(loopcounter = 0; (loopcounter < HLength); loopcounter+=16)
{
/* Wait until the IFEM flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_IFEM) == RESET);
/* Write the Input block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
}
/* Wait until the complete message has been processed */
counter = 0;
do
{
busystatus = CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_BUSY);
counter++;
}while ((counter != AESBUSY_TIMEOUT) && (busystatus != RESET));
if (busystatus != RESET)
{
status = ERROR;
}
}
/**************************** payload phase *******************************/
if(ILength != 0)
{
/* Select payload phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Payload);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(loopcounter = 0; ((loopcounter < ILength) && (status != ERROR)); loopcounter+=16)
{
/* Wait until the IFEM flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_IFEM) == RESET);
/* Write the Input block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
/* Wait until the complete message has been processed */
counter = 0;
do
{
busystatus = CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_BUSY);
counter++;
}while ((counter != AESBUSY_TIMEOUT) && (busystatus != RESET));
if (busystatus != RESET)
{
status = ERROR;
}
else
{
/* Wait until the OFNE flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_OFNE) == RESET);
/* Read the Output block from the Output FIFO */
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
}
}
}
/***************************** final phase ********************************/
/* Select final phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Final);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
/* Write number of bits concatenated with header in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(__REV(headerlength>>32));
CRYP_DataIn(__REV(headerlength));
CRYP_DataIn(__REV(inputlength>>32));
CRYP_DataIn(__REV(inputlength));
/* Wait until the OFNE flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_OFNE) == RESET);
tagaddr = (uint32_t)AuthTAG;
/* Read the Auth TAG in the IN FIFO */
*(uint32_t*)(tagaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
tagaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(tagaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
tagaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(tagaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
tagaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(tagaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
tagaddr+=4;
}
/* Disable Crypto */
CRYP_Cmd(DISABLE);
return status;
}
/**
* @brief Encrypt and decrypt using AES in CCM Mode. The GCM and CCM modes
* are available only on STM32F437x Devices.
* @param Mode: encryption or decryption Mode.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg MODE_ENCRYPT: Encryption
* @arg MODE_DECRYPT: Decryption
* @param Nonce: the nounce used for AES algorithm. It shall be unique for each processing.
* @param Key: Key used for AES algorithm.
* @param Keysize: length of the Key, must be a 128, 192 or 256.
* @param Input: pointer to the Input buffer.
* @param Ilength: length of the Input buffer in bytes, must be a multiple of 16.
* @param Header: pointer to the header buffer.
* @param Hlength: length of the header buffer in bytes.
* @param HBuffer: pointer to temporary buffer used to append the header
* HBuffer size must be equal to Hlength + 21
* @param Output: pointer to the returned buffer.
* @param AuthTAG: pointer to the authentication TAG buffer.
* @param TAGSize: the size of the TAG (called also MAC).
* @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
* - SUCCESS: Operation done
* - ERROR: Operation failed
*/
ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_CCM(uint8_t Mode,
uint8_t* Nonce, uint32_t NonceSize,
uint8_t *Key, uint16_t Keysize,
uint8_t *Input, uint32_t ILength,
uint8_t *Header, uint32_t HLength, uint8_t *HBuffer,
uint8_t *Output,
uint8_t *AuthTAG, uint32_t TAGSize)
{
CRYP_InitTypeDef AES_CRYP_InitStructure;
CRYP_KeyInitTypeDef AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure;
CRYP_IVInitTypeDef AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure;
__IO uint32_t counter = 0;
uint32_t busystatus = 0;
ErrorStatus status = SUCCESS;
uint32_t keyaddr = (uint32_t)Key;
uint32_t inputaddr = (uint32_t)Input;
uint32_t outputaddr = (uint32_t)Output;
uint32_t headeraddr = (uint32_t)Header;
uint32_t tagaddr = (uint32_t)AuthTAG;
uint32_t headersize = HLength;
uint32_t loopcounter = 0;
uint32_t bufferidx = 0;
uint8_t blockb0[16] = {0};/* Block B0 */
uint8_t ctr[16] = {0}; /* Counter */
uint32_t temptag[4] = {0}; /* temporary TAG (MAC) */
uint32_t ctraddr = (uint32_t)ctr;
uint32_t b0addr = (uint32_t)blockb0;
/************************ Formatting the header block ***********************/
if(headersize != 0)
{
/* Check that the associated data (or header) length is lower than 2^16 - 2^8 = 65536 - 256 = 65280 */
if(headersize < 65280)
{
HBuffer[bufferidx++] = (uint8_t) ((headersize >> 8) & 0xFF);
HBuffer[bufferidx++] = (uint8_t) ((headersize) & 0xFF);
headersize += 2;
}
else
{
/* header is encoded as 0xff || 0xfe || [headersize]32, i.e., six octets */
HBuffer[bufferidx++] = 0xFF;
HBuffer[bufferidx++] = 0xFE;
HBuffer[bufferidx++] = headersize & 0xff000000;
HBuffer[bufferidx++] = headersize & 0x00ff0000;
HBuffer[bufferidx++] = headersize & 0x0000ff00;
HBuffer[bufferidx++] = headersize & 0x000000ff;
headersize += 6;
}
/* Copy the header buffer in internal buffer "HBuffer" */
for(loopcounter = 0; loopcounter < headersize; loopcounter++)
{
HBuffer[bufferidx++] = Header[loopcounter];
}
/* Check if the header size is modulo 16 */
if ((headersize % 16) != 0)
{
/* Padd the header buffer with 0s till the HBuffer length is modulo 16 */
for(loopcounter = headersize; loopcounter <= ((headersize/16) + 1) * 16; loopcounter++)
{
HBuffer[loopcounter] = 0;
}
/* Set the header size to modulo 16 */
headersize = ((headersize/16) + 1) * 16;
}
/* set the pointer headeraddr to HBuffer */
headeraddr = (uint32_t)HBuffer;
}
/************************* Formatting the block B0 **************************/
if(headersize != 0)
{
blockb0[0] = 0x40;
}
/* Flags byte */
blockb0[0] |= 0u | (((( (uint8_t) TAGSize - 2) / 2) & 0x07 ) << 3 ) | ( ( (uint8_t) (15 - NonceSize) - 1) & 0x07);
for (loopcounter = 0; loopcounter < NonceSize; loopcounter++)
{
blockb0[loopcounter+1] = Nonce[loopcounter];
}
for ( ; loopcounter < 13; loopcounter++)
{
blockb0[loopcounter+1] = 0;
}
blockb0[14] = ((ILength >> 8) & 0xFF);
blockb0[15] = (ILength & 0xFF);
/************************* Formatting the initial counter *******************/
/* Byte 0:
Bits 7 and 6 are reserved and shall be set to 0
Bits 3, 4, and 5 shall also be set to 0, to ensure that all the counter blocks
are distinct from B0
Bits 0, 1, and 2 contain the same encoding of q as in B0
*/
ctr[0] = blockb0[0] & 0x07;
/* byte 1 to NonceSize is the IV (Nonce) */
for(loopcounter = 1; loopcounter < NonceSize + 1; loopcounter++)
{
ctr[loopcounter] = blockb0[loopcounter];
}
/* Set the LSB to 1 */
ctr[15] |= 0x01;
/* Crypto structures initialisation*/
CRYP_KeyStructInit(&AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure);
switch(Keysize)
{
case 128:
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_KeySize = CRYP_KeySize_128b;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
break;
case 192:
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_KeySize = CRYP_KeySize_192b;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key1Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key1Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
break;
case 256:
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_KeySize = CRYP_KeySize_256b;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key0Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key0Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key1Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key1Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key2Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Left = __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
keyaddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure.CRYP_Key3Right= __REV(*(uint32_t*)(keyaddr));
break;
default:
break;
}
/* CRYP Initialization Vectors */
AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure.CRYP_IV0Left = (__REV(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr)));
ctraddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure.CRYP_IV0Right= (__REV(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr)));
ctraddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure.CRYP_IV1Left = (__REV(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr)));
ctraddr+=4;
AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure.CRYP_IV1Right= (__REV(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr)));
/*------------------ AES Encryption ------------------*/
if(Mode == MODE_ENCRYPT) /* AES encryption */
{
/* Flush IN/OUT FIFOs */
CRYP_FIFOFlush();
/* Key Initialisation */
CRYP_KeyInit(&AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure);
/* CRYP Initialization Vectors */
CRYP_IVInit(&AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure);
/* Crypto Init for Key preparation for decryption process */
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_AlgoDir = CRYP_AlgoDir_Encrypt;
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_AlgoMode = CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CCM;
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_DataType = CRYP_DataType_8b;
CRYP_Init(&AES_CRYP_InitStructure);
/***************************** Init phase *********************************/
/* Select init phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Init);
b0addr = (uint32_t)blockb0;
/* Write the blockb0 block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn((*(uint32_t*)(b0addr)));
b0addr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn((*(uint32_t*)(b0addr)));
b0addr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn((*(uint32_t*)(b0addr)));
b0addr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn((*(uint32_t*)(b0addr)));
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
/* Wait for CRYPEN bit to be 0 */
while(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == ENABLE);
/***************************** header phase *******************************/
if(headersize != 0)
{
/* Select header phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Header);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(loopcounter = 0; (loopcounter < headersize); loopcounter+=16)
{
/* Wait until the IFEM flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_IFEM) == RESET);
/* Write the Input block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
}
/* Wait until the complete message has been processed */
counter = 0;
do
{
busystatus = CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_BUSY);
counter++;
}while ((counter != AESBUSY_TIMEOUT) && (busystatus != RESET));
if (busystatus != RESET)
{
status = ERROR;
}
}
/**************************** payload phase *******************************/
if(ILength != 0)
{
/* Select payload phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Payload);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(loopcounter = 0; ((loopcounter < ILength) && (status != ERROR)); loopcounter+=16)
{
/* Wait until the IFEM flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_IFEM) == RESET);
/* Write the Input block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
/* Wait until the complete message has been processed */
counter = 0;
do
{
busystatus = CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_BUSY);
counter++;
}while ((counter != AESBUSY_TIMEOUT) && (busystatus != RESET));
if (busystatus != RESET)
{
status = ERROR;
}
else
{
/* Wait until the OFNE flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_OFNE) == RESET);
/* Read the Output block from the Output FIFO */
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
}
}
}
/***************************** final phase ********************************/
/* Select final phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Final);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
ctraddr = (uint32_t)ctr;
/* Write the counter block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr));
ctraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr));
ctraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr));
ctraddr+=4;
/* Reset bit 0 (after 8-bit swap) is equivalent to reset bit 24 (before 8-bit swap) */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr) & 0xfeffffff);
/* Wait until the OFNE flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_OFNE) == RESET);
/* Read the Auth TAG in the IN FIFO */
temptag[0] = CRYP_DataOut();
temptag[1] = CRYP_DataOut();
temptag[2] = CRYP_DataOut();
temptag[3] = CRYP_DataOut();
}
/*------------------ AES Decryption ------------------*/
else /* AES decryption */
{
/* Flush IN/OUT FIFOs */
CRYP_FIFOFlush();
/* Key Initialisation */
CRYP_KeyInit(&AES_CRYP_KeyInitStructure);
/* CRYP Initialization Vectors */
CRYP_IVInit(&AES_CRYP_IVInitStructure);
/* Crypto Init for Key preparation for decryption process */
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_AlgoDir = CRYP_AlgoDir_Decrypt;
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_AlgoMode = CRYP_AlgoMode_AES_CCM;
AES_CRYP_InitStructure.CRYP_DataType = CRYP_DataType_8b;
CRYP_Init(&AES_CRYP_InitStructure);
/***************************** Init phase *********************************/
/* Select init phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Init);
b0addr = (uint32_t)blockb0;
/* Write the blockb0 block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn((*(uint32_t*)(b0addr)));
b0addr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn((*(uint32_t*)(b0addr)));
b0addr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn((*(uint32_t*)(b0addr)));
b0addr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn((*(uint32_t*)(b0addr)));
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
/* Wait for CRYPEN bit to be 0 */
while(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == ENABLE);
/***************************** header phase *******************************/
if(headersize != 0)
{
/* Select header phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Header);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(loopcounter = 0; (loopcounter < headersize); loopcounter+=16)
{
/* Wait until the IFEM flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_IFEM) == RESET);
/* Write the Input block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(headeraddr));
headeraddr+=4;
}
/* Wait until the complete message has been processed */
counter = 0;
do
{
busystatus = CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_BUSY);
counter++;
}while ((counter != AESBUSY_TIMEOUT) && (busystatus != RESET));
if (busystatus != RESET)
{
status = ERROR;
}
}
/**************************** payload phase *******************************/
if(ILength != 0)
{
/* Select payload phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Payload);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(loopcounter = 0; ((loopcounter < ILength) && (status != ERROR)); loopcounter+=16)
{
/* Wait until the IFEM flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_IFEM) == RESET);
/* Write the Input block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(inputaddr));
inputaddr+=4;
/* Wait until the complete message has been processed */
counter = 0;
do
{
busystatus = CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_BUSY);
counter++;
}while ((counter != AESBUSY_TIMEOUT) && (busystatus != RESET));
if (busystatus != RESET)
{
status = ERROR;
}
else
{
/* Wait until the OFNE flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_OFNE) == RESET);
/* Read the Output block from the Output FIFO */
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
*(uint32_t*)(outputaddr) = CRYP_DataOut();
outputaddr+=4;
}
}
}
/***************************** final phase ********************************/
/* Select final phase */
CRYP_PhaseConfig(CRYP_Phase_Final);
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
ctraddr = (uint32_t)ctr;
/* Write the counter block in the IN FIFO */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr));
ctraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr));
ctraddr+=4;
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr));
ctraddr+=4;
/* Reset bit 0 (after 8-bit swap) is equivalent to reset bit 24 (before 8-bit swap) */
CRYP_DataIn(*(uint32_t*)(ctraddr) & 0xfeffffff);
/* Wait until the OFNE flag is reset */
while(CRYP_GetFlagStatus(CRYP_FLAG_OFNE) == RESET);
/* Read the Authentaication TAG (MAC) in the IN FIFO */
temptag[0] = CRYP_DataOut();
temptag[1] = CRYP_DataOut();
temptag[2] = CRYP_DataOut();
temptag[3] = CRYP_DataOut();
}
/* Copy temporary authentication TAG in user TAG buffer */
for(loopcounter = 0; (loopcounter < TAGSize); loopcounter++)
{
/* Set the authentication TAG buffer */
*((uint8_t*)tagaddr+loopcounter) = *((uint8_t*)temptag+loopcounter);
}
/* Disable Crypto */
CRYP_Cmd(DISABLE);
return status;
}
/**
* @}
*/
@ -634,5 +1672,5 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_AES_CTR(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t InitVectors[16], uint8_t *Key,
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

69
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_cryp_des.c
View File

@ -2,40 +2,45 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_cryp_des.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides high level functions to encrypt and decrypt an
* input message using DES in ECB/CBC modes.
* It uses the stm32f4xx_cryp.c/.h drivers to access the STM32F4xx CRYP
* peripheral.
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable The CRYP controller clock using
* RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_CRYP, ENABLE); function.
*
* 2. Encrypt and decrypt using DES in ECB Mode using CRYP_DES_ECB()
* function.
*
* 3. Encrypt and decrypt using DES in CBC Mode using CRYP_DES_CBC()
* function.
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable The CRYP controller clock using
RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_CRYP, ENABLE); function.
(#) Encrypt and decrypt using DES in ECB Mode using CRYP_DES_ECB() function.
(#) Encrypt and decrypt using DES in CBC Mode using CRYP_DES_CBC() function.
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -71,7 +76,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
High Level DES functions
##### High Level DES functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -133,6 +138,12 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_DES_ECB(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t Key[8], uint8_t *Input,
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(i=0; ((i<Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i+=8)
{
@ -236,6 +247,12 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_DES_CBC(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t Key[8], uint8_t InitVectors[8],
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(i=0; ((i<Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i+=8)
{
/* Write the Input block in the Input FIFO */
@ -288,4 +305,4 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_DES_CBC(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t Key[8], uint8_t InitVectors[8],
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

71
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_cryp_tdes.c
View File

@ -2,40 +2,45 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_cryp_tdes.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides high level functions to encrypt and decrypt an
* input message using TDES in ECB/CBC modes .
* It uses the stm32f4xx_cryp.c/.h drivers to access the STM32F4xx CRYP
* peripheral.
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable The CRYP controller clock using
* RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_CRYP, ENABLE); function.
*
* 2. Encrypt and decrypt using TDES in ECB Mode using CRYP_TDES_ECB()
* function.
*
* 3. Encrypt and decrypt using TDES in CBC Mode using CRYP_TDES_CBC()
* function.
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable The CRYP controller clock using
RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_CRYP, ENABLE); function.
(#) Encrypt and decrypt using TDES in ECB Mode using CRYP_TDES_ECB() function.
(#) Encrypt and decrypt using TDES in CBC Mode using CRYP_TDES_CBC() function.
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -71,10 +76,9 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
High Level TDES functions
##### High Level TDES functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -143,6 +147,12 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_TDES_ECB(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t Key[24], uint8_t *Input,
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(i=0; ((i<Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i+=8)
{
/* Write the Input block in the Input FIFO */
@ -253,6 +263,13 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_TDES_CBC(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t Key[24], uint8_t InitVectors[8],
/* Enable Crypto processor */
CRYP_Cmd(ENABLE);
if(CRYP_GetCmdStatus() == DISABLE)
{
/* The CRYP peripheral clock is not enabled or the device doesn't embedd
the CRYP peripheral (please check the device sales type. */
return(ERROR);
}
for(i=0; ((i<Ilength) && (status != ERROR)); i+=8)
{
/* Write the Input block in the Input FIFO */
@ -305,4 +322,4 @@ ErrorStatus CRYP_TDES_CBC(uint8_t Mode, uint8_t Key[24], uint8_t InitVectors[8],
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

223
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_dac.c
View File

@ -2,114 +2,127 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_dac.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) peripheral:
* - DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format
* - DMA management
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format
* + DMA management
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* DAC Peripheral features
* ===================================================================
*
* DAC Channels
* =============
* The device integrates two 12-bit Digital Analog Converters that can
* be used independently or simultaneously (dual mode):
* 1- DAC channel1 with DAC_OUT1 (PA4) as output
* 1- DAC channel2 with DAC_OUT2 (PA5) as output
*
* DAC Triggers
* =============
* Digital to Analog conversion can be non-triggered using DAC_Trigger_None
* and DAC_OUT1/DAC_OUT2 is available once writing to DHRx register
* using DAC_SetChannel1Data() / DAC_SetChannel2Data() functions.
*
* Digital to Analog conversion can be triggered by:
* 1- External event: EXTI Line 9 (any GPIOx_Pin9) using DAC_Trigger_Ext_IT9.
* The used pin (GPIOx_Pin9) must be configured in input mode.
*
* 2- Timers TRGO: TIM2, TIM4, TIM5, TIM6, TIM7 and TIM8
* (DAC_Trigger_T2_TRGO, DAC_Trigger_T4_TRGO...)
* The timer TRGO event should be selected using TIM_SelectOutputTrigger()
*
* 3- Software using DAC_Trigger_Software
*
* DAC Buffer mode feature
* ========================
* Each DAC channel integrates an output buffer that can be used to
* reduce the output impedance, and to drive external loads directly
* without having to add an external operational amplifier.
* To enable, the output buffer use
* DAC_InitStructure.DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable;
*
* Refer to the device datasheet for more details about output
* impedance value with and without output buffer.
*
* DAC wave generation feature
* =============================
* Both DAC channels can be used to generate
* 1- Noise wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Noise
* 2- Triangle wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Triangle
*
* Wave generation can be disabled using DAC_WaveGeneration_None
*
* DAC data format
* ================
* The DAC data format can be:
* 1- 8-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_8b_R
* 2- 12-bit left alignment using DAC_Align_12b_L
* 3- 12-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_12b_R
*
* DAC data value to voltage correspondence
* ========================================
* The analog output voltage on each DAC channel pin is determined
* by the following equation:
* DAC_OUTx = VREF+ * DOR / 4095
* with DOR is the Data Output Register
* VEF+ is the input voltage reference (refer to the device datasheet)
* e.g. To set DAC_OUT1 to 0.7V, use
* DAC_SetChannel1Data(DAC_Align_12b_R, 868);
* Assuming that VREF+ = 3.3V, DAC_OUT1 = (3.3 * 868) / 4095 = 0.7V
*
* DMA requests
* =============
* A DMA1 request can be generated when an external trigger (but not
* a software trigger) occurs if DMA1 requests are enabled using
* DAC_DMACmd()
* DMA1 requests are mapped as following:
* 1- DAC channel1 : mapped on DMA1 Stream5 channel7 which must be
* already configured
* 2- DAC channel2 : mapped on DMA1 Stream6 channel7 which must be
* already configured
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* - DAC APB clock must be enabled to get write access to DAC
* registers using
* RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE)
* - Configure DAC_OUTx (DAC_OUT1: PA4, DAC_OUT2: PA5) in analog mode.
* - Configure the DAC channel using DAC_Init() function
* - Enable the DAC channel using DAC_Cmd() function
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### DAC Peripheral features #####
===============================================================================
[..]
*** DAC Channels ***
====================
[..]
The device integrates two 12-bit Digital Analog Converters that can
be used independently or simultaneously (dual mode):
(#) DAC channel1 with DAC_OUT1 (PA4) as output
(#) DAC channel2 with DAC_OUT2 (PA5) as output
*** DAC Triggers ***
====================
[..]
Digital to Analog conversion can be non-triggered using DAC_Trigger_None
and DAC_OUT1/DAC_OUT2 is available once writing to DHRx register
using DAC_SetChannel1Data() / DAC_SetChannel2Data() functions.
[..]
Digital to Analog conversion can be triggered by:
(#) External event: EXTI Line 9 (any GPIOx_Pin9) using DAC_Trigger_Ext_IT9.
The used pin (GPIOx_Pin9) must be configured in input mode.
(#) Timers TRGO: TIM2, TIM4, TIM5, TIM6, TIM7 and TIM8
(DAC_Trigger_T2_TRGO, DAC_Trigger_T4_TRGO...)
The timer TRGO event should be selected using TIM_SelectOutputTrigger()
(#) Software using DAC_Trigger_Software
*** DAC Buffer mode feature ***
===============================
[..]
Each DAC channel integrates an output buffer that can be used to
reduce the output impedance, and to drive external loads directly
without having to add an external operational amplifier.
To enable, the output buffer use
DAC_InitStructure.DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable;
[..]
(@) Refer to the device datasheet for more details about output
impedance value with and without output buffer.
*** DAC wave generation feature ***
===================================
[..]
Both DAC channels can be used to generate
(#) Noise wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Noise
(#) Triangle wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Triangle
-@- Wave generation can be disabled using DAC_WaveGeneration_None
*** DAC data format ***
=======================
[..]
The DAC data format can be:
(#) 8-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_8b_R
(#) 12-bit left alignment using DAC_Align_12b_L
(#) 12-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_12b_R
*** DAC data value to voltage correspondence ***
================================================
[..]
The analog output voltage on each DAC channel pin is determined
by the following equation:
DAC_OUTx = VREF+ * DOR / 4095
with DOR is the Data Output Register
VEF+ is the input voltage reference (refer to the device datasheet)
e.g. To set DAC_OUT1 to 0.7V, use
DAC_SetChannel1Data(DAC_Align_12b_R, 868);
Assuming that VREF+ = 3.3V, DAC_OUT1 = (3.3 * 868) / 4095 = 0.7V
*** DMA requests ***
=====================
[..]
A DMA1 request can be generated when an external trigger (but not
a software trigger) occurs if DMA1 requests are enabled using
DAC_DMACmd()
[..]
DMA1 requests are mapped as following:
(#) DAC channel1 : mapped on DMA1 Stream5 channel7 which must be
already configured
(#) DAC channel2 : mapped on DMA1 Stream6 channel7 which must be
already configured
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(+) DAC APB clock must be enabled to get write access to DAC
registers using
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE)
(+) Configure DAC_OUTx (DAC_OUT1: PA4, DAC_OUT2: PA5) in analog mode.
(+) Configure the DAC channel using DAC_Init() function
(+) Enable the DAC channel using DAC_Cmd() function
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -159,7 +172,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format
##### DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -471,7 +484,7 @@ uint16_t DAC_GetDataOutputValue(uint32_t DAC_Channel)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
DMA management functions
##### DMA management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -520,7 +533,7 @@ void DAC_DMACmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -698,4 +711,4 @@ void DAC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

26
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_dbgmcu.c
View File

@ -2,20 +2,26 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_dbgmcu.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides all the DBGMCU firmware functions.
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -171,4 +177,4 @@ void DBGMCU_APB2PeriphConfig(uint32_t DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

146
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_dcmi.c
View File

@ -2,79 +2,83 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_dcmi.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the DCMI peripheral:
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - Image capture functions
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + Image capture functions
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
*
* The sequence below describes how to use this driver to capture image
* from a camera module connected to the DCMI Interface.
* This sequence does not take into account the configuration of the
* camera module, which should be made before to configure and enable
* the DCMI to capture images.
*
* 1. Enable the clock for the DCMI and associated GPIOs using the following functions:
* RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_DCMI, ENABLE);
* RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
*
* 2. DCMI pins configuration
* - Connect the involved DCMI pins to AF13 using the following function
* GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_DCMI);
* - Configure these DCMI pins in alternate function mode by calling the function
* GPIO_Init();
*
* 3. Declare a DCMI_InitTypeDef structure, for example:
* DCMI_InitTypeDef DCMI_InitStructure;
* and fill the DCMI_InitStructure variable with the allowed values
* of the structure member.
*
* 4. Initialize the DCMI interface by calling the function
* DCMI_Init(&DCMI_InitStructure);
*
* 5. Configure the DMA2_Stream1 channel1 to transfer Data from DCMI DR
* register to the destination memory buffer.
*
* 6. Enable DCMI interface using the function
* DCMI_Cmd(ENABLE);
*
* 7. Start the image capture using the function
* DCMI_CaptureCmd(ENABLE);
*
* 8. At this stage the DCMI interface waits for the first start of frame,
* then a DMA request is generated continuously/once (depending on the
* mode used, Continuous/Snapshot) to transfer the received data into
* the destination memory.
*
* @note If you need to capture only a rectangular window from the received
* image, you have to use the DCMI_CROPConfig() function to configure
* the coordinates and size of the window to be captured, then enable
* the Crop feature using DCMI_CROPCmd(ENABLE);
* In this case, the Crop configuration should be made before to enable
* and start the DCMI interface.
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
The sequence below describes how to use this driver to capture image
from a camera module connected to the DCMI Interface.
This sequence does not take into account the configuration of the
camera module, which should be made before to configure and enable
the DCMI to capture images.
(#) Enable the clock for the DCMI and associated GPIOs using the following
functions:
RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_DCMI, ENABLE);
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
(#) DCMI pins configuration
(++) Connect the involved DCMI pins to AF13 using the following function
GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_DCMI);
(++) Configure these DCMI pins in alternate function mode by calling
the function GPIO_Init();
(#) Declare a DCMI_InitTypeDef structure, for example:
DCMI_InitTypeDef DCMI_InitStructure;
and fill the DCMI_InitStructure variable with the allowed values
of the structure member.
(#) Initialize the DCMI interface by calling the function
DCMI_Init(&DCMI_InitStructure);
(#) Configure the DMA2_Stream1 channel1 to transfer Data from DCMI DR
register to the destination memory buffer.
(#) Enable DCMI interface using the function
DCMI_Cmd(ENABLE);
(#) Start the image capture using the function
DCMI_CaptureCmd(ENABLE);
(#) At this stage the DCMI interface waits for the first start of frame,
then a DMA request is generated continuously/once (depending on the
mode used, Continuous/Snapshot) to transfer the received data into
the destination memory.
-@- If you need to capture only a rectangular window from the received
image, you have to use the DCMI_CROPConfig() function to configure
the coordinates and size of the window to be captured, then enable
the Crop feature using DCMI_CROPCmd(ENABLE);
In this case, the Crop configuration should be made before to enable
and start the DCMI interface.
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -107,7 +111,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -279,7 +283,7 @@ void DCMI_JPEGCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Image capture functions
##### Image capture functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -350,7 +354,7 @@ uint32_t DCMI_ReadData(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -418,7 +422,7 @@ FlagStatus DCMI_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t DCMI_FLAG)
/* Get the DCMI register index */
dcmireg = (((uint16_t)DCMI_FLAG) >> 12);
if (dcmireg == 0x01) /* The FLAG is in RISR register */
if (dcmireg == 0x00) /* The FLAG is in RISR register */
{
tempreg= DCMI->RISR;
}
@ -531,4 +535,4 @@ void DCMI_ClearITPendingBit(uint16_t DCMI_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

474
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_dma.c
View File

@ -2,113 +2,121 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_dma.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Direct Memory Access controller (DMA):
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - Data Counter
* - Double Buffer mode configuration and command
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + Data Counter
* + Double Buffer mode configuration and command
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable The DMA controller clock using RCC_AHB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA1, ENABLE)
* function for DMA1 or using RCC_AHB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA2, ENABLE)
* function for DMA2.
*
* 2. Enable and configure the peripheral to be connected to the DMA Stream
* (except for internal SRAM / FLASH memories: no initialization is
* necessary).
*
* 3. For a given Stream, program the required configuration through following parameters:
* Source and Destination addresses, Transfer Direction, Transfer size, Source and Destination
* data formats, Circular or Normal mode, Stream Priority level, Source and Destination
* Incrementation mode, FIFO mode and its Threshold (if needed), Burst mode for Source and/or
* Destination (if needed) using the DMA_Init() function.
* To avoid filling un-nesecessary fields, you can call DMA_StructInit() function
* to initialize a given structure with default values (reset values), the modify
* only necessary fields (ie. Source and Destination addresses, Transfer size and Data Formats).
*
* 4. Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt(s) using the function
* DMA_ITConfig() if you need to use DMA interrupts.
*
* 5. Optionally, if the Circular mode is enabled, you can use the Double buffer mode by configuring
* the second Memory address and the first Memory to be used through the function
* DMA_DoubleBufferModeConfig(). Then enable the Double buffer mode through the function
* DMA_DoubleBufferModeCmd(). These operations must be done before step 6.
*
* 6. Enable the DMA stream using the DMA_Cmd() function.
*
* 7. Activate the needed Stream Request using PPP_DMACmd() function for
* any PPP peripheral except internal SRAM and FLASH (ie. SPI, USART ...)
* The function allowing this operation is provided in each PPP peripheral
* driver (ie. SPI_DMACmd for SPI peripheral).
* Once the Stream is enabled, it is not possible to modify its configuration
* unless the stream is stopped and disabled.
* After enabling the Stream, it is advised to monitor the EN bit status using
* the function DMA_GetCmdStatus(). In case of configuration errors or bus errors
* this bit will remain reset and all transfers on this Stream will remain on hold.
*
* 8. Optionally, you can configure the number of data to be transferred
* when the Stream is disabled (ie. after each Transfer Complete event
* or when a Transfer Error occurs) using the function DMA_SetCurrDataCounter().
* And you can get the number of remaining data to be transferred using
* the function DMA_GetCurrDataCounter() at run time (when the DMA Stream is
* enabled and running).
*
* 9. To control DMA events you can use one of the following
* two methods:
* a- Check on DMA Stream flags using the function DMA_GetFlagStatus().
* b- Use DMA interrupts through the function DMA_ITConfig() at initialization
* phase and DMA_GetITStatus() function into interrupt routines in
* communication phase.
* After checking on a flag you should clear it using DMA_ClearFlag()
* function. And after checking on an interrupt event you should
* clear it using DMA_ClearITPendingBit() function.
*
* 10. Optionally, if Circular mode and Double Buffer mode are enabled, you can modify
* the Memory Addresses using the function DMA_MemoryTargetConfig(). Make sure that
* the Memory Address to be modified is not the one currently in use by DMA Stream.
* This condition can be monitored using the function DMA_GetCurrentMemoryTarget().
*
* 11. Optionally, Pause-Resume operations may be performed:
* The DMA_Cmd() function may be used to perform Pause-Resume operation. When a
* transfer is ongoing, calling this function to disable the Stream will cause the
* transfer to be paused. All configuration registers and the number of remaining
* data will be preserved. When calling again this function to re-enable the Stream,
* the transfer will be resumed from the point where it was paused.
*
* @note Memory-to-Memory transfer is possible by setting the address of the memory into
* the Peripheral registers. In this mode, Circular mode and Double Buffer mode
* are not allowed.
*
* @note The FIFO is used mainly to reduce bus usage and to allow data packing/unpacking: it is
* possible to set different Data Sizes for the Peripheral and the Memory (ie. you can set
* Half-Word data size for the peripheral to access its data register and set Word data size
* for the Memory to gain in access time. Each two Half-words will be packed and written in
* a single access to a Word in the Memory).
*
* @note When FIFO is disabled, it is not allowed to configure different Data Sizes for Source
* and Destination. In this case the Peripheral Data Size will be applied to both Source
* and Destination.
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable The DMA controller clock using RCC_AHB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA1, ENABLE)
function for DMA1 or using RCC_AHB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA2, ENABLE)
function for DMA2.
(#) Enable and configure the peripheral to be connected to the DMA Stream
(except for internal SRAM / FLASH memories: no initialization is
necessary).
(#) For a given Stream, program the required configuration through following parameters:
Source and Destination addresses, Transfer Direction, Transfer size, Source and Destination
data formats, Circular or Normal mode, Stream Priority level, Source and Destination
Incrementation mode, FIFO mode and its Threshold (if needed), Burst
mode for Source and/or Destination (if needed) using the DMA_Init() function.
To avoid filling unneccessary fields, you can call DMA_StructInit() function
to initialize a given structure with default values (reset values), the modify
only necessary fields
(ie. Source and Destination addresses, Transfer size and Data Formats).
(#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt(s) using the function
DMA_ITConfig() if you need to use DMA interrupts.
(#) Optionally, if the Circular mode is enabled, you can use the Double buffer mode by configuring
the second Memory address and the first Memory to be used through the function
DMA_DoubleBufferModeConfig(). Then enable the Double buffer mode through the function
DMA_DoubleBufferModeCmd(). These operations must be done before step 6.
(#) Enable the DMA stream using the DMA_Cmd() function.
(#) Activate the needed Stream Request using PPP_DMACmd() function for
any PPP peripheral except internal SRAM and FLASH (ie. SPI, USART ...)
The function allowing this operation is provided in each PPP peripheral
driver (ie. SPI_DMACmd for SPI peripheral).
Once the Stream is enabled, it is not possible to modify its configuration
unless the stream is stopped and disabled.
After enabling the Stream, it is advised to monitor the EN bit status using
the function DMA_GetCmdStatus(). In case of configuration errors or bus errors
this bit will remain reset and all transfers on this Stream will remain on hold.
(#) Optionally, you can configure the number of data to be transferred
when the Stream is disabled (ie. after each Transfer Complete event
or when a Transfer Error occurs) using the function DMA_SetCurrDataCounter().
And you can get the number of remaining data to be transferred using
the function DMA_GetCurrDataCounter() at run time (when the DMA Stream is
enabled and running).
(#) To control DMA events you can use one of the following two methods:
(##) Check on DMA Stream flags using the function DMA_GetFlagStatus().
(##) Use DMA interrupts through the function DMA_ITConfig() at initialization
phase and DMA_GetITStatus() function into interrupt routines in
communication phase.
[..]
After checking on a flag you should clear it using DMA_ClearFlag()
function. And after checking on an interrupt event you should
clear it using DMA_ClearITPendingBit() function.
(#) Optionally, if Circular mode and Double Buffer mode are enabled, you can modify
the Memory Addresses using the function DMA_MemoryTargetConfig(). Make sure that
the Memory Address to be modified is not the one currently in use by DMA Stream.
This condition can be monitored using the function DMA_GetCurrentMemoryTarget().
(#) Optionally, Pause-Resume operations may be performed:
The DMA_Cmd() function may be used to perform Pause-Resume operation.
When a transfer is ongoing, calling this function to disable the
Stream will cause the transfer to be paused. All configuration registers
and the number of remaining data will be preserved. When calling again
this function to re-enable the Stream, the transfer will be resumed from
the point where it was paused.
-@- Memory-to-Memory transfer is possible by setting the address of the memory into
the Peripheral registers. In this mode, Circular mode and Double Buffer mode
are not allowed.
-@- The FIFO is used mainly to reduce bus usage and to allow data
packing/unpacking: it is possible to set different Data Sizes for
the Peripheral and the Memory (ie. you can set Half-Word data size
for the peripheral to access its data register and set Word data size
for the Memory to gain in access time. Each two Half-words will be
packed and written in a single access to a Word in the Memory).
-@- When FIFO is disabled, it is not allowed to configure different
Data Sizes for Source and Destination. In this case the Peripheral
Data Size will be applied to both Source and Destination.
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -162,18 +170,18 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This subsection provides functions allowing to initialize the DMA Stream source
and destination addresses, incrementation and data sizes, transfer direction,
buffer size, circular/normal mode selection, memory-to-memory mode selection
and Stream priority value.
The DMA_Init() function follows the DMA configuration procedures as described in
reference manual (RM0090) except the first point: waiting on EN bit to be reset.
This condition should be checked by user application using the function DMA_GetCmdStatus()
before calling the DMA_Init() function.
[..]
This subsection provides functions allowing to initialize the DMA Stream source
and destination addresses, incrementation and data sizes, transfer direction,
buffer size, circular/normal mode selection, memory-to-memory mode selection
and Stream priority value.
[..]
The DMA_Init() function follows the DMA configuration procedures as described in
reference manual (RM0090) except the first point: waiting on EN bit to be reset.
This condition should be checked by user application using the function DMA_GetCmdStatus()
before calling the DMA_Init() function.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -566,37 +574,35 @@ void DMA_FlowControllerConfig(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_Flo
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Data Counter functions
##### Data Counter functions #####
===============================================================================
This subsection provides function allowing to configure and read the buffer size
(number of data to be transferred).
The DMA data counter can be written only when the DMA Stream is disabled
(ie. after transfer complete event).
The following function can be used to write the Stream data counter value:
- void DMA_SetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint16_t Counter);
@note It is advised to use this function rather than DMA_Init() in situations where
only the Data buffer needs to be reloaded.
@note If the Source and Destination Data Sizes are different, then the value written in
data counter, expressing the number of transfers, is relative to the number of
transfers from the Peripheral point of view.
ie. If Memory data size is Word, Peripheral data size is Half-Words, then the value
to be configured in the data counter is the number of Half-Words to be transferred
from/to the peripheral.
The DMA data counter can be read to indicate the number of remaining transfers for
the relative DMA Stream. This counter is decremented at the end of each data
transfer and when the transfer is complete:
- If Normal mode is selected: the counter is set to 0.
- If Circular mode is selected: the counter is reloaded with the initial value
(configured before enabling the DMA Stream)
The following function can be used to read the Stream data counter value:
- uint16_t DMA_GetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx);
[..]
This subsection provides function allowing to configure and read the buffer size
(number of data to be transferred).
[..]
The DMA data counter can be written only when the DMA Stream is disabled
(ie. after transfer complete event).
[..]
The following function can be used to write the Stream data counter value:
(+) void DMA_SetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint16_t Counter);
-@- It is advised to use this function rather than DMA_Init() in situations
where only the Data buffer needs to be reloaded.
-@- If the Source and Destination Data Sizes are different, then the value
written in data counter, expressing the number of transfers, is relative
to the number of transfers from the Peripheral point of view.
ie. If Memory data size is Word, Peripheral data size is Half-Words,
then the value to be configured in the data counter is the number
of Half-Words to be transferred from/to the peripheral.
[..]
The DMA data counter can be read to indicate the number of remaining transfers for
the relative DMA Stream. This counter is decremented at the end of each data
transfer and when the transfer is complete:
(+) If Normal mode is selected: the counter is set to 0.
(+) If Circular mode is selected: the counter is reloaded with the initial value
(configured before enabling the DMA Stream)
[..]
The following function can be used to read the Stream data counter value:
(+) uint16_t DMA_GetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx);
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -655,45 +661,51 @@ uint16_t DMA_GetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Double Buffer mode functions
##### Double Buffer mode functions #####
===============================================================================
This subsection provides function allowing to configure and control the double
buffer mode parameters.
[..]
This subsection provides function allowing to configure and control the double
buffer mode parameters.
[..]
The Double Buffer mode can be used only when Circular mode is enabled.
The Double Buffer mode cannot be used when transferring data from Memory to Memory.
[..]
The Double Buffer mode allows to set two different Memory addresses from/to which
the DMA controller will access alternatively (after completing transfer to/from
target memory 0, it will start transfer to/from target memory 1).
This allows to reduce software overhead for double buffering and reduce the CPU
access time.
[..]
Two functions must be called before calling the DMA_Init() function:
(+) void DMA_DoubleBufferModeConfig(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx,
uint32_t Memory1BaseAddr, uint32_t DMA_CurrentMemory);
(+) void DMA_DoubleBufferModeCmd(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, FunctionalState NewState);
[..]
DMA_DoubleBufferModeConfig() is called to configure the Memory 1 base address
and the first Memory target from/to which the transfer will start after
enabling the DMA Stream. Then DMA_DoubleBufferModeCmd() must be called
to enable the Double Buffer mode (or disable it when it should not be used).
The Double Buffer mode can be used only when Circular mode is enabled.
The Double Buffer mode cannot be used when transferring data from Memory to Memory.
The Double Buffer mode allows to set two different Memory addresses from/to which
the DMA controller will access alternatively (after completing transfer to/from target
memory 0, it will start transfer to/from target memory 1).
This allows to reduce software overhead for double buffering and reduce the CPU
access time.
Two functions must be called before calling the DMA_Init() function:
- void DMA_DoubleBufferModeConfig(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t Memory1BaseAddr,
uint32_t DMA_CurrentMemory);
- void DMA_DoubleBufferModeCmd(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, FunctionalState NewState);
DMA_DoubleBufferModeConfig() is called to configure the Memory 1 base address and the first
Memory target from/to which the transfer will start after enabling the DMA Stream.
Then DMA_DoubleBufferModeCmd() must be called to enable the Double Buffer mode (or disable
it when it should not be used).
Two functions can be called dynamically when the transfer is ongoing (or when the DMA Stream is
stopped) to modify on of the target Memories addresses or to check wich Memory target is currently
used:
- void DMA_MemoryTargetConfig(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t MemoryBaseAddr,
uint32_t DMA_MemoryTarget);
- uint32_t DMA_GetCurrentMemoryTarget(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx);
DMA_MemoryTargetConfig() can be called to modify the base address of one of the two target Memories.
The Memory of which the base address will be modified must not be currently be used by the DMA Stream
(ie. if the DMA Stream is currently transferring from Memory 1 then you can only modify base address
of target Memory 0 and vice versa).
To check this condition, it is recommended to use the function DMA_GetCurrentMemoryTarget() which
returns the index of the Memory target currently in use by the DMA Stream.
[..]
Two functions can be called dynamically when the transfer is ongoing (or when the DMA Stream is
stopped) to modify on of the target Memories addresses or to check wich Memory target is currently
used:
(+) void DMA_MemoryTargetConfig(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx,
uint32_t MemoryBaseAddr, uint32_t DMA_MemoryTarget);
(+) uint32_t DMA_GetCurrentMemoryTarget(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx);
[..]
DMA_MemoryTargetConfig() can be called to modify the base address of one of
the two target Memories.
The Memory of which the base address will be modified must not be currently
be used by the DMA Stream (ie. if the DMA Stream is currently transferring
from Memory 1 then you can only modify base address of target Memory 0 and vice versa).
To check this condition, it is recommended to use the function DMA_GetCurrentMemoryTarget() which
returns the index of the Memory target currently in use by the DMA Stream.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -842,64 +854,70 @@ uint32_t DMA_GetCurrentMemoryTarget(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
This subsection provides functions allowing to
- Check the DMA enable status
- Check the FIFO status
- Configure the DMA Interrupts sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status.
1. DMA Enable status:
After configuring the DMA Stream (DMA_Init() function) and enabling the stream,
it is recommended to check (or wait until) the DMA Stream is effectively enabled.
A Stream may remain disabled if a configuration parameter is wrong.
After disabling a DMA Stream, it is also recommended to check (or wait until) the DMA
Stream is effectively disabled. If a Stream is disabled while a data transfer is ongoing,
the current data will be transferred and the Stream will be effectively disabled only after
this data transfer completion.
To monitor this state it is possible to use the following function:
- FunctionalState DMA_GetCmdStatus(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx);
[..]
This subsection provides functions allowing to
(+) Check the DMA enable status
(+) Check the FIFO status
(+) Configure the DMA Interrupts sources and check or clear the flags or
pending bits status.
[..]
(#) DMA Enable status:
After configuring the DMA Stream (DMA_Init() function) and enabling
the stream, it is recommended to check (or wait until) the DMA Stream
is effectively enabled. A Stream may remain disabled if a configuration
parameter is wrong. After disabling a DMA Stream, it is also recommended
to check (or wait until) the DMA Stream is effectively disabled.
If a Stream is disabled while a data transfer is ongoing, the current
data will be transferred and the Stream will be effectively disabled
only after this data transfer completion.
To monitor this state it is possible to use the following function:
(++) FunctionalState DMA_GetCmdStatus(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx);
2. FIFO Status:
It is possible to monitor the FIFO status when a transfer is ongoing using the following
function:
- uint32_t DMA_GetFIFOStatus(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx);
(#) FIFO Status:
It is possible to monitor the FIFO status when a transfer is ongoing
using the following function:
(++) uint32_t DMA_GetFIFOStatus(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx);
3. DMA Interrupts and Flags:
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage the
DMA controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
(#) DMA Interrupts and Flags:
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application
to manage the DMA controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
Polling Mode
=============
*** Polling Mode ***
====================
[..]
Each DMA stream can be managed through 4 event Flags:
(x : DMA Stream number )
1. DMA_FLAG_FEIFx : to indicate that a FIFO Mode Transfer Error event occurred.
2. DMA_FLAG_DMEIFx : to indicate that a Direct Mode Transfer Error event occurred.
3. DMA_FLAG_TEIFx : to indicate that a Transfer Error event occurred.
4. DMA_FLAG_HTIFx : to indicate that a Half-Transfer Complete event occurred.
5. DMA_FLAG_TCIFx : to indicate that a Transfer Complete event occurred .
(#) DMA_FLAG_FEIFx : to indicate that a FIFO Mode Transfer Error event occurred.
(#) DMA_FLAG_DMEIFx : to indicate that a Direct Mode Transfer Error event occurred.
(#) DMA_FLAG_TEIFx : to indicate that a Transfer Error event occurred.
(#) DMA_FLAG_HTIFx : to indicate that a Half-Transfer Complete event occurred.
(#) DMA_FLAG_TCIFx : to indicate that a Transfer Complete event occurred .
[..]
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(+) FlagStatus DMA_GetFlagStatus(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_FLAG);
(+) void DMA_ClearFlag(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_FLAG);
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- FlagStatus DMA_GetFlagStatus(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_FLAG);
- void DMA_ClearFlag(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_FLAG);
Interrupt Mode
===============
*** Interrupt Mode ***
======================
[..]
Each DMA Stream can be managed through 4 Interrupts:
Interrupt Source
----------------
1. DMA_IT_FEIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the FIFO Mode Transfer Error event.
2. DMA_IT_DMEIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the Direct Mode Transfer Error event.
3. DMA_IT_TEIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the Transfer Error event.
4. DMA_IT_HTIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the Half-Transfer Complete event.
5. DMA_IT_TCIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the a Transfer Complete event.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- void DMA_ITConfig(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
- ITStatus DMA_GetITStatus(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_IT);
- void DMA_ClearITPendingBit(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_IT);
*** Interrupt Source ***
========================
[..]
(#) DMA_IT_FEIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the FIFO Mode Transfer Error event.
(#) DMA_IT_DMEIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the Direct Mode Transfer Error event.
(#) DMA_IT_TEIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the Transfer Error event.
(#) DMA_IT_HTIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the Half-Transfer Complete event.
(#) DMA_IT_TCIFx : specifies the interrupt source for the a Transfer Complete event.
[..]
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(+) void DMA_ITConfig(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
(+) ITStatus DMA_GetITStatus(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_IT);
(+) void DMA_ClearITPendingBit(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_IT);
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1280,4 +1298,4 @@ void DMA_ClearITPendingBit(DMA_Stream_TypeDef* DMAy_Streamx, uint32_t DMA_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

101
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_exti.c
View File

@ -2,58 +2,65 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_exti.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the EXTI peripheral:
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* EXTI features
* ===================================================================
*
* External interrupt/event lines are mapped as following:
* 1- All available GPIO pins are connected to the 16 external
* interrupt/event lines from EXTI0 to EXTI15.
* 2- EXTI line 16 is connected to the PVD Output
* 3- EXTI line 17 is connected to the RTC Alarm event
* 4- EXTI line 18 is connected to the USB OTG FS Wakeup from suspend event
* 5- EXTI line 19 is connected to the Ethernet Wakeup event
* 6- EXTI line 20 is connected to the USB OTG HS (configured in FS) Wakeup event
* 7- EXTI line 21 is connected to the RTC Tamper and Time Stamp events
* 8- EXTI line 22 is connected to the RTC Wakeup event
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
*
* In order to use an I/O pin as an external interrupt source, follow
* steps below:
* 1- Configure the I/O in input mode using GPIO_Init()
* 2- Select the input source pin for the EXTI line using SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig()
* 3- Select the mode(interrupt, event) and configure the trigger
* selection (Rising, falling or both) using EXTI_Init()
* 4- Configure NVIC IRQ channel mapped to the EXTI line using NVIC_Init()
*
* @note SYSCFG APB clock must be enabled to get write access to SYSCFG_EXTICRx
* registers using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### EXTI features #####
===================================================================
[..] External interrupt/event lines are mapped as following:
(#) All available GPIO pins are connected to the 16 external
interrupt/event lines from EXTI0 to EXTI15.
(#) EXTI line 16 is connected to the PVD Output
(#) EXTI line 17 is connected to the RTC Alarm event
(#) EXTI line 18 is connected to the USB OTG FS Wakeup from suspend event
(#) EXTI line 19 is connected to the Ethernet Wakeup event
(#) EXTI line 20 is connected to the USB OTG HS (configured in FS) Wakeup event
(#) EXTI line 21 is connected to the RTC Tamper and Time Stamp events
(#) EXTI line 22 is connected to the RTC Wakeup event
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..] In order to use an I/O pin as an external interrupt source, follow steps
below:
(#) Configure the I/O in input mode using GPIO_Init()
(#) Select the input source pin for the EXTI line using SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig()
(#) Select the mode(interrupt, event) and configure the trigger
selection (Rising, falling or both) using EXTI_Init()
(#) Configure NVIC IRQ channel mapped to the EXTI line using NVIC_Init()
[..]
(@) SYSCFG APB clock must be enabled to get write access to SYSCFG_EXTICRx
registers using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -88,7 +95,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -204,7 +211,7 @@ void EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt(uint32_t EXTI_Line)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -303,4 +310,4 @@ void EXTI_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t EXTI_Line)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

412
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_flash.c
View File

@ -2,67 +2,69 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_flash.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the FLASH peripheral:
* - FLASH Interface configuration
* - FLASH Memory Programming
* - Option Bytes Programming
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + FLASH Interface configuration
* + FLASH Memory Programming
* + Option Bytes Programming
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
*
* This driver provides functions to configure and program the FLASH
* memory of all STM32F4xx devices.
* These functions are split in 4 groups:
*
* 1. FLASH Interface configuration functions: this group includes the
* management of the following features:
* - Set the latency
* - Enable/Disable the prefetch buffer
* - Enable/Disable the Instruction cache and the Data cache
* - Reset the Instruction cache and the Data cache
*
* 2. FLASH Memory Programming functions: this group includes all needed
* functions to erase and program the main memory:
* - Lock and Unlock the FLASH interface
* - Erase function: Erase sector, erase all sectors
* - Program functions: byte, half word, word and double word
*
* 3. Option Bytes Programming functions: this group includes all needed
* functions to manage the Option Bytes:
* - Set/Reset the write protection
* - Set the Read protection Level
* - Set the BOR level
* - Program the user Option Bytes
* - Launch the Option Bytes loader
*
* 4. Interrupts and flags management functions: this group
* includes all needed functions to:
* - Enable/Disable the FLASH interrupt sources
* - Get flags status
* - Clear flags
* - Get FLASH operation status
* - Wait for last FLASH operation
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
This driver provides functions to configure and program the FLASH memory
of all STM32F4xx devices. These functions are split in 4 groups:
(#) FLASH Interface configuration functions: this group includes the
management of the following features:
(++) Set the latency
(++) Enable/Disable the prefetch buffer
(++) Enable/Disable the Instruction cache and the Data cache
(++) Reset the Instruction cache and the Data cache
(#) FLASH Memory Programming functions: this group includes all needed
functions to erase and program the main memory:
(++) Lock and Unlock the FLASH interface
(++) Erase function: Erase sector, erase all sectors
(++) Program functions: byte, half word, word and double word
(#) Option Bytes Programming functions: this group includes all needed
functions to manage the Option Bytes:
(++) Set/Reset the write protection
(++) Set the Read protection Level
(++) Set the BOR level
(++) Program the user Option Bytes
(++) Launch the Option Bytes loader
(#) Interrupts and flags management functions: this group
includes all needed functions to:
(++) Enable/Disable the FLASH interrupt sources
(++) Get flags status
(++) Clear flags
(++) Get FLASH operation status
(++) Wait for last FLASH operation
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -97,36 +99,39 @@
@verbatim
===============================================================================
FLASH Interface configuration functions
##### FLASH Interface configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This group includes the following functions:
- void FLASH_SetLatency(uint32_t FLASH_Latency)
To correctly read data from FLASH memory, the number of wait states (LATENCY)
must be correctly programmed according to the frequency of the CPU clock
(HCLK) and the supply voltage of the device.
[..]
This group includes the following functions:
(+) void FLASH_SetLatency(uint32_t FLASH_Latency)
To correctly read data from FLASH memory, the number of wait states (LATENCY)
must be correctly programmed according to the frequency of the CPU clock
(HCLK) and the supply voltage of the device.
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Latency | HCLK clock frequency (MHz) |
| |---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| | voltage range | voltage range | voltage range | voltage range |
| | 2.7 V - 3.6 V | 2.4 V - 2.7 V | 2.1 V - 2.4 V | 1.8 V - 2.1 V |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|
|0WS(1CPU cycle)|0 < HCLK <= 30 |0 < HCLK <= 24 |0 < HCLK <= 18 |0 < HCLK <= 16 |
|0WS(1CPU cycle)|0 < HCLK <= 30 |0 < HCLK <= 24 |0 < HCLK <= 22 |0 < HCLK <= 20 |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|
|1WS(2CPU cycle)|30 < HCLK <= 60 |24 < HCLK <= 48 |18 < HCLK <= 36 |16 < HCLK <= 32 |
|1WS(2CPU cycle)|30 < HCLK <= 60 |24 < HCLK <= 48 |22 < HCLK <= 44 |20 < HCLK <= 40 |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|
|2WS(3CPU cycle)|60 < HCLK <= 90 |48 < HCLK <= 72 |36 < HCLK <= 54 |32 < HCLK <= 48 |
|2WS(3CPU cycle)|60 < HCLK <= 90 |48 < HCLK <= 72 |44 < HCLK <= 66 |40 < HCLK <= 60 |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|
|3WS(4CPU cycle)|90 < HCLK <= 120|72 < HCLK <= 96 |54 < HCLK <= 72 |48 < HCLK <= 64 |
|3WS(4CPU cycle)|90 < HCLK <= 120|72 < HCLK <= 96 |66 < HCLK <= 88 |60 < HCLK <= 80 |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|
|4WS(5CPU cycle)|120< HCLK <= 150|96 < HCLK <= 120|72 < HCLK <= 90 |64 < HCLK <= 80 |
|4WS(5CPU cycle)|120< HCLK <= 150|96 < HCLK <= 120|88 < HCLK <= 110 |80 < HCLK <= 100 |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|
|5WS(6CPU cycle)|120< HCLK <= 168|120< HCLK <= 144|90 < HCLK <= 108 |80 < HCLK <= 96 |
|5WS(6CPU cycle)|120< HCLK <= 168|120< HCLK <= 144|110 < HCLK <= 132|100 < HCLK <= 120|
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|
|6WS(7CPU cycle)| NA |144< HCLK <= 168|108 < HCLK <= 120|96 < HCLK <= 112 |
|6WS(7CPU cycle)| NA |144< HCLK <= 168|132 < HCLK <= 154|120 < HCLK <= 140|
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|
|7WS(8CPU cycle)| NA | NA |120 < HCLK <= 138|112 < HCLK <= 120|
|***************|****************|****************|*****************|*****************|*****************************+
|7WS(8CPU cycle)| NA | NA |154 < HCLK <= 168|140 < HCLK <= 160|
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
[..]
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| | voltage range | voltage range | voltage range | voltage range | voltage range 2.7 V - 3.6 V |
| | 2.7 V - 3.6 V | 2.4 V - 2.7 V | 2.1 V - 2.4 V | 1.8 V - 2.1 V | with External Vpp = 9V |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|-----------------------------|
@ -134,23 +139,33 @@
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|-----------------------------|
|PSIZE[1:0] | 10 | 01 | 00 | 11 |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
@note When VOS bit (in PWR_CR register) is reset to '0’, the maximum value of HCLK is 144 MHz.
You can use PWR_MainRegulatorModeConfig() function to set or reset this bit.
- void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
- void FLASH_InstructionCacheCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
- void FLASH_DataCacheCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
- void FLASH_InstructionCacheReset(void)
- void FLASH_DataCacheReset(void)
The unlock sequence is not needed for these functions.
-@- When VOS bit (in PWR_CR register) is reset to 0 , the maximum value of HCLK is 144 MHz.
You can use PWR_MainRegulatorModeConfig() function to set or reset this bit.
-@- On STM32F40xx/41xx devices:
(++) when VOS = '0', the maximum value of fHCLK = 144MHz.
(++) when VOS = '1', the maximum value of fHCLK = 168MHz.
[..]
On STM32F427x/437x devices:
(++) when VOS[1:0] = '0x01', the maximum value of fHCLK is 120MHz.
(++) when VOS[1:0] = '0x10', the maximum value of fHCLK is 144MHz.
(++) when VOS[1:0] = '0x11', the maximum value of f is 168MHz
You can use PWR_MainRegulatorModeConfig() function to control VOS bits.
(+) void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
(+) void FLASH_InstructionCacheCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
(+) void FLASH_DataCacheCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
(+) void FLASH_InstructionCacheReset(void)
(+) void FLASH_DataCacheReset(void)
[..]
The unlock sequence is not needed for these functions.
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
/**
* @brief Sets the code latency value.
* @brief Sets the code latency value.
* @param FLASH_Latency: specifies the FLASH Latency value.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg FLASH_Latency_0: FLASH Zero Latency cycle
@ -160,7 +175,9 @@
* @arg FLASH_Latency_4: FLASH Four Latency cycles
* @arg FLASH_Latency_5: FLASH Five Latency cycles
* @arg FLASH_Latency_6: FLASH Six Latency cycles
* @arg FLASH_Latency_7: FLASH Seven Latency cycles
* @arg FLASH_Latency_7: FLASH Seven Latency cycles
* For STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices this parameter can be
* a value between FLASH_Latency_0 and FLASH_Latency_7.
* @retval None
*/
void FLASH_SetLatency(uint32_t FLASH_Latency)
@ -267,26 +284,26 @@ void FLASH_DataCacheReset(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
FLASH Memory Programming functions
##### FLASH Memory Programming functions #####
===============================================================================
[..]
This group includes the following functions:
(+) void FLASH_Unlock(void)
(+) void FLASH_Lock(void)
(+) FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseSector(uint32_t FLASH_Sector, uint8_t VoltageRange)
(+) FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllSectors(uint8_t VoltageRange)
(+) FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramDoubleWord(uint32_t Address, uint64_t Data)
(+) FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
(+) FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data)
(+) FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data)
[..]
Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
(#) Call the FLASH_Unlock() function to enable the FLASH control register access
This group includes the following functions:
- void FLASH_Unlock(void)
- void FLASH_Lock(void)
- FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseSector(uint32_t FLASH_Sector, uint8_t VoltageRange)
- FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllSectors(uint8_t VoltageRange)
- FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramDoubleWord(uint32_t Address, uint64_t Data)
- FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
- FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data)
- FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data)
Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
1. Call the FLASH_Unlock() function to enable the FLASH control register access
(#) Call the desired function to erase sector(s) or program data
2. Call the desired function to erase sector(s) or program data
3. Call the FLASH_Lock() function to disable the FLASH control register access
(recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
(#) Call the FLASH_Lock() function to disable the FLASH control register access
(recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -320,9 +337,15 @@ void FLASH_Lock(void)
/**
* @brief Erases a specified FLASH Sector.
*
* @note If an erase and a program operations are requested simustaneously,
* the erase operation is performed before the program one.
*
* @param FLASH_Sector: The Sector number to be erased.
* This parameter can be a value between FLASH_Sector_0 and FLASH_Sector_11
* For STM32F40xx/41xx devices this parameter can be a value between
* FLASH_Sector_0 and FLASH_Sector_11.
* For STM32F427x/437x devices this parameter can be a value between
* FLASH_Sector_0 and FLASH_Sector_23.
*
* @param VoltageRange: The device voltage range which defines the erase parallelism.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -388,7 +411,10 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseSector(uint32_t FLASH_Sector, uint8_t VoltageRange)
/**
* @brief Erases all FLASH Sectors.
*
*
* @note If an erase and a program operations are requested simustaneously,
* the erase operation is performed before the program one.
*
* @param VoltageRange: The device voltage range which defines the erase parallelism.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg VoltageRange_1: when the device voltage range is 1.8V to 2.1V,
@ -405,7 +431,7 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseSector(uint32_t FLASH_Sector, uint8_t VoltageRange)
*/
FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllSectors(uint8_t VoltageRange)
{
uint32_t tmp_psize = 0x0;
uint32_t tmp_psize;
FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
/* Wait for last operation to be completed */
@ -431,16 +457,31 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllSectors(uint8_t VoltageRange)
if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
{
/* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase all sectors */
FLASH->CR &= CR_PSIZE_MASK;
FLASH->CR |= tmp_psize;
FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_MER;
FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_STRT;
#if defined (STM32F427X)
FLASH->CR &= CR_PSIZE_MASK;
FLASH->CR |= tmp_psize;
FLASH->CR |= (FLASH_CR_MER1 | FLASH_CR_MER2);
FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_STRT;
/* Wait for last operation to be completed */
status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation();
/* if the erase operation is completed, disable the MER Bit */
FLASH->CR &= ~(FLASH_CR_MER1 | FLASH_CR_MER2);
#endif /* STM32F427X */
#if defined (STM32F40XX) || defined (STM32F4XX)
FLASH->CR &= CR_PSIZE_MASK;
FLASH->CR |= tmp_psize;
FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_MER;
FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_STRT;
/* Wait for last operation to be completed */
status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation();
/* if the erase operation is completed, disable the MER Bit */
FLASH->CR &= (~FLASH_CR_MER);
#endif /* STM32F40XX */
}
/* Return the Erase Status */
@ -450,7 +491,11 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllSectors(uint8_t VoltageRange)
/**
* @brief Programs a double word (64-bit) at a specified address.
* @note This function must be used when the device voltage range is from
* 2.7V to 3.6V and an External Vpp is present.
* 2.7V to 3.6V and an External Vpp is present.
*
* @note If an erase and a program operations are requested simustaneously,
* the erase operation is performed before the program one.
*
* @param Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
* @param Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
* @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM,
@ -487,9 +532,14 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramDoubleWord(uint32_t Address, uint64_t Data)
/**
* @brief Programs a word (32-bit) at a specified address.
*
* @note This function must be used when the device voltage range is from 2.7V to 3.6V.
*
* @note If an erase and a program operations are requested simustaneously,
* the erase operation is performed before the program one.
*
* @param Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
* This parameter can be any address in Program memory zone or in OTP zone.
* @note This function must be used when the device voltage range is from 2.7V to 3.6V.
* @param Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
* @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY, FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM,
* FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_ERROR_OPERATION or FLASH_COMPLETE.
@ -525,7 +575,11 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
/**
* @brief Programs a half word (16-bit) at a specified address.
* @note This function must be used when the device voltage range is from 2.1V to 3.6V.
* @note This function must be used when the device voltage range is from 2.1V to 3.6V.
*
* @note If an erase and a program operations are requested simustaneously,
* the erase operation is performed before the program one.
*
* @param Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
* This parameter can be any address in Program memory zone or in OTP zone.
* @param Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
@ -563,7 +617,11 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data)
/**
* @brief Programs a byte (8-bit) at a specified address.
* @note This function can be used within all the device supply voltage ranges.
* @note This function can be used within all the device supply voltage ranges.
*
* @note If an erase and a program operations are requested simustaneously,
* the erase operation is performed before the program one.
*
* @param Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
* This parameter can be any address in Program memory zone or in OTP zone.
* @param Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
@ -609,42 +667,48 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramByte(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Option Bytes Programming functions
##### Option Bytes Programming functions #####
===============================================================================
This group includes the following functions:
- void FLASH_OB_Unlock(void)
- void FLASH_OB_Lock(void)
- void FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState)
- void FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP)
- void FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY)
- void FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR)
- FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramOTP(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
- FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_Launch(void)
- uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void)
- uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void)
- uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void)
- uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetBOR(void)
Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
1. Call the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function to enable the FLASH option control register access
[..]
This group includes the following functions:
(+) void FLASH_OB_Unlock(void)
(+) void FLASH_OB_Lock(void)
(+) void FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState)
(+) void FLASH_OB_WRP1Config(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState)
(+) void FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP)
(+) void FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY)
(+) void FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR)
(+) FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramOTP(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
(+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_Launch(void)
(+) uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void)
(+) uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void)
(+) uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP1(void)
(+) uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void)
(+) uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetBOR(void)
[..]
Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
(#) Call the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function to enable the FLASH option control
register access
2. Call one or several functions to program the desired Option Bytes:
- void FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState) => to Enable/Disable
the desired sector write protection
- void FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP) => to set the desired read Protection Level
- void FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY) => to configure
the user Option Bytes.
- void FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR) => to set the BOR Level
(#) Call one or several functions to program the desired Option Bytes:
(++) void FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState)
=> to Enable/Disable the desired sector write protection
(++) void FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP) => to set the desired read
Protection Level
(++) void FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY)
=> to configure the user Option Bytes.
(++) void FLASH_OB_BORConfig(uint8_t OB_BOR) => to set the BOR Level
3. Once all needed Option Bytes to be programmed are correctly written, call the
FLASH_OB_Launch() function to launch the Option Bytes programming process.
(#) Once all needed Option Bytes to be programmed are correctly written,
call the FLASH_OB_Launch() function to launch the Option Bytes
programming process.
@note When changing the IWDG mode from HW to SW or from SW to HW, a system
reset is needed to make the change effective.
-@- When changing the IWDG mode from HW to SW or from SW to HW, a system
reset is needed to make the change effective.
4. Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() function to disable the FLASH option control register
access (recommended to protect the Option Bytes against possible unwanted operations)
(#) Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() function to disable the FLASH option control
register access (recommended to protect the Option Bytes against
possible unwanted operations)
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -678,6 +742,12 @@ void FLASH_OB_Lock(void)
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the write protection of the desired sectors
*
* @note When the memory read protection level is selected (RDP level = 1),
* it is not possible to program or erase the flash sector i if CortexM4
* debug features are connected or boot code is executed in RAM, even if nWRPi = 1
* @note Active value of nWRPi bits is inverted when PCROP mode is active (SPRMOD =1).
*
* @param OB_WRP: specifies the sector(s) to be write protected or unprotected.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg OB_WRP: A value between OB_WRP_Sector0 and OB_WRP_Sector11
@ -709,6 +779,45 @@ void FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState)
}
}
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the write protection of the desired sectors
* @note This function can be used only for STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @note When the memory read out protection is selected (RDP level = 1),
* it is not possible to program or erase the flash sector i if CortexM4
* debug features are connected or boot code is executed in RAM, even if nWRPi = 1
* @note Active value of nWRPi bits is inverted when PCROP mode is active (SPRMOD =1).
*
* @param OB_WRP: specifies the sector(s) to be write protected or unprotected.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg OB_WRP: A value between OB_WRP_Sector12 and OB_WRP_Sector23
* @arg OB_WRP_Sector_All
* @param Newstate: new state of the Write Protection.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
*/
void FLASH_OB_WRP1Config(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState)
{
FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(OB_WRP));
assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation();
if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
{
if(NewState != DISABLE)
{
*(__IO uint16_t*)OPTCR1_BYTE2_ADDRESS &= (~OB_WRP);
}
else
{
*(__IO uint16_t*)OPTCR1_BYTE2_ADDRESS |= (uint16_t)OB_WRP;
}
}
}
/**
* @brief Sets the read protection level.
* @param OB_RDP: specifies the read protection level.
@ -839,6 +948,18 @@ uint16_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void)
return (*(__IO uint16_t *)(OPTCR_BYTE2_ADDRESS));
}
/**
* @brief Returns the FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value.
* @note This function can be used only for STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param None
* @retval The FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value
*/
uint16_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP1(void)
{
/* Return the FLASH write protection Register value */
return (*(__IO uint16_t *)(OPTCR1_BYTE2_ADDRESS));
}
/**
* @brief Returns the FLASH Read Protection level.
* @param None
@ -885,9 +1006,8 @@ uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetBOR(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -958,7 +1078,7 @@ FlagStatus FLASH_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG)
* @arg FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR: FLASH Write protected error flag
* @arg FLASH_FLAG_PGAERR: FLASH Programming Alignment error flag
* @arg FLASH_FLAG_PGPERR: FLASH Programming Parallelism error flag
* @arg FLASH_FLAG_PGSERR: FLASH Programming Sequence error flag
* @arg FLASH_FLAG_PGSERR: FLASH Programming Sequence error flag
* @retval None
*/
void FLASH_ClearFlag(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG)
@ -990,7 +1110,7 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_GetStatus(void)
{
flashstatus = FLASH_ERROR_WRP;
}
else
else
{
if((FLASH->SR & (uint32_t)0xEF) != (uint32_t)0x00)
{
@ -1053,4 +1173,4 @@ FLASH_Status FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(void)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

153
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_fsmc.c
View File

@ -2,27 +2,32 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_fsmc.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the FSMC peripheral:
* - Interface with SRAM, PSRAM, NOR and OneNAND memories
* - Interface with NAND memories
* - Interface with 16-bit PC Card compatible memories
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Interface with SRAM, PSRAM, NOR and OneNAND memories
* + Interface with NAND memories
* + Interface with 16-bit PC Card compatible memories
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -69,41 +74,41 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
NOR/SRAM Controller functions
##### NOR and SRAM Controller functions #####
===============================================================================
The following sequence should be followed to configure the FSMC to interface with
SRAM, PSRAM, NOR or OneNAND memory connected to the NOR/SRAM Bank:
[..] The following sequence should be followed to configure the FSMC to interface
with SRAM, PSRAM, NOR or OneNAND memory connected to the NOR/SRAM Bank:
1. Enable the clock for the FSMC and associated GPIOs using the following functions:
(#) Enable the clock for the FSMC and associated GPIOs using the following functions:
RCC_AHB3PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC, ENABLE);
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
2. FSMC pins configuration
- Connect the involved FSMC pins to AF12 using the following function
GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_FSMC);
- Configure these FSMC pins in alternate function mode by calling the function
GPIO_Init();
(#) FSMC pins configuration
(++) Connect the involved FSMC pins to AF12 using the following function
GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_FSMC);
(++) Configure these FSMC pins in alternate function mode by calling the function
GPIO_Init();
3. Declare a FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef structure, for example:
(#) Declare a FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef structure, for example:
FSMC_NORSRAMInitTypeDef FSMC_NORSRAMInitStructure;
and fill the FSMC_NORSRAMInitStructure variable with the allowed values of
the structure member.
4. Initialize the NOR/SRAM Controller by calling the function
(#) Initialize the NOR/SRAM Controller by calling the function
FSMC_NORSRAMInit(&FSMC_NORSRAMInitStructure);
5. Then enable the NOR/SRAM Bank, for example:
(#) Then enable the NOR/SRAM Bank, for example:
FSMC_NORSRAMCmd(FSMC_Bank1_NORSRAM2, ENABLE);
6. At this stage you can read/write from/to the memory connected to the NOR/SRAM Bank.
(#) At this stage you can read/write from/to the memory connected to the NOR/SRAM Bank.
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
/**
* @brief Deinitializes the FSMC NOR/SRAM Banks registers to their default
* @brief De-initializes the FSMC NOR/SRAM Banks registers to their default
* reset values.
* @param FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -290,46 +295,48 @@ void FSMC_NORSRAMCmd(uint32_t FSMC_Bank, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
NAND Controller functions
##### NAND Controller functions #####
===============================================================================
The following sequence should be followed to configure the FSMC to interface with
8-bit or 16-bit NAND memory connected to the NAND Bank:
[..] The following sequence should be followed to configure the FSMC to interface
with 8-bit or 16-bit NAND memory connected to the NAND Bank:
1. Enable the clock for the FSMC and associated GPIOs using the following functions:
RCC_AHB3PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC, ENABLE);
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
(#) Enable the clock for the FSMC and associated GPIOs using the following functions:
(++) RCC_AHB3PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC, ENABLE);
(++) RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
2. FSMC pins configuration
- Connect the involved FSMC pins to AF12 using the following function
GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_FSMC);
- Configure these FSMC pins in alternate function mode by calling the function
GPIO_Init();
(#) FSMC pins configuration
(++) Connect the involved FSMC pins to AF12 using the following function
GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_FSMC);
(++) Configure these FSMC pins in alternate function mode by calling the function
GPIO_Init();
3. Declare a FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef structure, for example:
FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef FSMC_NANDInitStructure;
(#) Declare a FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef structure, for example:
FSMC_NANDInitTypeDef FSMC_NANDInitStructure;
and fill the FSMC_NANDInitStructure variable with the allowed values of
the structure member.
4. Initialize the NAND Controller by calling the function
FSMC_NANDInit(&FSMC_NANDInitStructure);
(#) Initialize the NAND Controller by calling the function
FSMC_NANDInit(&FSMC_NANDInitStructure);
5. Then enable the NAND Bank, for example:
FSMC_NANDCmd(FSMC_Bank3_NAND, ENABLE);
(#) Then enable the NAND Bank, for example:
FSMC_NANDCmd(FSMC_Bank3_NAND, ENABLE);
6. At this stage you can read/write from/to the memory connected to the NAND Bank.
(#) At this stage you can read/write from/to the memory connected to the NAND Bank.
@note To enable the Error Correction Code (ECC), you have to use the function
FSMC_NANDECCCmd(FSMC_Bank3_NAND, ENABLE);
and to get the current ECC value you have to use the function
ECCval = FSMC_GetECC(FSMC_Bank3_NAND);
[..]
(@) To enable the Error Correction Code (ECC), you have to use the function
FSMC_NANDECCCmd(FSMC_Bank3_NAND, ENABLE);
[..]
(@) and to get the current ECC value you have to use the function
ECCval = FSMC_GetECC(FSMC_Bank3_NAND);
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
/**
* @brief Deinitializes the FSMC NAND Banks registers to their default reset values.
* @brief De-initializes the FSMC NAND Banks registers to their default reset values.
* @param FSMC_Bank: specifies the FSMC Bank to be used
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg FSMC_Bank2_NAND: FSMC Bank2 NAND
@ -566,41 +573,41 @@ uint32_t FSMC_GetECC(uint32_t FSMC_Bank)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
PCCARD Controller functions
##### PCCARD Controller functions #####
===============================================================================
The following sequence should be followed to configure the FSMC to interface with
16-bit PC Card compatible memory connected to the PCCARD Bank:
[..] he following sequence should be followed to configure the FSMC to interface
with 16-bit PC Card compatible memory connected to the PCCARD Bank:
1. Enable the clock for the FSMC and associated GPIOs using the following functions:
RCC_AHB3PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC, ENABLE);
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
(#) Enable the clock for the FSMC and associated GPIOs using the following functions:
(++) RCC_AHB3PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC, ENABLE);
(++) RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
2. FSMC pins configuration
- Connect the involved FSMC pins to AF12 using the following function
GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_FSMC);
- Configure these FSMC pins in alternate function mode by calling the function
GPIO_Init();
(#) FSMC pins configuration
(++) Connect the involved FSMC pins to AF12 using the following function
GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIOx, GPIO_PinSourcex, GPIO_AF_FSMC);
(++) Configure these FSMC pins in alternate function mode by calling the function
GPIO_Init();
3. Declare a FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef structure, for example:
FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef FSMC_PCCARDInitStructure;
(#) Declare a FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef structure, for example:
FSMC_PCCARDInitTypeDef FSMC_PCCARDInitStructure;
and fill the FSMC_PCCARDInitStructure variable with the allowed values of
the structure member.
4. Initialize the PCCARD Controller by calling the function
FSMC_PCCARDInit(&FSMC_PCCARDInitStructure);
(#) Initialize the PCCARD Controller by calling the function
FSMC_PCCARDInit(&FSMC_PCCARDInitStructure);
5. Then enable the PCCARD Bank:
FSMC_PCCARDCmd(ENABLE);
(#) Then enable the PCCARD Bank:
FSMC_PCCARDCmd(ENABLE);
6. At this stage you can read/write from/to the memory connected to the PCCARD Bank.
(#) At this stage you can read/write from/to the memory connected to the PCCARD Bank.
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
/**
* @brief Deinitializes the FSMC PCCARD Bank registers to their default reset values.
* @brief De-initializes the FSMC PCCARD Bank registers to their default reset values.
* @param None
* @retval None
*/
@ -723,8 +730,8 @@ void FSMC_PCCARDCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
===============================================================================
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -979,4 +986,4 @@ void FSMC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t FSMC_Bank, uint32_t FSMC_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

191
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_gpio.c
View File

@ -2,76 +2,81 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_gpio.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the GPIO peripheral:
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - GPIO Read and Write
* - GPIO Alternate functions configuration
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + GPIO Read and Write
* + GPIO Alternate functions configuration
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable the GPIO AHB clock using the following function
* RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
*
* 2. Configure the GPIO pin(s) using GPIO_Init()
* Four possible configuration are available for each pin:
* - Input: Floating, Pull-up, Pull-down.
* - Output: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull)
* Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull).
* In output mode, the speed is configurable: 2 MHz, 25 MHz,
* 50 MHz or 100 MHz.
* - Alternate Function: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull)
* Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull).
* - Analog: required mode when a pin is to be used as ADC channel
* or DAC output.
*
* 3- Peripherals alternate function:
* - For ADC and DAC, configure the desired pin in analog mode using
* GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AN;
* - For other peripherals (TIM, USART...):
* - Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
* Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
* - Configure the desired pin in alternate function mode using
* GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
* - Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
* GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
* - Call GPIO_Init() function
*
* 4. To get the level of a pin configured in input mode use GPIO_ReadInputDataBit()
*
* 5. To set/reset the level of a pin configured in output mode use
* GPIO_SetBits()/GPIO_ResetBits()
*
* 6. During and just after reset, the alternate functions are not
* active and the GPIO pins are configured in input floating mode
* (except JTAG pins).
*
* 7. The LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT can be used as
* general-purpose (PC14 and PC15, respectively) when the LSE
* oscillator is off. The LSE has priority over the GPIO function.
*
* 8. The HSE oscillator pins OSC_IN/OSC_OUT can be used as
* general-purpose PH0 and PH1, respectively, when the HSE
* oscillator is off. The HSE has priority over the GPIO function.
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable the GPIO AHB clock using the following function
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOx, ENABLE);
(#) Configure the GPIO pin(s) using GPIO_Init()
Four possible configuration are available for each pin:
(++) Input: Floating, Pull-up, Pull-down.
(++) Output: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull)
Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull). In output mode, the speed
is configurable: 2 MHz, 25 MHz, 50 MHz or 100 MHz.
(++) Alternate Function: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull) Open
Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull).
(++) Analog: required mode when a pin is to be used as ADC channel or DAC
output.
(#) Peripherals alternate function:
(++) For ADC and DAC, configure the desired pin in analog mode using
GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AN;
(+++) For other peripherals (TIM, USART...):
(+++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
(+++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function mode using
GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
(+++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
(+++) Call GPIO_Init() function
(#) To get the level of a pin configured in input mode use GPIO_ReadInputDataBit()
(#) To set/reset the level of a pin configured in output mode use
GPIO_SetBits()/GPIO_ResetBits()
(#) During and just after reset, the alternate functions are not
active and the GPIO pins are configured in input floating mode (except JTAG
pins).
(#) The LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT can be used as general purpose
(PC14 and PC15, respectively) when the LSE oscillator is off. The LSE has
priority over the GPIO function.
(#) The HSE oscillator pins OSC_IN/OSC_OUT can be used as
general purpose PH0 and PH1, respectively, when the HSE oscillator is off.
The HSE has priority over the GPIO function.
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -104,7 +109,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration
##### Initialization and Configuration #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -112,9 +117,10 @@
*/
/**
* @brief Deinitializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default reset values.
* @brief De-initializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default reset values.
* @note By default, The GPIO pins are configured in input floating mode (except JTAG pins).
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @retval None
*/
void GPIO_DeInit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
@ -174,7 +180,8 @@ void GPIO_DeInit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
/**
* @brief Initializes the GPIOx peripheral according to the specified parameters in the GPIO_InitStruct.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param GPIO_InitStruct: pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure that contains
* the configuration information for the specified GPIO peripheral.
* @retval None
@ -189,7 +196,7 @@ void GPIO_Init(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, const GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct)
assert_param(IS_GPIO_MODE(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode));
assert_param(IS_GPIO_PUPD(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd));
/* -------------------------Configure the port pins---------------- */
/* ------------------------- Configure the port pins ---------------- */
/*-- GPIO Mode Configuration --*/
for (pinpos = 0x00; pinpos < 0x10; pinpos++)
{
@ -247,7 +254,8 @@ void GPIO_StructInit(GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct)
* GPIOx_PUPDR, GPIOx_AFRL and GPIOx_AFRH.
* @note The configuration of the locked GPIO pins can no longer be modified
* until the next reset.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be locked.
* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
* @retval None
@ -282,7 +290,7 @@ void GPIO_PinLockConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
GPIO Read and Write
##### GPIO Read and Write #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -291,7 +299,8 @@ void GPIO_PinLockConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
/**
* @brief Reads the specified input port pin.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read.
* This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
* @retval The input port pin value.
@ -317,7 +326,8 @@ uint8_t GPIO_ReadInputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
/**
* @brief Reads the specified GPIO input data port.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @retval GPIO input data port value.
*/
uint16_t GPIO_ReadInputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
@ -330,7 +340,8 @@ uint16_t GPIO_ReadInputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
/**
* @brief Reads the specified output data port bit.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read.
* This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
* @retval The output port pin value.
@ -343,7 +354,7 @@ uint8_t GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
if ((GPIOx->ODR & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)Bit_RESET)
if (((GPIOx->ODR) & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)Bit_RESET)
{
bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_SET;
}
@ -356,7 +367,8 @@ uint8_t GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
/**
* @brief Reads the specified GPIO output data port.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @retval GPIO output data port value.
*/
uint16_t GPIO_ReadOutputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
@ -372,7 +384,8 @@ uint16_t GPIO_ReadOutputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
* @note This functions uses GPIOx_BSRR register to allow atomic read/modify
* accesses. In this way, there is no risk of an IRQ occurring between
* the read and the modify access.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written.
* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
* @retval None
@ -391,7 +404,8 @@ void GPIO_SetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
* @note This functions uses GPIOx_BSRR register to allow atomic read/modify
* accesses. In this way, there is no risk of an IRQ occurring between
* the read and the modify access.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written.
* This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
* @retval None
@ -407,7 +421,8 @@ void GPIO_ResetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
/**
* @brief Sets or clears the selected data port bit.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written.
* This parameter can be one of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
* @param BitVal: specifies the value to be written to the selected bit.
@ -435,7 +450,8 @@ void GPIO_WriteBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin, BitAction BitVal)
/**
* @brief Writes data to the specified GPIO data port.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param PortVal: specifies the value to be written to the port output data register.
* @retval None
*/
@ -449,7 +465,8 @@ void GPIO_Write(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t PortVal)
/**
* @brief Toggles the specified GPIO pins..
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param GPIO_Pin: Specifies the pins to be toggled.
* @retval None
*/
@ -470,7 +487,7 @@ void GPIO_ToggleBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
GPIO Alternate functions configuration function
##### GPIO Alternate functions configuration function #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -479,7 +496,8 @@ void GPIO_ToggleBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
/**
* @brief Changes the mapping of the specified pin.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral.
* @param GPIOx: where x can be (A..I) to select the GPIO peripheral for
* STM32F40xx/41xx and STM32F427x/437x devices.
* @param GPIO_PinSource: specifies the pin for the Alternate function.
* This parameter can be GPIO_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15).
* @param GPIO_AFSelection: selects the pin to used as Alternate function.
@ -503,6 +521,9 @@ void GPIO_ToggleBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
* @arg GPIO_AF_I2C3: Connect I2C3 pins to AF4
* @arg GPIO_AF_SPI1: Connect SPI1 pins to AF5
* @arg GPIO_AF_SPI2: Connect SPI2/I2S2 pins to AF5
* @arg GPIO_AF_SPI4: Connect SPI4 pins to AF5
* @arg GPIO_AF_SPI5: Connect SPI5 pins to AF5
* @arg GPIO_AF_SPI6: Connect SPI6 pins to AF5
* @arg GPIO_AF_SPI3: Connect SPI3/I2S3 pins to AF6
* @arg GPIO_AF_I2S3ext: Connect I2S3ext pins to AF7
* @arg GPIO_AF_USART1: Connect USART1 pins to AF7
@ -511,6 +532,8 @@ void GPIO_ToggleBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
* @arg GPIO_AF_UART4: Connect UART4 pins to AF8
* @arg GPIO_AF_UART5: Connect UART5 pins to AF8
* @arg GPIO_AF_USART6: Connect USART6 pins to AF8
* @arg GPIO_AF_UART7: Connect UART7 pins to AF8
* @arg GPIO_AF_UART8: Connect UART8 pins to AF8
* @arg GPIO_AF_CAN1: Connect CAN1 pins to AF9
* @arg GPIO_AF_CAN2: Connect CAN2 pins to AF9
* @arg GPIO_AF_TIM12: Connect TIM12 pins to AF9
@ -519,10 +542,10 @@ void GPIO_ToggleBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
* @arg GPIO_AF_OTG_FS: Connect OTG_FS pins to AF10
* @arg GPIO_AF_OTG_HS: Connect OTG_HS pins to AF10
* @arg GPIO_AF_ETH: Connect ETHERNET pins to AF11
* @arg GPIO_AF_FSMC: Connect FSMC pins to AF12
* @arg GPIO_AF_FSMC: Connect FSMC pins to AF12
* @arg GPIO_AF_OTG_HS_FS: Connect OTG HS (configured in FS) pins to AF12
* @arg GPIO_AF_SDIO: Connect SDIO pins to AF12
* @arg GPIO_AF_DCMI: Connect DCMI pins to AF13
* @arg GPIO_AF_DCMI: Connect DCMI pins to AF13
* @arg GPIO_AF_EVENTOUT: Connect EVENTOUT pins to AF15
* @retval None
*/
@ -558,4 +581,4 @@ void GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_PinSource, uint8_t GPIO
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

406
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_hash.c
View File

@ -2,8 +2,8 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_hash.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the HASH / HMAC Processor (HASH) peripheral:
* - Initialization and Configuration functions
@ -12,110 +12,110 @@
* - DMA interface function
* - Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* HASH operation :
* ----------------
* 1. Enable the HASH controller clock using
* RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_HASH, ENABLE) function.
*
* 2. Initialise the HASH using HASH_Init() function.
*
* 3 . Reset the HASH processor core, so that the HASH will be ready
* to compute he message digest of a new message by using
* HASH_Reset() function.
*
* 4. Enable the HASH controller using the HASH_Cmd() function.
*
* 5. if using DMA for Data input transfer, Activate the DMA Request
* using HASH_DMACmd() function
*
* 6. if DMA is not used for data transfer, use HASH_DataIn() function
* to enter data to IN FIFO.
*
*
* 7. Configure the Number of valid bits in last word of the message
* using HASH_SetLastWordValidBitsNbr() function.
*
* 8. if the message length is not an exact multiple of 512 bits,
* then the function HASH_StartDigest() must be called to
* launch the computation of the final digest.
*
* 9. Once computed, the digest can be read using HASH_GetDigest()
* function.
*
* 10. To control HASH events you can use one of the following
* two methods:
* a- Check on HASH flags using the HASH_GetFlagStatus() function.
* b- Use HASH interrupts through the function HASH_ITConfig() at
* initialization phase and HASH_GetITStatus() function into
* interrupt routines in hashing phase.
* After checking on a flag you should clear it using HASH_ClearFlag()
* function. And after checking on an interrupt event you should
* clear it using HASH_ClearITPendingBit() function.
*
* 11. Save and restore hash processor context using
* HASH_SaveContext() and HASH_RestoreContext() functions.
*
*
*
* HMAC operation :
* ----------------
* The HMAC algorithm is used for message authentication, by
* irreversibly binding the message being processed to a key chosen
* by the user.
* For HMAC specifications, refer to "HMAC: keyed-hashing for message
* authentication, H. Krawczyk, M. Bellare, R. Canetti, February 1997"
*
* Basically, the HMAC algorithm consists of two nested hash operations:
* HMAC(message) = Hash[((key | pad) XOR 0x5C) | Hash(((key | pad) XOR 0x36) | message)]
* where:
* - "pad" is a sequence of zeroes needed to extend the key to the
* length of the underlying hash function data block (that is
* 512 bits for both the SHA-1 and MD5 hash algorithms)
* - "|" represents the concatenation operator
*
*
* To compute the HMAC, four different phases are required:
*
* 1. Initialise the HASH using HASH_Init() function to do HMAC
* operation.
*
* 2. The key (to be used for the inner hash function) is then given
* to the core. This operation follows the same mechanism as the
* one used to send the message in the hash operation (that is,
* by HASH_DataIn() function and, finally,
* HASH_StartDigest() function.
*
* 3. Once the last word has been entered and computation has started,
* the hash processor elaborates the key. It is then ready to
* accept the message text using the same mechanism as the one
* used to send the message in the hash operation.
*
* 4. After the first hash round, the hash processor returns "ready"
* to indicate that it is ready to receive the key to be used for
* the outer hash function (normally, this key is the same as the
* one used for the inner hash function). When the last word of
* the key is entered and computation starts, the HMAC result is
* made available using HASH_GetDigest() function.
*
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
*** HASH operation : ***
========================
[..]
(#) Enable the HASH controller clock using
RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_HASH, ENABLE) function.
(#) Initialise the HASH using HASH_Init() function.
(#) Reset the HASH processor core, so that the HASH will be ready
to compute he message digest of a new message by using HASH_Reset() function.
(#) Enable the HASH controller using the HASH_Cmd() function.
(#) if using DMA for Data input transfer, Activate the DMA Request
using HASH_DMACmd() function
(#) if DMA is not used for data transfer, use HASH_DataIn() function
to enter data to IN FIFO.
(#) Configure the Number of valid bits in last word of the message
using HASH_SetLastWordValidBitsNbr() function.
(#) if the message length is not an exact multiple of 512 bits,
then the function HASH_StartDigest() must be called to launch the computation
of the final digest.
(#) Once computed, the digest can be read using HASH_GetDigest() function.
(#) To control HASH events you can use one of the following wo methods:
(++) Check on HASH flags using the HASH_GetFlagStatus() function.
(++) Use HASH interrupts through the function HASH_ITConfig() at
initialization phase and HASH_GetITStatus() function into
interrupt routines in hashing phase.
After checking on a flag you should clear it using HASH_ClearFlag()
function. And after checking on an interrupt event you should
clear it using HASH_ClearITPendingBit() function.
(#) Save and restore hash processor context using
HASH_SaveContext() and HASH_RestoreContext() functions.
*** HMAC operation : ***
========================
[..] The HMAC algorithm is used for message authentication, by
irreversibly binding the message being processed to a key chosen
by the user.
For HMAC specifications, refer to "HMAC: keyed-hashing for message
authentication, H. Krawczyk, M. Bellare, R. Canetti, February 1997"
[..] Basically, the HMAC algorithm consists of two nested hash operations:
HMAC(message) = Hash[((key | pad) XOR 0x5C) | Hash(((key | pad) XOR 0x36) | message)]
where:
(+) "pad" is a sequence of zeroes needed to extend the key to the
length of the underlying hash function data block (that is
512 bits for both the SHA-1 and MD5 hash algorithms)
(+) "|" represents the concatenation operator
[..]To compute the HMAC, four different phases are required:
(#) Initialise the HASH using HASH_Init() function to do HMAC
operation.
(#) The key (to be used for the inner hash function) is then given to the core.
This operation follows the same mechanism as the one used to send the
message in the hash operation (that is, by HASH_DataIn() function and,
finally, HASH_StartDigest() function.
(#) Once the last word has been entered and computation has started,
the hash processor elaborates the key. It is then ready to accept the message
text using the same mechanism as the one used to send the message in the
hash operation.
(#) After the first hash round, the hash processor returns "ready" to indicate
that it is ready to receive the key to be used for the outer hash function
(normally, this key is the same as the one used for the inner hash function).
When the last word of the key is entered and computation starts, the HMAC
result is made available using HASH_GetDigest() function.
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -148,23 +148,23 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to
- Initialize the HASH peripheral
- Configure the HASH Processor
- MD5/SHA1,
- HASH/HMAC,
- datatype
- HMAC Key (if mode = HMAC)
- Reset the HASH Processor
[..] This section provides functions allowing to
(+) Initialize the HASH peripheral
(+) Configure the HASH Processor
(+) MD5/SHA1,
(+) HASH/HMAC,
(+) datatype
(+) HMAC Key (if mode = HMAC)
(+) Reset the HASH Processor
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
/**
* @brief Deinitializes the HASH peripheral registers to their default reset values
* @brief De-initializes the HASH peripheral registers to their default reset values
* @param None
* @retval None
*/
@ -260,14 +260,14 @@ void HASH_Reset(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Message Digest generation functions
##### Message Digest generation functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing the generation of message digest:
- Push data in the IN FIFO : using HASH_DataIn()
- Get the number of words set in IN FIFO, use HASH_GetInFIFOWordsNbr()
- set the last word valid bits number using HASH_SetLastWordValidBitsNbr()
- start digest calculation : using HASH_StartDigest()
- Get the Digest message : using HASH_GetDigest()
[..] This section provides functions allowing the generation of message digest:
(+) Push data in the IN FIFO : using HASH_DataIn()
(+) Get the number of words set in IN FIFO, use HASH_GetInFIFOWordsNbr()
(+) set the last word valid bits number using HASH_SetLastWordValidBitsNbr()
(+) start digest calculation : using HASH_StartDigest()
(+) Get the Digest message : using HASH_GetDigest()
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -322,7 +322,11 @@ uint8_t HASH_GetInFIFOWordsNbr(void)
/**
* @brief Provides the message digest result.
* @note In MD5 mode, Data[4] filed of HASH_MsgDigest structure is not used
* @note In MD5 mode, Data[7] to Data[4] filed of HASH_MsgDigest structure is not used
* and is read as zero.
* In SHA-1 mode, Data[7] to Data[5] filed of HASH_MsgDigest structure is not used
* and is read as zero.
* In SHA-224 mode, Data[7] filed of HASH_MsgDigest structure is not used
* and is read as zero.
* @param HASH_MessageDigest: pointer to a HASH_MsgDigest structure which will
* hold the message digest result
@ -336,6 +340,9 @@ void HASH_GetDigest(HASH_MsgDigest* HASH_MessageDigest)
HASH_MessageDigest->Data[2] = HASH->HR[2];
HASH_MessageDigest->Data[3] = HASH->HR[3];
HASH_MessageDigest->Data[4] = HASH->HR[4];
HASH_MessageDigest->Data[5] = HASH_DIGEST->HR[5];
HASH_MessageDigest->Data[6] = HASH_DIGEST->HR[6];
HASH_MessageDigest->Data[7] = HASH_DIGEST->HR[7];
}
/**
@ -357,19 +364,19 @@ void HASH_StartDigest(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Context swapping functions
##### Context swapping functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to save and store HASH Context
[..] This section provides functions allowing to save and store HASH Context
It is possible to interrupt a HASH/HMAC process to perform another processing
with a higher priority, and to complete the interrupted process later on, when
the higher priority task is complete. To do so, the context of the interrupted
task must be saved from the HASH registers to memory, and then be restored
from memory to the HASH registers.
[..] It is possible to interrupt a HASH/HMAC process to perform another processing
with a higher priority, and to complete the interrupted process later on, when
the higher priority task is complete. To do so, the context of the interrupted
task must be saved from the HASH registers to memory, and then be restored
from memory to the HASH registers.
1. To save the current context, use HASH_SaveContext() function
2. To restore the saved context, use HASH_RestoreContext() function
(#) To save the current context, use HASH_SaveContext() function
(#) To restore the saved context, use HASH_RestoreContext() function
@endverbatim
@ -394,7 +401,7 @@ void HASH_SaveContext(HASH_Context* HASH_ContextSave)
HASH_ContextSave->HASH_IMR = HASH->IMR;
HASH_ContextSave->HASH_STR = HASH->STR;
HASH_ContextSave->HASH_CR = HASH->CR;
for(i=0; i<=50;i++)
for(i=0; i<=53;i++)
{
HASH_ContextSave->HASH_CSR[i] = HASH->CSR[i];
}
@ -421,7 +428,7 @@ void HASH_RestoreContext(HASH_Context* HASH_ContextRestore)
HASH->CR |= HASH_CR_INIT;
/* continue restoring context registers */
for(i=0; i<=50;i++)
for(i=0; i<=53;i++)
{
HASH->CSR[i] = HASH_ContextRestore->HASH_CSR[i];
}
@ -435,20 +442,42 @@ void HASH_RestoreContext(HASH_Context* HASH_ContextRestore)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
HASH's DMA interface Configuration function
##### HASH's DMA interface Configuration function #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the DMA interface for
HASH/ HMAC data input transfer.
[..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the DMA interface for
HASH/ HMAC data input transfer.
When the DMA mode is enabled (using the HASH_DMACmd() function), data can be
sent to the IN FIFO using the DMA peripheral.
[..] When the DMA mode is enabled (using the HASH_DMACmd() function), data can be
sent to the IN FIFO using the DMA peripheral.
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
/**
* @brief Enables or disables auto-start message padding and
* calculation of the final message digest at the end of DMA transfer.
* @param NewState: new state of the selected HASH DMA transfer request.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
*/
void HASH_AutoStartDigest(FunctionalState NewState)
{
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
if (NewState != DISABLE)
{
/* Enable the auto start of the final message digest at the end of DMA transfer */
HASH->CR &= ~HASH_CR_MDMAT;
}
else
{
/* Disable the auto start of the final message digest at the end of DMA transfer */
HASH->CR |= HASH_CR_MDMAT;
}
}
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the HASH DMA interface.
@ -482,61 +511,58 @@ void HASH_DMACmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the HASH Interrupts and
to get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
[..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the HASH Interrupts and
to get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
The HASH provides 2 Interrupts sources and 5 Flags:
[..] The HASH provides 2 Interrupts sources and 5 Flags:
Flags :
----------
1. HASH_FLAG_DINIS : set when 16 locations are free in the Data IN FIFO
which means that a new block (512 bit) can be entered
into the input buffer.
*** Flags : ***
===============
[..]
(#) HASH_FLAG_DINIS : set when 16 locations are free in the Data IN FIFO
which means that a new block (512 bit) can be entered into the input buffer.
2. HASH_FLAG_DCIS : set when Digest calculation is complete
(#) HASH_FLAG_DCIS : set when Digest calculation is complete
3. HASH_FLAG_DMAS : set when HASH's DMA interface is enabled (DMAE=1) or
a transfer is ongoing.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(#) HASH_FLAG_DMAS : set when HASH's DMA interface is enabled (DMAE=1) or
a transfer is ongoing. This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
4. HASH_FLAG_BUSY : set when The hash core is processing a block of data
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(#) HASH_FLAG_BUSY : set when The hash core is processing a block of data
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
5. HASH_FLAG_DINNE : set when Data IN FIFO is not empty which means that
the Data IN FIFO contains at least one word of data.
This Flag is cleared only by hardware.
(#) HASH_FLAG_DINNE : set when Data IN FIFO is not empty which means that
the Data IN FIFO contains at least one word of data. This Flag is cleared
only by hardware.
Interrupts :
------------
1. HASH_IT_DINI : if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when 16
locations are free in the Data IN FIFO which means that
a new block (512 bit) can be entered into the input buffer.
This interrupt source is cleared using
HASH_ClearITPendingBit(HASH_IT_DINI) function.
*** Interrupts : ***
====================
[..]
(#) HASH_IT_DINI : if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when 16
locations are free in the Data IN FIFO which means that a new block (512 bit)
can be entered into the input buffer. This interrupt source is cleared using
HASH_ClearITPendingBit(HASH_IT_DINI) function.
2. HASH_IT_DCI : if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when Digest
calculation is complete.
This interrupt source is cleared using
HASH_ClearITPendingBit(HASH_IT_DCI) function.
(#) HASH_IT_DCI : if enabled, this interrupt source is pending when Digest
calculation is complete. This interrupt source is cleared using
HASH_ClearITPendingBit(HASH_IT_DCI) function.
Managing the HASH controller events :
------------------------------------
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the HASH controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
*** Managing the HASH controller events : ***
=============================================
[..] The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the HASH controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
1. In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- HASH_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
- HASH_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events.
(#) In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(++) HASH_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
(++) HASH_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events.
2. In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- HASH_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
- HASH_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
- HASH_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit
(corresponding Flag).
(#) In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(++) HASH_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
(++) HASH_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
(++) HASH_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit
(corresponding Flag).
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -552,7 +578,7 @@ void HASH_DMACmd(FunctionalState NewState)
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
*/
void HASH_ITConfig(uint8_t HASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
void HASH_ITConfig(uint32_t HASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
{
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_HASH_IT(HASH_IT));
@ -566,7 +592,7 @@ void HASH_ITConfig(uint8_t HASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
else
{
/* Disable the selected HASH interrupt */
HASH->IMR &= (uint8_t) ~HASH_IT;
HASH->IMR &= (uint32_t)(~HASH_IT);
}
}
@ -581,7 +607,7 @@ void HASH_ITConfig(uint8_t HASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
* @arg HASH_FLAG_DINNE: Data Input register (DIN) not empty status flag
* @retval The new state of HASH_FLAG (SET or RESET)
*/
FlagStatus HASH_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t HASH_FLAG)
FlagStatus HASH_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t HASH_FLAG)
{
FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
uint32_t tempreg = 0;
@ -590,7 +616,7 @@ FlagStatus HASH_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t HASH_FLAG)
assert_param(IS_HASH_GET_FLAG(HASH_FLAG));
/* check if the FLAG is in CR register */
if ((HASH_FLAG & HASH_FLAG_DINNE) != (uint16_t)RESET )
if ((HASH_FLAG & HASH_FLAG_DINNE) != (uint32_t)RESET )
{
tempreg = HASH->CR;
}
@ -600,7 +626,7 @@ FlagStatus HASH_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t HASH_FLAG)
}
/* Check the status of the specified HASH flag */
if ((tempreg & HASH_FLAG) != (uint16_t)RESET)
if ((tempreg & HASH_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET)
{
/* HASH is set */
bitstatus = SET;
@ -622,7 +648,7 @@ FlagStatus HASH_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t HASH_FLAG)
* @arg HASH_FLAG_DCIS: Digest Calculation Completion Flag
* @retval None
*/
void HASH_ClearFlag(uint16_t HASH_FLAG)
void HASH_ClearFlag(uint32_t HASH_FLAG)
{
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_HASH_CLEAR_FLAG(HASH_FLAG));
@ -638,7 +664,7 @@ void HASH_ClearFlag(uint16_t HASH_FLAG)
* @arg HASH_IT_DCI: Digest Calculation Completion Interrupt
* @retval The new state of HASH_IT (SET or RESET).
*/
ITStatus HASH_GetITStatus(uint8_t HASH_IT)
ITStatus HASH_GetITStatus(uint32_t HASH_IT)
{
ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
@ -672,13 +698,13 @@ ITStatus HASH_GetITStatus(uint8_t HASH_IT)
* @arg HASH_IT_DCI: Digest Calculation Completion Interrupt
* @retval None
*/
void HASH_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t HASH_IT)
void HASH_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t HASH_IT)
{
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_HASH_IT(HASH_IT));
/* Clear the selected HASH interrupt pending bit */
HASH->SR = (uint8_t)~HASH_IT;
HASH->SR = (uint32_t)(~HASH_IT);
}
/**
@ -697,4 +723,4 @@ void HASH_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t HASH_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

54
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_hash_md5.c
View File

@ -2,38 +2,44 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_hash_md5.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides high level functions to compute the HASH MD5 and
* HMAC MD5 Digest of an input message.
* It uses the stm32f4xx_hash.c/.h drivers to access the STM32F4xx HASH
* peripheral.
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable The HASH controller clock using
* RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_HASH, ENABLE); function.
*
* 2. Calculate the HASH MD5 Digest using HASH_MD5() function.
*
* 3. Calculate the HMAC MD5 Digest using HMAC_MD5() function.
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable The HASH controller clock using
RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_HASH, ENABLE); function.
(#) Calculate the HASH MD5 Digest using HASH_MD5() function.
(#) Calculate the HMAC MD5 Digest using HMAC_MD5() function.
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -67,7 +73,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
High Level MD5 Hash and HMAC functions
##### High Level MD5 Hash and HMAC functions #####
===============================================================================
@ -310,5 +316,5 @@ ErrorStatus HMAC_MD5(uint8_t *Key, uint32_t Keylen, uint8_t *Input,
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

54
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_hash_sha1.c
View File

@ -2,38 +2,44 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_hash_sha1.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides high level functions to compute the HASH SHA1 and
* HMAC SHA1 Digest of an input message.
* It uses the stm32f4xx_hash.c/.h drivers to access the STM32F4xx HASH
* peripheral.
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable The HASH controller clock using
* RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_HASH, ENABLE); function.
*
* 2. Calculate the HASH SHA1 Digest using HASH_SHA1() function.
*
* 3. Calculate the HMAC SHA1 Digest using HMAC_SHA1() function.
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable The HASH controller clock using
RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_HASH, ENABLE); function.
(#) Calculate the HASH SHA1 Digest using HASH_SHA1() function.
(#) Calculate the HMAC SHA1 Digest using HMAC_SHA1() function.
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -67,7 +73,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
High Level SHA1 Hash and HMAC functions
##### High Level SHA1 Hash and HMAC functions #####
===============================================================================
@ -314,4 +320,4 @@ ErrorStatus HMAC_SHA1(uint8_t *Key, uint32_t Keylen, uint8_t *Input,
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

303
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_i2c.c
View File

@ -2,84 +2,89 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_i2c.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Inter-integrated circuit (I2C)
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - Data transfers
* - PEC management
* - DMA transfers management
* - Interrupts, events and flags management
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + Data transfers
* + PEC management
* + DMA transfers management
* + Interrupts, events and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2Cx, ENABLE)
* function for I2C1, I2C2 or I2C3.
*
* 2. Enable SDA, SCL and SMBA (when used) GPIO clocks using
* RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function.
*
* 3. Peripherals alternate function:
* - Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
* Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
* - Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
* GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
* - Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
* GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
* - Call GPIO_Init() function
* Recommended configuration is Push-Pull, Pull-up, Open-Drain.
* Add an external pull up if necessary (typically 4.7 KOhm).
*
* 4. Program the Mode, duty cycle , Own address, Ack, Speed and Acknowledged
* Address using the I2C_Init() function.
*
* 5. Optionally you can enable/configure the following parameters without
* re-initialization (i.e there is no need to call again I2C_Init() function):
* - Enable the acknowledge feature using I2C_AcknowledgeConfig() function
* - Enable the dual addressing mode using I2C_DualAddressCmd() function
* - Enable the general call using the I2C_GeneralCallCmd() function
* - Enable the clock stretching using I2C_StretchClockCmd() function
* - Enable the fast mode duty cycle using the I2C_FastModeDutyCycleConfig()
* function.
* - Configure the NACK position for Master Receiver mode in case of
* 2 bytes reception using the function I2C_NACKPositionConfig().
* - Enable the PEC Calculation using I2C_CalculatePEC() function
* - For SMBus Mode:
* - Enable the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) using I2C_ARPCmd() function
* - Configure the SMBusAlert pin using I2C_SMBusAlertConfig() function
*
* 6. Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
* I2C_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
*
* 7. When using the DMA mode
* - Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function
* - Active the needed channel Request using I2C_DMACmd() or
* I2C_DMALastTransferCmd() function.
* @note When using DMA mode, I2C interrupts may be used at the same time to
* control the communication flow (Start/Stop/Ack... events and errors).
*
* 8. Enable the I2C using the I2C_Cmd() function.
*
* 9. Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode in the
* transfers.
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2Cx, ENABLE)
function for I2C1, I2C2 or I2C3.
(#) Enable SDA, SCL and SMBA (when used) GPIO clocks using
RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function.
(#) Peripherals alternate function:
(++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
(++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
(++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
(++) Call GPIO_Init() function
Recommended configuration is Push-Pull, Pull-up, Open-Drain.
Add an external pull up if necessary (typically 4.7 KOhm).
(#) Program the Mode, duty cycle , Own address, Ack, Speed and Acknowledged
Address using the I2C_Init() function.
(#) Optionally you can enable/configure the following parameters without
re-initialization (i.e there is no need to call again I2C_Init() function):
(++) Enable the acknowledge feature using I2C_AcknowledgeConfig() function
(++) Enable the dual addressing mode using I2C_DualAddressCmd() function
(++) Enable the general call using the I2C_GeneralCallCmd() function
(++) Enable the clock stretching using I2C_StretchClockCmd() function
(++) Enable the fast mode duty cycle using the I2C_FastModeDutyCycleConfig()
function.
(++) Configure the NACK position for Master Receiver mode in case of
2 bytes reception using the function I2C_NACKPositionConfig().
(++) Enable the PEC Calculation using I2C_CalculatePEC() function
(++) For SMBus Mode:
(+++) Enable the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) using I2C_ARPCmd() function
(+++) Configure the SMBusAlert pin using I2C_SMBusAlertConfig() function
(#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
I2C_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
(#) When using the DMA mode
(++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function
(++) Active the needed channel Request using I2C_DMACmd() or
I2C_DMALastTransferCmd() function.
-@@- When using DMA mode, I2C interrupts may be used at the same time to
control the communication flow (Start/Stop/Ack... events and errors).
(#) Enable the I2C using the I2C_Cmd() function.
(#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode in the
transfers.
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -117,7 +122,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -322,6 +327,62 @@ void I2C_Cmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
}
}
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the Analog filter of I2C peripheral.
* @param I2Cx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the I2C peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the Analog filter.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @note This function should be called before initializing and enabling
the I2C Peripheral.
* @retval None
*/
void I2C_AnalogFilterCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
{
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
if (NewState != DISABLE)
{
/* Enable the analog filter */
I2Cx->FLTR &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_FLTR_ANOFF);
}
else
{
/* Disable the analog filter */
I2Cx->FLTR |= I2C_FLTR_ANOFF;
}
}
/**
* @brief Configures the Digital noise filter of I2C peripheral.
* @param I2Cx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the I2C peripheral.
* @param I2C_DigitalFilter: Coefficient of digital noise filter.
* This parameter can be a number between 0x00 and 0x0F.
* @note This function should be called before initializing and enabling
the I2C Peripheral.
* @retval None
*/
void I2C_DigitalFilterConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t I2C_DigitalFilter)
{
uint16_t tmpreg = 0;
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
assert_param(IS_I2C_DIGITAL_FILTER(I2C_DigitalFilter));
/* Get the old register value */
tmpreg = I2Cx->FLTR;
/* Reset I2Cx DNF bit [3:0] */
tmpreg &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)I2C_FLTR_DNF);
/* Set I2Cx DNF coefficient */
tmpreg |= (uint16_t)((uint16_t)I2C_DigitalFilter & I2C_FLTR_DNF);
/* Store the new register value */
I2Cx->FLTR = tmpreg;
}
/**
* @brief Generates I2Cx communication START condition.
* @param I2Cx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the I2C peripheral.
@ -673,7 +734,7 @@ void I2C_ARPCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Data transfers functions
##### Data transfers functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -716,7 +777,7 @@ uint8_t I2C_ReceiveData(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
PEC management functions
##### PEC management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -824,7 +885,7 @@ uint8_t I2C_GetPEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
DMA transfers management functions
##### DMA transfers management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the I2C DMA channels
requests.
@ -890,94 +951,94 @@ void I2C_DMALastTransferCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts, events and flags management functions
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the I2C Interrupts
sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status.
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode.
##### Interrupts, events and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
I2C State Monitoring Functions
===============================================================================
This I2C driver provides three different ways for I2C state monitoring
depending on the application requirements and constraints:
[..]
This section provides functions allowing to configure the I2C Interrupts
sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status.
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode.
##### I2C State Monitoring Functions #####
===============================================================================
[..]
This I2C driver provides three different ways for I2C state monitoring
depending on the application requirements and constraints:
1. Basic state monitoring (Using I2C_CheckEvent() function)
-----------------------------------------------------------
(#) Basic state monitoring (Using I2C_CheckEvent() function)
It compares the status registers (SR1 and SR2) content to a given event
(can be the combination of one or more flags).
It returns SUCCESS if the current status includes the given flags
and returns ERROR if one or more flags are missing in the current status.
- When to use
- This function is suitable for most applications as well as for startup
(++) When to use
(+++) This function is suitable for most applications as well as for startup
activity since the events are fully described in the product reference
manual (RM0090).
- It is also suitable for users who need to define their own events.
(+++) It is also suitable for users who need to define their own events.
- Limitations
- If an error occurs (ie. error flags are set besides to the monitored
(++) Limitations
If an error occurs (ie. error flags are set besides to the monitored
flags), the I2C_CheckEvent() function may return SUCCESS despite
the communication hold or corrupted real state.
In this case, it is advised to use error interrupts to monitor
the error events and handle them in the interrupt IRQ handler.
@note
For error management, it is advised to use the following functions:
- I2C_ITConfig() to configure and enable the error interrupts (I2C_IT_ERR).
- I2Cx_ER_IRQHandler() which is called when the error interrupt occurs.
Where x is the peripheral instance (I2C1, I2C2 ...)
- I2C_GetFlagStatus() or I2C_GetITStatus() to be called into the
I2Cx_ER_IRQHandler() function in order to determine which error occurred.
- I2C_ClearFlag() or I2C_ClearITPendingBit() and/or I2C_SoftwareResetCmd()
and/or I2C_GenerateStop() in order to clear the error flag and source
and return to correct communication status.
-@@- For error management, it is advised to use the following functions:
(+@@) I2C_ITConfig() to configure and enable the error interrupts (I2C_IT_ERR).
(+@@) I2Cx_ER_IRQHandler() which is called when the error interrupt occurs.
Where x is the peripheral instance (I2C1, I2C2 ...)
(+@@) I2C_GetFlagStatus() or I2C_GetITStatus() to be called into the
I2Cx_ER_IRQHandler() function in order to determine which error occurred.
(+@@) I2C_ClearFlag() or I2C_ClearITPendingBit() and/or I2C_SoftwareResetCmd()
and/or I2C_GenerateStop() in order to clear the error flag and source
and return to correct communication status.
2. Advanced state monitoring (Using the function I2C_GetLastEvent())
--------------------------------------------------------------------
(#) Advanced state monitoring (Using the function I2C_GetLastEvent())
Using the function I2C_GetLastEvent() which returns the image of both status
registers in a single word (uint32_t) (Status Register 2 value is shifted left
by 16 bits and concatenated to Status Register 1).
- When to use
- This function is suitable for the same applications above but it
(++) When to use
(+++) This function is suitable for the same applications above but it
allows to overcome the mentioned limitation of I2C_GetFlagStatus()
function.
- The returned value could be compared to events already defined in
(+++) The returned value could be compared to events already defined in
the library (stm32f4xx_i2c.h) or to custom values defined by user.
This function is suitable when multiple flags are monitored at the
same time.
- At the opposite of I2C_CheckEvent() function, this function allows
(+++) At the opposite of I2C_CheckEvent() function, this function allows
user to choose when an event is accepted (when all events flags are
set and no other flags are set or just when the needed flags are set
like I2C_CheckEvent() function.
- Limitations
- User may need to define his own events.
- Same remark concerning the error management is applicable for this
(++) Limitations
(+++) User may need to define his own events.
(+++) Same remark concerning the error management is applicable for this
function if user decides to check only regular communication flags
(and ignores error flags).
3. Flag-based state monitoring (Using the function I2C_GetFlagStatus())
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
(#) Flag-based state monitoring (Using the function I2C_GetFlagStatus())
Using the function I2C_GetFlagStatus() which simply returns the status of
one single flag (ie. I2C_FLAG_RXNE ...).
- When to use
- This function could be used for specific applications or in debug
(++) When to use
(+++) This function could be used for specific applications or in debug
phase.
- It is suitable when only one flag checking is needed (most I2C
(+++) It is suitable when only one flag checking is needed (most I2C
events are monitored through multiple flags).
- Limitations:
- When calling this function, the Status register is accessed.
(++) Limitations:
(+++) When calling this function, the Status register is accessed.
Some flags are cleared when the status register is accessed.
So checking the status of one Flag, may clear other ones.
- Function may need to be called twice or more in order to monitor
(+++) Function may need to be called twice or more in order to monitor
one single event.
For detailed description of Events, please refer to section I2C_Events in
@ -1392,4 +1453,4 @@ void I2C_ClearITPendingBit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

143
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_iwdg.c
View File

@ -2,79 +2,82 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_iwdg.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Independent watchdog (IWDG) peripheral:
* - Prescaler and Counter configuration
* - IWDG activation
* - Flag management
* + Prescaler and Counter configuration
* + IWDG activation
* + Flag management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* IWDG features
* ===================================================================
*
* The IWDG can be started by either software or hardware (configurable
* through option byte).
*
* The IWDG is clocked by its own dedicated low-speed clock (LSI) and
* thus stays active even if the main clock fails.
* Once the IWDG is started, the LSI is forced ON and cannot be disabled
* (LSI cannot be disabled too), and the counter starts counting down from
* the reset value of 0xFFF. When it reaches the end of count value (0x000)
* a system reset is generated.
* The IWDG counter should be reloaded at regular intervals to prevent
* an MCU reset.
*
* The IWDG is implemented in the VDD voltage domain that is still functional
* in STOP and STANDBY mode (IWDG reset can wake-up from STANDBY).
*
* IWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a IWDG
* reset occurs.
*
* Min-max timeout value @32KHz (LSI): ~125us / ~32.7s
* The IWDG timeout may vary due to LSI frequency dispersion. STM32F4xx
* devices provide the capability to measure the LSI frequency (LSI clock
* connected internally to TIM5 CH4 input capture). The measured value
* can be used to have an IWDG timeout with an acceptable accuracy.
* For more information, please refer to the STM32F4xx Reference manual
*
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers using
* IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable) function
*
* 2. Configure the IWDG prescaler using IWDG_SetPrescaler() function
*
* 3. Configure the IWDG counter value using IWDG_SetReload() function.
* This value will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter
* is reloaded, then the IWDG will start counting down from this value.
*
* 4. Start the IWDG using IWDG_Enable() function, when the IWDG is used
* in software mode (no need to enable the LSI, it will be enabled
* by hardware)
*
* 5. Then the application program must reload the IWDG counter at regular
* intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset, using
* IWDG_ReloadCounter() function.
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### IWDG features #####
===============================================================================
[..]
The IWDG can be started by either software or hardware (configurable
through option byte).
The IWDG is clocked by its own dedicated low-speed clock (LSI) and
thus stays active even if the main clock fails.
Once the IWDG is started, the LSI is forced ON and cannot be disabled
(LSI cannot be disabled too), and the counter starts counting down from
the reset value of 0xFFF. When it reaches the end of count value (0x000)
a system reset is generated.
The IWDG counter should be reloaded at regular intervals to prevent
an MCU reset.
The IWDG is implemented in the VDD voltage domain that is still functional
in STOP and STANDBY mode (IWDG reset can wake-up from STANDBY).
IWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a IWDG
reset occurs.
Min-max timeout value @32KHz (LSI): ~125us / ~32.7s
The IWDG timeout may vary due to LSI frequency dispersion. STM32F4xx
devices provide the capability to measure the LSI frequency (LSI clock
connected internally to TIM5 CH4 input capture). The measured value
can be used to have an IWDG timeout with an acceptable accuracy.
For more information, please refer to the STM32F4xx Reference manual
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers using
IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable) function
(#) Configure the IWDG prescaler using IWDG_SetPrescaler() function
(#) Configure the IWDG counter value using IWDG_SetReload() function.
This value will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter
is reloaded, then the IWDG will start counting down from this value.
(#) Start the IWDG using IWDG_Enable() function, when the IWDG is used
in software mode (no need to enable the LSI, it will be enabled
by hardware)
(#) Then the application program must reload the IWDG counter at regular
intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset, using
IWDG_ReloadCounter() function.
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -111,7 +114,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Prescaler and Counter configuration functions
##### Prescaler and Counter configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -186,7 +189,7 @@ void IWDG_ReloadCounter(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
IWDG activation function
##### IWDG activation function #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -212,7 +215,7 @@ void IWDG_Enable(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Flag management function
##### Flag management function #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -260,4 +263,4 @@ FlagStatus IWDG_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t IWDG_FLAG)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

376
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_pwr.c
View File

@ -2,29 +2,35 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_pwr.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Power Controller (PWR) peripheral:
* - Backup Domain Access
* - PVD configuration
* - WakeUp pin configuration
* - Main and Backup Regulators configuration
* - FLASH Power Down configuration
* - Low Power modes configuration
* - Flags management
* + Backup Domain Access
* + PVD configuration
* + WakeUp pin configuration
* + Main and Backup Regulators configuration
* + FLASH Power Down configuration
* + Low Power modes configuration
* + Flags management
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -82,6 +88,7 @@
/* CR register bit mask */
#define CR_DS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFC)
#define CR_PLS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF1F)
#define CR_VOS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFF3FFF)
/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
@ -97,16 +104,16 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Backup Domain Access function
##### Backup Domain Access function #####
===============================================================================
After reset, the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup data
registers and backup SRAM) is protected against possible unwanted
write accesses.
To enable access to the RTC Domain and RTC registers, proceed as follows:
- Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() function.
- Enable access to RTC domain using the PWR_BackupAccessCmd() function.
[..]
After reset, the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup data
registers and backup SRAM) is protected against possible unwanted
write accesses.
To enable access to the RTC Domain and RTC registers, proceed as follows:
(+) Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() function.
(+) Enable access to RTC domain using the PWR_BackupAccessCmd() function.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -149,15 +156,15 @@ void PWR_BackupAccessCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
PVD configuration functions
##### PVD configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
- The PVD is used to monitor the VDD power supply by comparing it to a threshold
selected by the PVD Level (PLS[2:0] bits in the PWR_CR).
- A PVDO flag is available to indicate if VDD/VDDA is higher or lower than the
PVD threshold. This event is internally connected to the EXTI line16
and can generate an interrupt if enabled through the EXTI registers.
- The PVD is stopped in Standby mode.
[..]
(+) The PVD is used to monitor the VDD power supply by comparing it to a
threshold selected by the PVD Level (PLS[2:0] bits in the PWR_CR).
(+) A PVDO flag is available to indicate if VDD/VDDA is higher or lower
than the PVD threshold. This event is internally connected to the EXTI
line16 and can generate an interrupt if enabled through the EXTI registers.
(+) The PVD is stopped in Standby mode.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -167,15 +174,17 @@ void PWR_BackupAccessCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
* @brief Configures the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
* @param PWR_PVDLevel: specifies the PVD detection level
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_0: PVD detection level set to 2.0V
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_1: PVD detection level set to 2.2V
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_2: PVD detection level set to 2.3V
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_3: PVD detection level set to 2.5V
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_4: PVD detection level set to 2.7V
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_5: PVD detection level set to 2.8V
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_6: PVD detection level set to 2.9V
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_7: PVD detection level set to 3.0V
* @note Refer to the electrical characteristics of you device datasheet for more details.
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_0
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_1
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_2
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_3
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_4
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_5
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_6
* @arg PWR_PVDLevel_7
* @note Refer to the electrical characteristics of your device datasheet for
* more details about the voltage threshold corresponding to each
* detection level.
* @retval None
*/
void PWR_PVDLevelConfig(uint32_t PWR_PVDLevel)
@ -220,12 +229,12 @@ void PWR_PVDCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
WakeUp pin configuration functions
##### WakeUp pin configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
- WakeUp pin is used to wakeup the system from Standby mode. This pin is
forced in input pull down configuration and is active on rising edges.
- There is only one WakeUp pin: WakeUp Pin 1 on PA.00.
[..]
(+) WakeUp pin is used to wakeup the system from Standby mode. This pin is
forced in input pull down configuration and is active on rising edges.
(+) There is only one WakeUp pin: WakeUp Pin 1 on PA.00.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -254,36 +263,39 @@ void PWR_WakeUpPinCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Main and Backup Regulators configuration functions
##### Main and Backup Regulators configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(+) The backup domain includes 4 Kbytes of backup SRAM accessible only from
the CPU, and address in 32-bit, 16-bit or 8-bit mode. Its content is
retained even in Standby or VBAT mode when the low power backup regulator
is enabled. It can be considered as an internal EEPROM when VBAT is
always present. You can use the PWR_BackupRegulatorCmd() function to
enable the low power backup regulator and use the PWR_GetFlagStatus
(PWR_FLAG_BRR) to check if it is ready or not.
- The backup domain includes 4 Kbytes of backup SRAM accessible only from the
CPU, and address in 32-bit, 16-bit or 8-bit mode. Its content is retained
even in Standby or VBAT mode when the low power backup regulator is enabled.
It can be considered as an internal EEPROM when VBAT is always present.
You can use the PWR_BackupRegulatorCmd() function to enable the low power
backup regulator and use the PWR_GetFlagStatus(PWR_FLAG_BRR) to check if it is
ready or not.
(+) When the backup domain is supplied by VDD (analog switch connected to VDD)
the backup SRAM is powered from VDD which replaces the VBAT power supply to
save battery life.
- When the backup domain is supplied by VDD (analog switch connected to VDD)
the backup SRAM is powered from VDD which replaces the VBAT power supply to
save battery life.
(+) The backup SRAM is not mass erased by an tamper event. It is read
protected to prevent confidential data, such as cryptographic private
key, from being accessed. The backup SRAM can be erased only through
the Flash interface when a protection level change from level 1 to
level 0 is requested.
-@- Refer to the description of Read protection (RDP) in the Flash
programming manual.
- The backup SRAM is not mass erased by an tamper event. It is read protected
to prevent confidential data, such as cryptographic private key, from being
accessed. The backup SRAM can be erased only through the Flash interface when
a protection level change from level 1 to level 0 is requested.
Refer to the description of Read protection (RDP) in the Flash programming manual.
- The main internal regulator can be configured to have a tradeoff between performance
and power consumption when the device does not operate at the maximum frequency.
This is done through PWR_MainRegulatorModeConfig() function which configure VOS bit
in PWR_CR register:
- When this bit is set (Regulator voltage output Scale 1 mode selected) the System
frequency can go up to 168 MHz.
- When this bit is reset (Regulator voltage output Scale 2 mode selected) the System
frequency can go up to 144 MHz.
Refer to the datasheets for more details.
(+) The main internal regulator can be configured to have a tradeoff between
performance and power consumption when the device does not operate at
the maximum frequency. This is done through PWR_MainRegulatorModeConfig()
function which configure VOS bit in PWR_CR register:
(++) When this bit is set (Regulator voltage output Scale 1 mode selected)
the System frequency can go up to 168 MHz.
(++) When this bit is reset (Regulator voltage output Scale 2 mode selected)
the System frequency can go up to 144 MHz.
Refer to the datasheets for more details.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -313,21 +325,27 @@ void PWR_BackupRegulatorCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
* System frequency up to 168 MHz.
* @arg PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale2: Regulator voltage output Scale 2 mode,
* System frequency up to 144 MHz.
* @arg PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale3: Regulator voltage output Scale 3 mode,
* System frequency up to 120 MHz
* @retval None
*/
void PWR_MainRegulatorModeConfig(uint32_t PWR_Regulator_Voltage)
{
uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR_VOLTAGE(PWR_Regulator_Voltage));
if (PWR_Regulator_Voltage == PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale2)
{
PWR->CR &= ~PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale1;
}
else
{
PWR->CR |= PWR_Regulator_Voltage_Scale1;
}
tmpreg = PWR->CR;
/* Clear VOS[15:14] bits */
tmpreg &= CR_VOS_MASK;
/* Set VOS[15:14] bits according to PWR_Regulator_Voltage value */
tmpreg |= PWR_Regulator_Voltage;
/* Store the new value */
PWR->CR = tmpreg;
}
/**
@ -339,14 +357,14 @@ void PWR_MainRegulatorModeConfig(uint32_t PWR_Regulator_Voltage)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
FLASH Power Down configuration functions
##### FLASH Power Down configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
- By setting the FPDS bit in the PWR_CR register by using the PWR_FlashPowerDownCmd()
function, the Flash memory also enters power down mode when the device enters
Stop mode. When the Flash memory is in power down mode, an additional startup
delay is incurred when waking up from Stop mode.
[..]
(+) By setting the FPDS bit in the PWR_CR register by using the
PWR_FlashPowerDownCmd() function, the Flash memory also enters power
down mode when the device enters Stop mode. When the Flash memory
is in power down mode, an additional startup delay is incurred when
waking up from Stop mode.
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -374,103 +392,107 @@ void PWR_FlashPowerDownCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Low Power modes configuration functions
##### Low Power modes configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
The devices feature 3 low-power modes:
- Sleep mode: Cortex-M4 core stopped, peripherals kept running.
- Stop mode: all clocks are stopped, regulator running, regulator in low power mode
- Standby mode: 1.2V domain powered off.
[..]
The devices feature 3 low-power modes:
(+) Sleep mode: Cortex-M4 core stopped, peripherals kept running.
(+) Stop mode: all clocks are stopped, regulator running, regulator
in low power mode
(+) Standby mode: 1.2V domain powered off.
Sleep mode
===========
- Entry:
- The Sleep mode is entered by using the __WFI() or __WFE() functions.
- Exit:
- Any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt
controller (NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep mode.
*** Sleep mode ***
==================
[..]
(+) Entry:
(++) The Sleep mode is entered by using the __WFI() or __WFE() functions.
(+) Exit:
(++) Any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt
controller (NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep mode.
Stop mode
==========
In Stop mode, all clocks in the 1.2V domain are stopped, the PLL, the HSI,
and the HSE RC oscillators are disabled. Internal SRAM and register contents
are preserved.
The voltage regulator can be configured either in normal or low-power mode.
To minimize the consumption In Stop mode, FLASH can be powered off before
entering the Stop mode. It can be switched on again by software after exiting
the Stop mode using the PWR_FlashPowerDownCmd() function.
*** Stop mode ***
=================
[..]
In Stop mode, all clocks in the 1.2V domain are stopped, the PLL, the HSI,
and the HSE RC oscillators are disabled. Internal SRAM and register contents
are preserved.
The voltage regulator can be configured either in normal or low-power mode.
To minimize the consumption In Stop mode, FLASH can be powered off before
entering the Stop mode. It can be switched on again by software after exiting
the Stop mode using the PWR_FlashPowerDownCmd() function.
- Entry:
- The Stop mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTOPMode(PWR_Regulator_LowPower,)
function with regulator in LowPower or with Regulator ON.
- Exit:
- Any EXTI Line (Internal or External) configured in Interrupt/Event mode.
(+) Entry:
(++) The Stop mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTOPMode(PWR_Regulator_LowPower,)
function with regulator in LowPower or with Regulator ON.
(+) Exit:
(++) Any EXTI Line (Internal or External) configured in Interrupt/Event mode.
Standby mode
============
The Standby mode allows to achieve the lowest power consumption. It is based
on the Cortex-M4 deepsleep mode, with the voltage regulator disabled.
The 1.2V domain is consequently powered off. The PLL, the HSI oscillator and
the HSE oscillator are also switched off. SRAM and register contents are lost
except for the RTC registers, RTC backup registers, backup SRAM and Standby
circuitry.
*** Standby mode ***
====================
[..]
The Standby mode allows to achieve the lowest power consumption. It is based
on the Cortex-M4 deepsleep mode, with the voltage regulator disabled.
The 1.2V domain is consequently powered off. The PLL, the HSI oscillator and
the HSE oscillator are also switched off. SRAM and register contents are lost
except for the RTC registers, RTC backup registers, backup SRAM and Standby
circuitry.
The voltage regulator is OFF.
The voltage regulator is OFF.
- Entry:
- The Standby mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode() function.
- Exit:
- WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup,
tamper event, time-stamp event, external reset in NRST pin, IWDG reset.
(+) Entry:
(++) The Standby mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode() function.
(+) Exit:
(++) WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup,
tamper event, time-stamp event, external reset in NRST pin, IWDG reset.
Auto-wakeup (AWU) from low-power mode
=====================================
The MCU can be woken up from low-power mode by an RTC Alarm event, an RTC
Wakeup event, a tamper event, a time-stamp event, or a comparator event,
without depending on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode).
*** Auto-wakeup (AWU) from low-power mode ***
=============================================
[..]
The MCU can be woken up from low-power mode by an RTC Alarm event, an RTC
Wakeup event, a tamper event, a time-stamp event, or a comparator event,
without depending on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode).
- RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode
----------------------------------------
- To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:
- Configure the EXTI Line 17 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt
or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.
- Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function
- Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm()
and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
- To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it
is necessary to:
- Configure the EXTI Line 21 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt
or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.
- Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig()
function
- Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the
RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd()
functions.
- To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC WakeUp event, it is necessary to:
- Configure the EXTI Line 22 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt
or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.
- Enable the RTC WakeUp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function
- Configure the RTC to generate the RTC WakeUp event using the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(),
RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and RTC_WakeUpCmd() functions.
(#) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode
(++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:
(+++) Configure the EXTI Line 17 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt
or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.
(+++) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function
(+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm()
and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
(++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it
is necessary to:
(+++) Configure the EXTI Line 21 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt
or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.
(+++) Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig()
function
(+++) Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the
RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd()
functions.
(++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC WakeUp event, it is necessary to:
(+++) Configure the EXTI Line 22 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt
or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.
(+++) Enable the RTC WakeUp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function
(+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC WakeUp event using the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(),
RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and RTC_WakeUpCmd() functions.
- RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Standby mode
-------------------------------------------
- To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:
- Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function
- Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm()
and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
- To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it
is necessary to:
- Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig()
function
- Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the
RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd()
functions.
- To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC WakeUp event, it is necessary to:
- Enable the RTC WakeUp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function
- Configure the RTC to generate the RTC WakeUp event using the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(),
RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and RTC_WakeUpCmd() functions.
(#) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Standby mode
(++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:
(+++) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function
(+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm()
and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
(++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it
is necessary to:
(+++) Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig()
function
(+++) Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the
RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd()
functions.
(++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC WakeUp event, it is necessary to:
(+++) Enable the RTC WakeUp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function
(+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC WakeUp event using the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(),
RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and RTC_WakeUpCmd() functions.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -573,7 +595,7 @@ void PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Flags management functions
##### Flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -653,4 +675,4 @@ void PWR_ClearFlag(uint32_t PWR_FLAG)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

312
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_rcc.c
View File

@ -2,53 +2,56 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_rcc.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Reset and clock control (RCC) peripheral:
* - Internal/external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration
* - System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration
* - Peripheral clocks configuration
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Internal/external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration
* + System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration
* + Peripheral clocks configuration
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* RCC specific features
* ===================================================================
*
* After reset the device is running from Internal High Speed oscillator
* (HSI 16MHz) with Flash 0 wait state, Flash prefetch buffer, D-Cache
* and I-Cache are disabled, and all peripherals are off except internal
* SRAM, Flash and JTAG.
* - There is no prescaler on High speed (AHB) and Low speed (APB) busses;
* all peripherals mapped on these busses are running at HSI speed.
* - The clock for all peripherals is switched off, except the SRAM and FLASH.
* - All GPIOs are in input floating state, except the JTAG pins which
* are assigned to be used for debug purpose.
*
* Once the device started from reset, the user application has to:
* - Configure the clock source to be used to drive the System clock
* (if the application needs higher frequency/performance)
* - Configure the System clock frequency and Flash settings
* - Configure the AHB and APB busses prescalers
* - Enable the clock for the peripheral(s) to be used
* - Configure the clock source(s) for peripherals which clocks are not
* derived from the System clock (I2S, RTC, ADC, USB OTG FS/SDIO/RNG)
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### RCC specific features #####
===============================================================================
[..]
After reset the device is running from Internal High Speed oscillator
(HSI 16MHz) with Flash 0 wait state, Flash prefetch buffer, D-Cache
and I-Cache are disabled, and all peripherals are off except internal
SRAM, Flash and JTAG.
(+) There is no prescaler on High speed (AHB) and Low speed (APB) busses;
all peripherals mapped on these busses are running at HSI speed.
(+) The clock for all peripherals is switched off, except the SRAM and FLASH.
(+) All GPIOs are in input floating state, except the JTAG pins which
are assigned to be used for debug purpose.
[..]
Once the device started from reset, the user application has to:
(+) Configure the clock source to be used to drive the System clock
(if the application needs higher frequency/performance)
(+) Configure the System clock frequency and Flash settings
(+) Configure the AHB and APB busses prescalers
(+) Enable the clock for the peripheral(s) to be used
(+) Configure the clock source(s) for peripherals which clocks are not
derived from the System clock (I2S, RTC, ADC, USB OTG FS/SDIO/RNG)
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -97,11 +100,18 @@
/* Alias word address of BDRST bit */
#define BDRST_BitNumber 0x10
#define BDCR_BDRST_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (BDCR_OFFSET * 32) + (BDRST_BitNumber * 4))
/* --- CSR Register ---*/
/* Alias word address of LSION bit */
#define CSR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x74)
#define LSION_BitNumber 0x00
#define CSR_LSION_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (CSR_OFFSET * 32) + (LSION_BitNumber * 4))
/* --- DCKCFGR Register ---*/
/* Alias word address of TIMPRE bit */
#define DCKCFGR_OFFSET (RCC_OFFSET + 0x8C)
#define TIMPRE_BitNumber 0x18
#define DCKCFGR_TIMPRE_BB (PERIPH_BB_BASE + (DCKCFGR_OFFSET * 32) + (TIMPRE_BitNumber * 4))
/* ---------------------- RCC registers bit mask ------------------------ */
/* CFGR register bit mask */
#define CFGR_MCO2_RESET_MASK ((uint32_t)0x07FFFFFF)
@ -137,45 +147,44 @@ static __I uint8_t APBAHBPrescTable[16] = {0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6
* @brief Internal and external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Internal/external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to configure the internal/external clocks,
PLLs, CSS and MCO pins.
===================================================================================
##### Internal and external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions #####
===================================================================================
[..]
This section provide functions allowing to configure the internal/external clocks,
PLLs, CSS and MCO pins.
1. HSI (high-speed internal), 16 MHz factory-trimmed RC used directly or through
the PLL as System clock source.
(#) HSI (high-speed internal), 16 MHz factory-trimmed RC used directly or through
the PLL as System clock source.
2. LSI (low-speed internal), 32 KHz low consumption RC used as IWDG and/or RTC
clock source.
(#) LSI (low-speed internal), 32 KHz low consumption RC used as IWDG and/or RTC
clock source.
3. HSE (high-speed external), 4 to 26 MHz crystal oscillator used directly or
through the PLL as System clock source. Can be used also as RTC clock source.
(#) HSE (high-speed external), 4 to 26 MHz crystal oscillator used directly or
through the PLL as System clock source. Can be used also as RTC clock source.
4. LSE (low-speed external), 32 KHz oscillator used as RTC clock source.
(#) LSE (low-speed external), 32 KHz oscillator used as RTC clock source.
5. PLL (clocked by HSI or HSE), featuring two different output clocks:
- The first output is used to generate the high speed system clock (up to 168 MHz)
- The second output is used to generate the clock for the USB OTG FS (48 MHz),
the random analog generator (<=48 MHz) and the SDIO (<= 48 MHz).
(#) PLL (clocked by HSI or HSE), featuring two different output clocks:
(++) The first output is used to generate the high speed system clock (up to 168 MHz)
(++) The second output is used to generate the clock for the USB OTG FS (48 MHz),
the random analog generator (<=48 MHz) and the SDIO (<= 48 MHz).
6. PLLI2S (clocked by HSI or HSE), used to generate an accurate clock to achieve
high-quality audio performance on the I2S interface.
(#) PLLI2S (clocked by HSI or HSE), used to generate an accurate clock to achieve
high-quality audio performance on the I2S interface.
7. CSS (Clock security system), once enable and if a HSE clock failure occurs
(HSE used directly or through PLL as System clock source), the System clock
is automatically switched to HSI and an interrupt is generated if enabled.
The interrupt is linked to the Cortex-M4 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt)
exception vector.
(#) CSS (Clock security system), once enable and if a HSE clock failure occurs
(HSE used directly or through PLL as System clock source), the System clock
is automatically switched to HSI and an interrupt is generated if enabled.
The interrupt is linked to the Cortex-M4 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt)
exception vector.
8. MCO1 (microcontroller clock output), used to output HSI, LSE, HSE or PLL
clock (through a configurable prescaler) on PA8 pin.
(#) MCO1 (microcontroller clock output), used to output HSI, LSE, HSE or PLL
clock (through a configurable prescaler) on PA8 pin.
9. MCO2 (microcontroller clock output), used to output HSE, PLL, SYSCLK or PLLI2S
clock (through a configurable prescaler) on PC9 pin.
@endverbatim
(#) MCO2 (microcontroller clock output), used to output HSE, PLL, SYSCLK or PLLI2S
clock (through a configurable prescaler) on PC9 pin.
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -188,7 +197,7 @@ static __I uint8_t APBAHBPrescTable[16] = {0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6
* - CSS, MCO1 and MCO2 OFF
* - All interrupts disabled
* @note This function doesn't modify the configuration of the
* - Peripheral clocks
* - Peripheral clocks
* - LSI, LSE and RTC clocks
* @param None
* @retval None
@ -201,17 +210,26 @@ void RCC_DeInit(void)
/* Reset CFGR register */
RCC->CFGR = 0x00000000;
/* Reset HSEON, CSSON and PLLON bits */
RCC->CR &= (uint32_t)0xFEF6FFFF;
/* Reset HSEON, CSSON, PLLON and PLLI2S bits */
RCC->CR &= (uint32_t)0xFAF6FFFF;
/* Reset PLLCFGR register */
RCC->PLLCFGR = 0x24003010;
/* Reset PLLI2SCFGR register */
RCC->PLLI2SCFGR = 0x20003000;
/* Reset HSEBYP bit */
RCC->CR &= (uint32_t)0xFFFBFFFF;
/* Disable all interrupts */
RCC->CIR = 0x00000000;
#ifdef STM32F427X
/* Disable Timers clock prescalers selection */
RCC->DCKCFGR = 0x00000000;
#endif /* STM32F427X */
}
/**
@ -607,35 +625,36 @@ void RCC_MCO2Config(uint32_t RCC_MCO2Source, uint32_t RCC_MCO2Div)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration functions
##### System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to configure the System, AHB, APB1 and
APB2 busses clocks.
[..]
This section provide functions allowing to configure the System, AHB, APB1 and
APB2 busses clocks.
1. Several clock sources can be used to drive the System clock (SYSCLK): HSI,
HSE and PLL.
The AHB clock (HCLK) is derived from System clock through configurable prescaler
and used to clock the CPU, memory and peripherals mapped on AHB bus (DMA, GPIO...).
APB1 (PCLK1) and APB2 (PCLK2) clocks are derived from AHB clock through
configurable prescalers and used to clock the peripherals mapped on these busses.
You can use "RCC_GetClocksFreq()" function to retrieve the frequencies of these clocks.
(#) Several clock sources can be used to drive the System clock (SYSCLK): HSI,
HSE and PLL.
The AHB clock (HCLK) is derived from System clock through configurable
prescaler and used to clock the CPU, memory and peripherals mapped
on AHB bus (DMA, GPIO...). APB1 (PCLK1) and APB2 (PCLK2) clocks are derived
from AHB clock through configurable prescalers and used to clock
the peripherals mapped on these busses. You can use
"RCC_GetClocksFreq()" function to retrieve the frequencies of these clocks.
@note All the peripheral clocks are derived from the System clock (SYSCLK) except:
- I2S: the I2S clock can be derived either from a specific PLL (PLLI2S) or
from an external clock mapped on the I2S_CKIN pin.
You have to use RCC_I2SCLKConfig() function to configure this clock.
- RTC: the RTC clock can be derived either from the LSI, LSE or HSE clock
divided by 2 to 31. You have to use RCC_RTCCLKConfig() and RCC_RTCCLKCmd()
functions to configure this clock.
- USB OTG FS, SDIO and RTC: USB OTG FS require a frequency equal to 48 MHz
to work correctly, while the SDIO require a frequency equal or lower than
to 48. This clock is derived of the main PLL through PLLQ divider.
- IWDG clock which is always the LSI clock.
-@- All the peripheral clocks are derived from the System clock (SYSCLK) except:
(+@) I2S: the I2S clock can be derived either from a specific PLL (PLLI2S) or
from an external clock mapped on the I2S_CKIN pin.
You have to use RCC_I2SCLKConfig() function to configure this clock.
(+@) RTC: the RTC clock can be derived either from the LSI, LSE or HSE clock
divided by 2 to 31. You have to use RCC_RTCCLKConfig() and RCC_RTCCLKCmd()
functions to configure this clock.
(+@) USB OTG FS, SDIO and RTC: USB OTG FS require a frequency equal to 48 MHz
to work correctly, while the SDIO require a frequency equal or lower than
to 48. This clock is derived of the main PLL through PLLQ divider.
(+@) IWDG clock which is always the LSI clock.
2. The maximum frequency of the SYSCLK and HCLK is 168 MHz, PCLK2 82 MHz and PCLK1 42 MHz.
Depending on the device voltage range, the maximum frequency should be
adapted accordingly:
(#) The maximum frequency of the SYSCLK and HCLK is 168 MHz, PCLK2 84 MHz
and PCLK1 42 MHz. Depending on the device voltage range, the maximum
frequency should be adapted accordingly:
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Latency | HCLK clock frequency (MHz) |
| |---------------------------------------------------------------------|
@ -658,8 +677,8 @@ void RCC_MCO2Config(uint32_t RCC_MCO2Source, uint32_t RCC_MCO2Div)
|---------------|----------------|----------------|-----------------|-----------------|
|7WS(8CPU cycle)| NA | NA |120 < HCLK <= 138|112 < HCLK <= 120|
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
@note When VOS bit (in PWR_CR register) is reset to '0’, the maximum value of HCLK is 144 MHz.
You can use PWR_MainRegulatorModeConfig() function to set or reset this bit.
-@- When VOS bits (in PWR_CR register) is reset to 0 , the maximum value of HCLK is 144 MHz.
You can use PWR_MainRegulatorModeConfig() function to set or reset this bit.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -926,26 +945,26 @@ void RCC_GetClocksFreq(RCC_ClocksTypeDef* RCC_Clocks)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Peripheral clocks configuration functions
##### Peripheral clocks configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to configure the Peripheral clocks.
[..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the Peripheral clocks.
1. The RTC clock which is derived from the LSI, LSE or HSE clock divided by 2 to 31.
(#) The RTC clock which is derived from the LSI, LSE or HSE clock divided
by 2 to 31.
2. After restart from Reset or wakeup from STANDBY, all peripherals are off
except internal SRAM, Flash and JTAG. Before to start using a peripheral you
have to enable its interface clock. You can do this using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd()
, RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd() and RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() functions.
(#) After restart from Reset or wakeup from STANDBY, all peripherals are off
except internal SRAM, Flash and JTAG. Before to start using a peripheral
you have to enable its interface clock. You can do this using
RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(), RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd() and RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() functions.
3. To reset the peripherals configuration (to the default state after device reset)
you can use RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(), RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd() and
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd() functions.
(#) To reset the peripherals configuration (to the default state after device reset)
you can use RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(), RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd() and
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd() functions.
4. To further reduce power consumption in SLEEP mode the peripheral clocks can
be disabled prior to executing the WFI or WFE instructions. You can do this
using RCC_AHBPeriphClockLPModeCmd(), RCC_APB2PeriphClockLPModeCmd() and
RCC_APB1PeriphClockLPModeCmd() functions.
(#) To further reduce power consumption in SLEEP mode the peripheral clocks
can be disabled prior to executing the WFI or WFE instructions.
You can do this using RCC_AHBPeriphClockLPModeCmd(),
RCC_APB2PeriphClockLPModeCmd() and RCC_APB1PeriphClockLPModeCmd() functions.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1051,6 +1070,32 @@ void RCC_I2SCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_I2SCLKSource)
*(__IO uint32_t *) CFGR_I2SSRC_BB = RCC_I2SCLKSource;
}
/**
* @brief Configures the Timers clocks prescalers selection.
*
* @note This feature is only available with STM32F427x/437x Devices.
* @param RCC_TIMCLKPrescaler : specifies the Timers clocks prescalers selection
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg RCC_TIMPrescDesactivated: The Timers kernels clocks prescaler is
* equal to HPRE if PPREx is corresponding to division by 1 or 2,
* else it is equal to [(HPRE * PPREx) / 2] if PPREx is corresponding to
* division by 4 or more.
*
* @arg RCC_TIMPrescActivated: The Timers kernels clocks prescaler is
* equal to HPRE if PPREx is corresponding to division by 1, 2 or 4,
* else it is equal to [(HPRE * PPREx) / 4] if PPREx is corresponding
* to division by 8 or more.
* @retval None
*/
void RCC_TIMCLKPresConfig(uint32_t RCC_TIMCLKPrescaler)
{
/* Check the parameters */
assert_param(IS_RCC_TIMCLK_PRESCALER(RCC_TIMCLKPrescaler));
*(__IO uint32_t *) DCKCFGR_TIMPRE_BB = RCC_TIMCLKPrescaler;
}
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the AHB1 peripheral clock.
* @note After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write access)
@ -1066,12 +1111,12 @@ void RCC_I2SCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_I2SCLKSource)
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOF: GPIOF clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOG: GPIOG clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOG: GPIOG clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOI: GPIOI clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOI: GPIOI clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_CRC: CRC clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_BKPSRAM: BKPSRAM interface clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_CCMDATARAMEN CCM data RAM interface clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA1: DMA1 clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA2: DMA2 clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA2: DMA2 clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_ETH_MAC: Ethernet MAC clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_ETH_MAC_Tx: Ethernet Transmission clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_ETH_MAC_Rx: Ethernet Reception clock
@ -1137,6 +1182,7 @@ void RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
* using it.
* @param RCC_AHBPeriph: specifies the AHB3 peripheral to gates its clock.
* This parameter must be: RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC
*
* @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1187,6 +1233,8 @@ void RCC_AHB3PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHB3Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CAN2: CAN2 clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_PWR: PWR clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_DAC: DAC clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART7: UART7 clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART8: UART8 clock
* @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1223,10 +1271,13 @@ void RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3: ADC3 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SDIO: SDIO clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1: SPI1 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI4: SPI4 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG: SYSCFG clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM9: TIM9 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM10: TIM10 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM11: TIM11 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI5: SPI5 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI6: SPI6 clock
* @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1259,10 +1310,10 @@ void RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOF: GPIOF clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOG: GPIOG clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOG: GPIOG clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOI: GPIOI clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOI: GPIOI clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_CRC: CRC clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA1: DMA1 clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA2: DMA2 clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA2: DMA2 clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_ETH_MAC: Ethernet MAC clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_OTG_HS: USB OTG HS clock
*
@ -1319,6 +1370,7 @@ void RCC_AHB2PeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
* @brief Forces or releases AHB3 peripheral reset.
* @param RCC_AHB3Periph: specifies the AHB3 peripheral to reset.
* This parameter must be: RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC
*
* @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral reset.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1366,6 +1418,8 @@ void RCC_AHB3PeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHB3Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CAN2: CAN2 clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_PWR: PWR clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_DAC: DAC clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART7: UART7 clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART8: UART8 clock
* @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral reset.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1398,10 +1452,13 @@ void RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3: ADC3 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SDIO: SDIO clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1: SPI1 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI4: SPI4 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG: SYSCFG clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM9: TIM9 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM10: TIM10 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM11: TIM11 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI5: SPI5 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI6: SPI6 clock
* @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral reset.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1437,7 +1494,7 @@ void RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOF: GPIOF clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOG: GPIOG clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOG: GPIOG clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOI: GPIOI clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_GPIOI: GPIOI clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_CRC: CRC clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_BKPSRAM: BKPSRAM interface clock
* @arg RCC_AHB1Periph_DMA1: DMA1 clock
@ -1507,6 +1564,7 @@ void RCC_AHB2PeriphClockLPModeCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHB2Periph, FunctionalState NewSt
* @note By default, all peripheral clocks are enabled during SLEEP mode.
* @param RCC_AHBPeriph: specifies the AHB3 peripheral to gates its clock.
* This parameter must be: RCC_AHB3Periph_FSMC
*
* @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1557,6 +1615,8 @@ void RCC_AHB3PeriphClockLPModeCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHB3Periph, FunctionalState NewSt
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CAN2: CAN2 clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_PWR: PWR clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_DAC: DAC clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART7: UART7 clock
* @arg RCC_APB1Periph_UART8: UART8 clock
* @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1593,10 +1653,13 @@ void RCC_APB1PeriphClockLPModeCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewSt
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_ADC3: ADC3 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SDIO: SDIO clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1: SPI1 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI4: SPI4 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG: SYSCFG clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM9: TIM9 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM10: TIM10 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM11: TIM11 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI5: SPI5 clock
* @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI6: SPI6 clock
* @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1625,7 +1688,7 @@ void RCC_APB2PeriphClockLPModeCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewSt
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -1641,7 +1704,8 @@ void RCC_APB2PeriphClockLPModeCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewSt
* @arg RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt
* @arg RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt
* @arg RCC_IT_PLLRDY: main PLL ready interrupt
* @arg RCC_IT_PLLI2SRDY: PLLI2S ready interrupt
* @arg RCC_IT_PLLI2SRDY: PLLI2S ready interrupt
*
* @param NewState: new state of the specified RCC interrupts.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -1742,7 +1806,7 @@ void RCC_ClearFlag(void)
* @arg RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt
* @arg RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt
* @arg RCC_IT_PLLRDY: main PLL ready interrupt
* @arg RCC_IT_PLLI2SRDY: PLLI2S ready interrupt
* @arg RCC_IT_PLLI2SRDY: PLLI2S ready interrupt
* @arg RCC_IT_CSS: Clock Security System interrupt
* @retval The new state of RCC_IT (SET or RESET).
*/
@ -1805,4 +1869,4 @@ void RCC_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t RCC_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

186
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_rng.c
View File

@ -2,48 +2,53 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_rng.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Random Number Generator (RNG) peripheral:
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - Get 32 bit Random number
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + Get 32 bit Random number
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable The RNG controller clock using
* RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_RNG, ENABLE) function.
*
* 2. Activate the RNG peripheral using RNG_Cmd() function.
*
* 3. Wait until the 32 bit Random number Generator contains a valid
* random data (using polling/interrupt mode). For more details,
* refer to "Interrupts and flags management functions" module
* description.
*
* 4. Get the 32 bit Random number using RNG_GetRandomNumber() function
*
* 5. To get another 32 bit Random number, go to step 3.
*
*
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable The RNG controller clock using
RCC_AHB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHB2Periph_RNG, ENABLE) function.
(#) Activate the RNG peripheral using RNG_Cmd() function.
(#) Wait until the 32 bit Random number Generator contains a valid random data
(using polling/interrupt mode). For more details, refer to "Interrupts and
flags management functions" module description.
(#) Get the 32 bit Random number using RNG_GetRandomNumber() function
(#) To get another 32 bit Random number, go to step 3.
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -76,18 +81,18 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to
- Initialize the RNG peripheral
- Enable or disable the RNG peripheral
[..] This section provides functions allowing to
(+) Initialize the RNG peripheral
(+) Enable or disable the RNG peripheral
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
/**
* @brief Deinitializes the RNG peripheral registers to their default reset values.
* @brief De-initializes the RNG peripheral registers to their default reset values.
* @param None
* @retval None
*/
@ -132,12 +137,12 @@ void RNG_Cmd(FunctionalState NewState)
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Get 32 bit Random number function
##### Get 32 bit Random number function #####
===============================================================================
This section provides a function allowing to get the 32 bit Random number
[..] This section provides a function allowing to get the 32 bit Random number
@note Before to call this function you have to wait till DRDY flag is set,
using RNG_GetFlagStatus(RNG_FLAG_DRDY) function.
(@) Before to call this function you have to wait till DRDY flag is set,
using RNG_GetFlagStatus(RNG_FLAG_DRDY) function.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -184,69 +189,63 @@ uint32_t RNG_GetRandomNumber(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides functions allowing to configure the RNG Interrupts and
to get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
[..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the RNG Interrupts and
to get the status and clear flags and Interrupts pending bits.
The RNG provides 3 Interrupts sources and 3 Flags:
[..] The RNG provides 3 Interrupts sources and 3 Flags:
Flags :
----------
1. RNG_FLAG_DRDY : In the case of the RNG_DR register contains valid
random data. it is cleared by reading the valid data
(using RNG_GetRandomNumber() function).
*** Flags : ***
===============
[..]
(#) RNG_FLAG_DRDY : In the case of the RNG_DR register contains valid
random data. it is cleared by reading the valid data(using
RNG_GetRandomNumber() function).
2. RNG_FLAG_CECS : In the case of a seed error detection.
(#) RNG_FLAG_CECS : In the case of a seed error detection.
3. RNG_FLAG_SECS : In the case of a clock error detection.
(#) RNG_FLAG_SECS : In the case of a clock error detection.
Interrupts :
------------
if enabled, an RNG interrupt is pending :
*** Interrupts ***
==================
[..] If enabled, an RNG interrupt is pending :
1. In the case of the RNG_DR register contains valid random data.
(#) In the case of the RNG_DR register contains valid random data.
This interrupt source is cleared once the RNG_DR register has been read
(using RNG_GetRandomNumber() function) until a new valid value is
computed.
or
2. In the case of a seed error : One of the following faulty sequences has
been detected:
- More than 64 consecutive bits at the same value (0 or 1)
- More than 32 consecutive alternance of 0 and 1 (0101010101...01)
This interrupt source is cleared using RNG_ClearITPendingBit(RNG_IT_SEI)
function.
or
3. In the case of a clock error : the PLL48CLK (RNG peripheral clock source)
was not correctly detected (fPLL48CLK< fHCLK/16).
This interrupt source is cleared using RNG_ClearITPendingBit(RNG_IT_CEI)
function.
@note In this case, User have to check that the clock controller is
correctly configured to provide the RNG clock.
computed; or
(#) In the case of a seed error : One of the following faulty sequences has
been detected:
(++) More than 64 consecutive bits at the same value (0 or 1)
(++) More than 32 consecutive alternance of 0 and 1 (0101010101...01)
This interrupt source is cleared using RNG_ClearITPendingBit(RNG_IT_SEI)
function; or
(#) In the case of a clock error : the PLL48CLK (RNG peripheral clock source)
was not correctly detected (fPLL48CLK< fHCLK/16). This interrupt source is
cleared using RNG_ClearITPendingBit(RNG_IT_CEI) function.
-@- note In this case, User have to check that the clock controller is
correctly configured to provide the RNG clock.
Managing the RNG controller events :
------------------------------------
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the RNG controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
*** Managing the RNG controller events : ***
============================================
[..] The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the RNG controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
1. In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- RNG_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
- RNG_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events.
(#) In the Polling Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(++) RNG_GetFlagStatus() : to check if flags events occur.
(++) RNG_ClearFlag() : to clear the flags events.
@note RNG_FLAG_DRDY can not be cleared by RNG_ClearFlag(). it is cleared only
by reading the Random number data.
-@@- RNG_FLAG_DRDY can not be cleared by RNG_ClearFlag(). it is cleared only
by reading the Random number data.
2. In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- RNG_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
- RNG_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
- RNG_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit
(corresponding Flag).
(#) In the Interrupt Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(++) RNG_ITConfig() : to enable or disable the interrupt source.
(++) RNG_GetITStatus() : to check if Interrupt occurs.
(++) RNG_ClearITPendingBit() : to clear the Interrupt pending Bit
(corresponding Flag).
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
@ -390,10 +389,9 @@ void RNG_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t RNG_IT)
* @}
*/
/**
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

755
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_rtc.c
View File

@ -2,280 +2,287 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_rtc.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Real-Time Clock (RTC) peripheral:
* - Initialization
* - Calendar (Time and Date) configuration
* - Alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B) configuration
* - WakeUp Timer configuration
* - Daylight Saving configuration
* - Output pin Configuration
* - Coarse digital Calibration configuration
* - Smooth digital Calibration configuration
* - TimeStamp configuration
* - Tampers configuration
* - Backup Data Registers configuration
* - Shift control synchronisation
* - RTC Tamper and TimeStamp Pins Selection and Output Type Config configuration
* - Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* Backup Domain Operating Condition
* ===================================================================
* The real-time clock (RTC), the RTC backup registers, and the backup
* SRAM (BKP SRAM) can be powered from the VBAT voltage when the main
* VDD supply is powered off.
* To retain the content of the RTC backup registers, backup SRAM,
* and supply the RTC when VDD is turned off, VBAT pin can be connected
* to an optional standby voltage supplied by a battery or by another
* source.
*
* To allow the RTC to operate even when the main digital supply (VDD)
* is turned off, the VBAT pin powers the following blocks:
* 1 - The RTC
* 2 - The LSE oscillator
* 3 - The backup SRAM when the low power backup regulator is enabled
* 4 - PC13 to PC15 I/Os, plus PI8 I/O (when available)
*
* When the backup domain is supplied by VDD (analog switch connected
* to VDD), the following functions are available:
* 1 - PC14 and PC15 can be used as either GPIO or LSE pins
* 2 - PC13 can be used as a GPIO or as the RTC_AF1 pin
* 3 - PI8 can be used as a GPIO or as the RTC_AF2 pin
*
* When the backup domain is supplied by VBAT (analog switch connected
* to VBAT because VDD is not present), the following functions are available:
* 1 - PC14 and PC15 can be used as LSE pins only
* 2 - PC13 can be used as the RTC_AF1 pin
* 3 - PI8 can be used as the RTC_AF2 pin
*
* ===================================================================
* Backup Domain Reset
* ===================================================================
* The backup domain reset sets all RTC registers and the RCC_BDCR
* register to their reset values. The BKPSRAM is not affected by this
* reset. The only way of resetting the BKPSRAM is through the Flash
* interface by requesting a protection level change from 1 to 0.
* A backup domain reset is generated when one of the following events
* occurs:
* 1 - Software reset, triggered by setting the BDRST bit in the
* RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR). You can use the
* RCC_BackupResetCmd().
* 2 - VDD or VBAT power on, if both supplies have previously been
* powered off.
*
* ===================================================================
* Backup Domain Access
* ===================================================================
* After reset, the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup data
* registers and backup SRAM) is protected against possible unwanted
* write accesses.
* To enable access to the RTC Domain and RTC registers, proceed as follows:
* - Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the
* RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() function.
* - Enable access to RTC domain using the PWR_BackupAccessCmd() function.
* - Select the RTC clock source using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig() function.
* - Enable RTC Clock using the RCC_RTCCLKCmd() function.
*
* ===================================================================
* RTC Driver: how to use it
* ===================================================================
* - Enable the RTC domain access (see description in the section above)
* - Configure the RTC Prescaler (Asynchronous and Synchronous) and
* RTC hour format using the RTC_Init() function.
*
* Time and Date configuration
* ===========================
* - To configure the RTC Calendar (Time and Date) use the RTC_SetTime()
* and RTC_SetDate() functions.
* - To read the RTC Calendar, use the RTC_GetTime() and RTC_GetDate()
* functions.
* - Use the RTC_DayLightSavingConfig() function to add or sub one
* hour to the RTC Calendar.
*
* Alarm configuration
* ===================
* - To configure the RTC Alarm use the RTC_SetAlarm() function.
* - Enable the selected RTC Alarm using the RTC_AlarmCmd() function
* - To read the RTC Alarm, use the RTC_GetAlarm() function.
* - To read the RTC alarm SubSecond, use the RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond() function.
*
* RTC Wakeup configuration
* ========================
* - Configure the RTC Wakeup Clock source use the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig()
* function.
* - Configure the RTC WakeUp Counter using the RTC_SetWakeUpCounter()
* function
* - Enable the RTC WakeUp using the RTC_WakeUpCmd() function
* - To read the RTC WakeUp Counter register, use the RTC_GetWakeUpCounter()
* function.
*
* Outputs configuration
* =====================
* The RTC has 2 different outputs:
* - AFO_ALARM: this output is used to manage the RTC Alarm A, Alarm B
* and WaKeUp signals.
* To output the selected RTC signal on RTC_AF1 pin, use the
* RTC_OutputConfig() function.
* - AFO_CALIB: this output is 512Hz signal or 1Hz .
* To output the RTC Clock on RTC_AF1 pin, use the RTC_CalibOutputCmd()
* function.
*
* Smooth digital Calibration configuration
* =================================
* - Configure the RTC Original Digital Calibration Value and the corresponding
* calibration cycle period (32s,16s and 8s) using the RTC_SmoothCalibConfig()
* function.
*
* Coarse digital Calibration configuration
* =================================
* - Configure the RTC Coarse Calibration Value and the corresponding
* sign using the RTC_CoarseCalibConfig() function.
* - Enable the RTC Coarse Calibration using the RTC_CoarseCalibCmd()
* function
*
* TimeStamp configuration
* =======================
* - Configure the RTC_AF1 trigger and enables the RTC TimeStamp
* using the RTC_TimeStampCmd() function.
* - To read the RTC TimeStamp Time and Date register, use the
* RTC_GetTimeStamp() function.
* - To read the RTC TimeStamp SubSecond register, use the
* RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond() function.
* - The TAMPER1 alternate function can be mapped either to RTC_AF1(PC13)
* or RTC_AF2 (PI8) depending on the value of TAMP1INSEL bit in
* RTC_TAFCR register. You can use the RTC_TamperPinSelection()
* function to select the corresponding pin.
*
* Tamper configuration
* ====================
* - Enable the RTC Tamper using the RTC_TamperCmd() function.
* - Configure the Tamper filter count using RTC_TamperFilterConfig()
* function.
* - Configure the RTC Tamper trigger Edge or Level according to the Tamper
* filter (if equal to 0 Edge else Level) value using the RTC_TamperConfig() function.
* - Configure the Tamper sampling frequency using RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig()
* function.
* - Configure the Tamper precharge or discharge duration using
* RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration() function.
* - Enable the Tamper Pull-UP using RTC_TamperPullUpDisableCmd() function.
* - Enable the Time stamp on Tamper detection event using
* RTC_TSOnTamperDetecCmd() function.
* - The TIMESTAMP alternate function can be mapped to either RTC_AF1
* or RTC_AF2 depending on the value of the TSINSEL bit in the
* RTC_TAFCR register. You can use the RTC_TimeStampPinSelection()
* function to select the corresponding pin.
*
* Backup Data Registers configuration
* ===================================
* - To write to the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_WriteBackupRegister()
* function.
* - To read the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_ReadBackupRegister()
* function.
*
* ===================================================================
* RTC and low power modes
* ===================================================================
* The MCU can be woken up from a low power mode by an RTC alternate
* function.
* The RTC alternate functions are the RTC alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B),
* RTC wakeup, RTC tamper event detection and RTC time stamp event detection.
* These RTC alternate functions can wake up the system from the Stop
* and Standby lowpower modes.
* The system can also wake up from low power modes without depending
* on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode), by using the RTC alarm
* or the RTC wakeup events.
* The RTC provides a programmable time base for waking up from the
* Stop or Standby mode at regular intervals.
* Wakeup from STOP and Standby modes is possible only when the RTC
* clock source is LSE or LSI.
*
* ===================================================================
* Selection of RTC_AF1 alternate functions
* ===================================================================
* The RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) can be used for the following purposes:
* - AFO_ALARM output
* - AFO_CALIB output
* - AFI_TAMPER
* - AFI_TIMESTAMP
*
* +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
* | Pin |AFO_ALARM |AFO_CALIB |AFI_TAMPER |AFI_TIMESTAMP | TAMP1INSEL | TSINSEL |ALARMOUTTYPE |
* | configuration | ENABLED | ENABLED | ENABLED | ENABLED |TAMPER1 pin |TIMESTAMP pin | AFO_ALARM |
* | and function | | | | | selection | selection |Configuration |
* |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | Alarm out | | | | | Don't | Don't | |
* | output OD | 1 |Don't care|Don't care | Don't care | care | care | 0 |
* |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | Alarm out | | | | | Don't | Don't | |
* | output PP | 1 |Don't care|Don't care | Don't care | care | care | 1 |
* |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | Calibration out | | | | | Don't | Don't | |
* | output PP | 0 | 1 |Don't care | Don't care | care | care | Don't care |
* |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | TAMPER input | | | | | | Don't | |
* | floating | 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 0 | care | Don't care |
* |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | TIMESTAMP and | | | | | | | |
* | TAMPER input | 0 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | Don't care |
* | floating | | | | | | | |
* |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | TIMESTAMP input | | | | | Don't | | |
* | floating | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | care | 0 | Don't care |
* |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | Standard GPIO | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Don't care | Don't care | Don't care |
* +-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
*
*
* ===================================================================
* Selection of RTC_AF2 alternate functions
* ===================================================================
* The RTC_AF2 pin (PI8) can be used for the following purposes:
* - AFI_TAMPER
* - AFI_TIMESTAMP
*
* +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
* | Pin |AFI_TAMPER |AFI_TIMESTAMP | TAMP1INSEL | TSINSEL |ALARMOUTTYPE |
* | configuration | ENABLED | ENABLED |TAMPER1 pin |TIMESTAMP pin | AFO_ALARM |
* | and function | | | selection | selection |Configuration |
* |-----------------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | TAMPER input | | | | Don't | |
* | floating | 1 | 0 | 1 | care | Don't care |
* |-----------------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | TIMESTAMP and | | | | | |
* | TAMPER input | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | Don't care |
* | floating | | | | | |
* |-----------------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | TIMESTAMP input | | | Don't | | |
* | floating | 0 | 1 | care | 1 | Don't care |
* |-----------------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
* | Standard GPIO | 0 | 0 | Don't care | Don't care | Don't care |
* +---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
*
*
* @endverbatim
* + Initialization
* + Calendar (Time and Date) configuration
* + Alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B) configuration
* + WakeUp Timer configuration
* + Daylight Saving configuration
* + Output pin Configuration
* + Coarse digital Calibration configuration
* + Smooth digital Calibration configuration
* + TimeStamp configuration
* + Tampers configuration
* + Backup Data Registers configuration
* + Shift control synchronisation
* + RTC Tamper and TimeStamp Pins Selection and Output Type Config configuration
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### Backup Domain Operating Condition #####
===================================================================
[..] The real-time clock (RTC), the RTC backup registers, and the backup
SRAM (BKP SRAM) can be powered from the VBAT voltage when the main
VDD supply is powered off.
To retain the content of the RTC backup registers, backup SRAM, and supply
the RTC when VDD is turned off, VBAT pin can be connected to an optional
standby voltage supplied by a battery or by another source.
[..] To allow the RTC to operate even when the main digital supply (VDD) is turned
off, the VBAT pin powers the following blocks:
(#) The RTC
(#) The LSE oscillator
(#) The backup SRAM when the low power backup regulator is enabled
(#) PC13 to PC15 I/Os, plus PI8 I/O (when available)
[..] When the backup domain is supplied by VDD (analog switch connected to VDD),
the following functions are available:
(#) PC14 and PC15 can be used as either GPIO or LSE pins
(#) PC13 can be used as a GPIO or as the RTC_AF1 pin
(#) PI8 can be used as a GPIO or as the RTC_AF2 pin
[..] When the backup domain is supplied by VBAT (analog switch connected to VBAT
because VDD is not present), the following functions are available:
(#) PC14 and PC15 can be used as LSE pins only
(#) PC13 can be used as the RTC_AF1 pin
(#) PI8 can be used as the RTC_AF2 pin
##### Backup Domain Reset #####
===================================================================
[..] The backup domain reset sets all RTC registers and the RCC_BDCR register
to their reset values. The BKPSRAM is not affected by this reset. The only
way of resetting the BKPSRAM is through the Flash interface by requesting
a protection level change from 1 to 0.
[..] A backup domain reset is generated when one of the following events occurs:
(#) Software reset, triggered by setting the BDRST bit in the
RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR). You can use the
RCC_BackupResetCmd().
(#) VDD or VBAT power on, if both supplies have previously been powered off.
##### Backup Domain Access #####
===================================================================
[..] After reset, the backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup data
registers and backup SRAM) is protected against possible unwanted write
accesses.
[..] To enable access to the RTC Domain and RTC registers, proceed as follows:
(+) Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() function.
(+) Enable access to RTC domain using the PWR_BackupAccessCmd() function.
(+) Select the RTC clock source using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig() function.
(+) Enable RTC Clock using the RCC_RTCCLKCmd() function.
##### How to use RTC Driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(+) Enable the RTC domain access (see description in the section above)
(+) Configure the RTC Prescaler (Asynchronous and Synchronous) and RTC hour
format using the RTC_Init() function.
*** Time and Date configuration ***
===================================
[..]
(+) To configure the RTC Calendar (Time and Date) use the RTC_SetTime()
and RTC_SetDate() functions.
(+) To read the RTC Calendar, use the RTC_GetTime() and RTC_GetDate() functions.
(+) Use the RTC_DayLightSavingConfig() function to add or sub one
hour to the RTC Calendar.
*** Alarm configuration ***
===========================
[..]
(+) To configure the RTC Alarm use the RTC_SetAlarm() function.
(+) Enable the selected RTC Alarm using the RTC_AlarmCmd() function
(+) To read the RTC Alarm, use the RTC_GetAlarm() function.
(+) To read the RTC alarm SubSecond, use the RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond() function.
*** RTC Wakeup configuration ***
================================
[..]
(+) Configure the RTC Wakeup Clock source use the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig()
function.
(+) Configure the RTC WakeUp Counter using the RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() function
(+) Enable the RTC WakeUp using the RTC_WakeUpCmd() function
(+) To read the RTC WakeUp Counter register, use the RTC_GetWakeUpCounter()
function.
*** Outputs configuration ***
=============================
[..] The RTC has 2 different outputs:
(+) AFO_ALARM: this output is used to manage the RTC Alarm A, Alarm B
and WaKeUp signals. To output the selected RTC signal on RTC_AF1 pin, use the
RTC_OutputConfig() function.
(+) AFO_CALIB: this output is 512Hz signal or 1Hz. To output the RTC Clock on
RTC_AF1 pin, use the RTC_CalibOutputCmd() function.
*** Smooth digital Calibration configuration ***
================================================
[..]
(+) Configure the RTC Original Digital Calibration Value and the corresponding
calibration cycle period (32s,16s and 8s) using the RTC_SmoothCalibConfig()
function.
*** Coarse digital Calibration configuration ***
================================================
[..]
(+) Configure the RTC Coarse Calibration Value and the corresponding
sign using the RTC_CoarseCalibConfig() function.
(+) Enable the RTC Coarse Calibration using the RTC_CoarseCalibCmd() function
*** TimeStamp configuration ***
===============================
[..]
(+) Configure the RTC_AF1 trigger and enables the RTC TimeStamp using the RTC
_TimeStampCmd() function.
(+) To read the RTC TimeStamp Time and Date register, use the RTC_GetTimeStamp()
function.
(+) To read the RTC TimeStamp SubSecond register, use the
RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond() function.
(+) The TAMPER1 alternate function can be mapped either to RTC_AF1(PC13)
or RTC_AF2 (PI8) depending on the value of TAMP1INSEL bit in
RTC_TAFCR register. You can use the RTC_TamperPinSelection() function to
select the corresponding pin.
*** Tamper configuration ***
============================
[..]
(+) Enable the RTC Tamper using the RTC_TamperCmd() function.
(+) Configure the Tamper filter count using RTC_TamperFilterConfig()
function.
(+) Configure the RTC Tamper trigger Edge or Level according to the Tamper
filter (if equal to 0 Edge else Level) value using the RTC_TamperConfig()
function.
(+) Configure the Tamper sampling frequency using RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig()
function.
(+) Configure the Tamper precharge or discharge duration using
RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration() function.
(+) Enable the Tamper Pull-UP using RTC_TamperPullUpDisableCmd() function.
(+) Enable the Time stamp on Tamper detection event using
TC_TSOnTamperDetecCmd() function.
(+) The TIMESTAMP alternate function can be mapped to either RTC_AF1
or RTC_AF2 depending on the value of the TSINSEL bit in the RTC_TAFCR
register. You can use the RTC_TimeStampPinSelection() function to select
the corresponding pin.
*** Backup Data Registers configuration ***
===========================================
[..]
(+) To write to the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_WriteBackupRegister()
function.
(+) To read the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_ReadBackupRegister()
function.
##### RTC and low power modes #####
===================================================================
[..] The MCU can be woken up from a low power mode by an RTC alternate
function.
[..] The RTC alternate functions are the RTC alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B),
RTC wakeup, RTC tamper event detection and RTC time stamp event detection.
These RTC alternate functions can wake up the system from the Stop and
Standby lowpower modes.
[..] The system can also wake up from low power modes without depending
on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode), by using the RTC alarm
or the RTC wakeup events.
[..] The RTC provides a programmable time base for waking up from the
Stop or Standby mode at regular intervals.
Wakeup from STOP and Standby modes is possible only when the RTC clock source
is LSE or LSI.
##### Selection of RTC_AF1 alternate functions #####
===================================================================
[..] The RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) can be used for the following purposes:
(+) AFO_ALARM output
(+) AFO_CALIB output
(+) AFI_TAMPER
(+) AFI_TIMESTAMP
[..]
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Pin |AFO_ALARM |AFO_CALIB |AFI_TAMPER |AFI_TIMESTAMP | TAMP1INSEL | TSINSEL |ALARMOUTTYPE |
| configuration | ENABLED | ENABLED | ENABLED | ENABLED |TAMPER1 pin |TIMESTAMP pin | AFO_ALARM |
| and function | | | | | selection | selection |Configuration |
|-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| Alarm out | | | | | Don't | Don't | |
| output OD | 1 |Don't care|Don't care | Don't care | care | care | 0 |
|-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| Alarm out | | | | | Don't | Don't | |
| output PP | 1 |Don't care|Don't care | Don't care | care | care | 1 |
|-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| Calibration out | | | | | Don't | Don't | |
| output PP | 0 | 1 |Don't care | Don't care | care | care | Don't care |
|-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| TAMPER input | | | | | | Don't | |
| floating | 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 0 | care | Don't care |
|-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| TIMESTAMP and | | | | | | | |
| TAMPER input | 0 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | Don't care |
| floating | | | | | | | |
|-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| TIMESTAMP input | | | | | Don't | | |
| floating | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | care | 0 | Don't care |
|-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| Standard GPIO | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Don't care | Don't care | Don't care |
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
##### Selection of RTC_AF2 alternate functions #####
===================================================================
[..] The RTC_AF2 pin (PI8) can be used for the following purposes:
(+) AFI_TAMPER
(+) AFI_TIMESTAMP
[..]
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Pin |AFI_TAMPER |AFI_TIMESTAMP | TAMP1INSEL | TSINSEL |ALARMOUTTYPE |
| configuration | ENABLED | ENABLED |TAMPER1 pin |TIMESTAMP pin | AFO_ALARM |
| and function | | | selection | selection |Configuration |
|-----------------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| TAMPER input | | | | Don't | |
| floating | 1 | 0 | 1 | care | Don't care |
|-----------------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| TIMESTAMP and | | | | | |
| TAMPER input | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | Don't care |
| floating | | | | | |
|-----------------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| TIMESTAMP input | | | Don't | | |
| floating | 0 | 1 | care | 1 | Don't care |
|-----------------|-----------|--------------|------------|--------------|--------------|
| Standard GPIO | 0 | 0 | Don't care | Don't care | Don't care |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
#include "stm32f4xx_rtc.h"
#include "stm32f4xx_rcc.h"
/** @addtogroup STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver
* @{
@ -297,7 +304,8 @@
#define RTC_FLAGS_MASK ((uint32_t)(RTC_FLAG_TSOVF | RTC_FLAG_TSF | RTC_FLAG_WUTF | \
RTC_FLAG_ALRBF | RTC_FLAG_ALRAF | RTC_FLAG_INITF | \
RTC_FLAG_RSF | RTC_FLAG_INITS | RTC_FLAG_WUTWF | \
RTC_FLAG_ALRBWF | RTC_FLAG_ALRAWF | RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F ))
RTC_FLAG_ALRBWF | RTC_FLAG_ALRAWF | RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F | \
RTC_FLAG_RECALPF | RTC_FLAG_SHPF))
#define INITMODE_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00010000)
#define SYNCHRO_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00020000)
@ -321,35 +329,35 @@ static uint8_t RTC_Bcd2ToByte(uint8_t Value);
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to initialize and configure the RTC
Prescaler (Synchronous and Asynchronous), RTC Hour format, disable RTC registers
Write protection, enter and exit the RTC initialization mode, RTC registers
synchronization check and reference clock detection enable.
[..] This section provide functions allowing to initialize and configure the RTC
Prescaler (Synchronous and Asynchronous), RTC Hour format, disable RTC registers
Write protection, enter and exit the RTC initialization mode, RTC registers
synchronization check and reference clock detection enable.
1. The RTC Prescaler is programmed to generate the RTC 1Hz time base. It is
split into 2 programmable prescalers to minimize power consumption.
- A 7-bit asynchronous prescaler and A 13-bit synchronous prescaler.
- When both prescalers are used, it is recommended to configure the asynchronous
prescaler to a high value to minimize consumption.
(#) The RTC Prescaler is programmed to generate the RTC 1Hz time base. It is
split into 2 programmable prescalers to minimize power consumption.
(++) A 7-bit asynchronous prescaler and A 13-bit synchronous prescaler.
(++) When both prescalers are used, it is recommended to configure the
asynchronous prescaler to a high value to minimize consumption.
2. All RTC registers are Write protected. Writing to the RTC registers
is enabled by writing a key into the Write Protection register, RTC_WPR.
(#) All RTC registers are Write protected. Writing to the RTC registers
is enabled by writing a key into the Write Protection register, RTC_WPR.
3. To Configure the RTC Calendar, user application should enter initialization
mode. In this mode, the calendar counter is stopped and its value can be
updated. When the initialization sequence is complete, the calendar restarts
counting after 4 RTCCLK cycles.
(#) To Configure the RTC Calendar, user application should enter initialization
mode. In this mode, the calendar counter is stopped and its value can be
updated. When the initialization sequence is complete, the calendar restarts
counting after 4 RTCCLK cycles.
4. To read the calendar through the shadow registers after Calendar initialization,
calendar update or after wakeup from low power modes the software must first
clear the RSF flag. The software must then wait until it is set again before
reading the calendar, which means that the calendar registers have been
correctly copied into the RTC_TR and RTC_DR shadow registers.
The RTC_WaitForSynchro() function implements the above software sequence
(RSF clear and RSF check).
(#) To read the calendar through the shadow registers after Calendar initialization,
calendar update or after wakeup from low power modes the software must first
clear the RSF flag. The software must then wait until it is set again before
reading the calendar, which means that the calendar registers have been
correctly copied into the RTC_TR and RTC_DR shadow registers.
The RTC_WaitForSynchro() function implements the above software sequence
(RSF clear and RSF check).
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -407,6 +415,10 @@ ErrorStatus RTC_DeInit(void)
RTC->CALIBR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
RTC->ALRMAR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
RTC->ALRMBR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
RTC->SHIFTR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
RTC->CALR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
RTC->ALRMASSR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
RTC->ALRMBSSR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
/* Reset ISR register and exit initialization mode */
RTC->ISR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
@ -728,11 +740,11 @@ void RTC_BypassShadowCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Time and Date configuration functions
##### Time and Date configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC Calendar
(Time and Date).
[..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC Calendar
(Time and Date).
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -823,6 +835,9 @@ ErrorStatus RTC_SetTime(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_TimeStruct)
/* Exit Initialization mode */
RTC_ExitInitMode();
/* If RTC_CR_BYPSHAD bit = 0, wait for synchro else this check is not needed */
if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_BYPSHAD) == RESET)
{
if(RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR)
{
status = ERROR;
@ -831,7 +846,11 @@ ErrorStatus RTC_SetTime(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_TimeStruct)
{
status = SUCCESS;
}
}
else
{
status = SUCCESS;
}
}
/* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
@ -892,17 +911,17 @@ void RTC_GetTime(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_TimeStruct)
}
/**
* @brief Gets the RTC current Calendar Subseconds value.
* @brief Gets the RTC current Calendar Sub seconds value.
* @note This function freeze the Time and Date registers after reading the
* SSR register.
* @param None
* @retval RTC current Calendar Subseconds value.
* @retval RTC current Calendar Sub seconds value.
*/
uint32_t RTC_GetSubSecond(void)
{
uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
/* Get subseconds values from the correspondent registers*/
/* Get sub seconds values from the correspondent registers*/
tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->SSR);
/* Read DR register to unfroze calendar registers */
@ -984,6 +1003,9 @@ ErrorStatus RTC_SetDate(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_DateStruct)
/* Exit Initialization mode */
RTC_ExitInitMode();
/* If RTC_CR_BYPSHAD bit = 0, wait for synchro else this check is not needed */
if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_BYPSHAD) == RESET)
{
if(RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR)
{
status = ERROR;
@ -992,6 +1014,11 @@ ErrorStatus RTC_SetDate(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_DateStruct)
{
status = SUCCESS;
}
}
else
{
status = SUCCESS;
}
}
/* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
@ -1060,10 +1087,10 @@ void RTC_GetDate(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_DateStruct)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B) configuration functions
##### Alarms A and B configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC Alarms.
[..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC Alarms.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1330,15 +1357,15 @@ ErrorStatus RTC_AlarmCmd(uint32_t RTC_Alarm, FunctionalState NewState)
}
/**
* @brief Configure the RTC AlarmA/B Subseconds value and mask.*
* @brief Configure the RTC AlarmA/B Sub seconds value and mask.*
* @note This function is performed only when the Alarm is disabled.
* @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be configured.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A
* @arg RTC_Alarm_B: to select Alarm B
* @param RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue: specifies the Subseconds value.
* @param RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue: specifies the Sub seconds value.
* This parameter can be a value from 0 to 0x00007FFF.
* @param RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask: specifies the Subseconds Mask.
* @param RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask: specifies the Sub seconds Mask.
* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
* @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_All : All Alarm SS fields are masked.
* There is no comparison on sub seconds for Alarm.
@ -1387,17 +1414,17 @@ void RTC_AlarmSubSecondConfig(uint32_t RTC_Alarm, uint32_t RTC_AlarmSubSecondVal
RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
RTC->WPR = 0x53;
/* Configure the Alarm A or Alarm B SubSecond registers */
/* Configure the Alarm A or Alarm B Sub Second registers */
tmpreg = (uint32_t) (uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue) | (uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask);
if (RTC_Alarm == RTC_Alarm_A)
{
/* Configure the AlarmA SubSecond register */
/* Configure the Alarm A Sub Second register */
RTC->ALRMASSR = tmpreg;
}
else
{
/* Configure the Alarm B SubSecond register */
/* Configure the Alarm B Sub Second register */
RTC->ALRMBSSR = tmpreg;
}
@ -1407,13 +1434,13 @@ void RTC_AlarmSubSecondConfig(uint32_t RTC_Alarm, uint32_t RTC_AlarmSubSecondVal
}
/**
* @brief Gets the RTC Alarm Subseconds value.
* @brief Gets the RTC Alarm Sub seconds value.
* @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be read.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A
* @arg RTC_Alarm_B: to select Alarm B
* @param None
* @retval RTC Alarm Subseconds value.
* @retval RTC Alarm Sub seconds value.
*/
uint32_t RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond(uint32_t RTC_Alarm)
{
@ -1441,10 +1468,10 @@ uint32_t RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond(uint32_t RTC_Alarm)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
WakeUp Timer configuration functions
##### WakeUp Timer configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC WakeUp.
[..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC WakeUp.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1579,10 +1606,10 @@ ErrorStatus RTC_WakeUpCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Daylight Saving configuration functions
##### Daylight Saving configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC DayLight Saving.
[..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC DayLight Saving.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1642,10 +1669,10 @@ uint32_t RTC_GetStoreOperation(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Output pin Configuration function
##### Output pin Configuration function #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC Output source.
[..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC Output source.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1696,7 +1723,7 @@ void RTC_OutputConfig(uint32_t RTC_Output, uint32_t RTC_OutputPolarity)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Digital Calibration configuration functions
##### Digital Calibration configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -1849,7 +1876,7 @@ void RTC_CalibOutputConfig(uint32_t RTC_CalibOutput)
RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
RTC->WPR = 0x53;
/*clear flags before config*/
/*clear flags before configuration */
RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_COSEL);
/* Configure the RTC_CR register */
@ -1863,9 +1890,9 @@ void RTC_CalibOutputConfig(uint32_t RTC_CalibOutput)
* @brief Configures the Smooth Calibration Settings.
* @param RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod : Select the Smooth Calibration Period.
* This parameter can be can be one of the following values:
* @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_32sec : The smooth calibration periode is 32s.
* @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_16sec : The smooth calibration periode is 16s.
* @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_8sec : The smooth calibartion periode is 8s.
* @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_32sec : The smooth calibration period is 32s.
* @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_16sec : The smooth calibration period is 16s.
* @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_8sec : The smooth calibartion period is 8s.
* @param RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses : Select to Set or reset the CALP bit.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses_Set : Add one RTCCLK puls every 2**11 pulses.
@ -1931,7 +1958,7 @@ ErrorStatus RTC_SmoothCalibConfig(uint32_t RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod,
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
TimeStamp configuration functions
##### TimeStamp configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -2036,13 +2063,13 @@ void RTC_GetTimeStamp(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_StampTimeStruct,
}
/**
* @brief Get the RTC timestamp Subseconds value.
* @brief Get the RTC timestamp Sub seconds value.
* @param None
* @retval RTC current timestamp Subseconds value.
* @retval RTC current timestamp Sub seconds value.
*/
uint32_t RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond(void)
{
/* Get timestamp subseconds values from the correspondent registers */
/* Get timestamp sub seconds values from the correspondent registers */
return (uint32_t)(RTC->TSSSR);
}
@ -2055,7 +2082,7 @@ uint32_t RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Tampers configuration functions
##### Tampers configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -2183,10 +2210,10 @@ void RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig(uint32_t RTC_TamperSamplingFreq)
* @param RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration: Specifies the Tampers Pins input
* Precharge Duration.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_1RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 1 RTCCLK cycle
* @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_2RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 2 RTCCLK cycle
* @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_4RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 4 RTCCLK cycle
* @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_8RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 8 RTCCLK cycle
* @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_1RTCCLK: Tamper pins are precharged before sampling during 1 RTCCLK cycle
* @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_2RTCCLK: Tamper pins are precharged before sampling during 2 RTCCLK cycle
* @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_4RTCCLK: Tamper pins are precharged before sampling during 4 RTCCLK cycle
* @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_8RTCCLK: Tamper pins are precharged before sampling during 8 RTCCLK cycle
* @retval None
*/
void RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration(uint32_t RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration)
@ -2258,7 +2285,7 @@ void RTC_TamperPullUpCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Backup Data Registers configuration functions
##### Backup Data Registers configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -2317,10 +2344,9 @@ uint32_t RTC_ReadBackupRegister(uint32_t RTC_BKP_DR)
* configuration functions
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
RTC Tamper and TimeStamp Pins Selection and Output Type Config configuration
functions
===============================================================================
==================================================================================================
##### RTC Tamper and TimeStamp Pins Selection and Output Type Config configuration functions #####
==================================================================================================
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -2388,7 +2414,7 @@ void RTC_OutputTypeConfig(uint32_t RTC_OutputType)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Shift control synchronisation functions
##### Shift control synchronisation functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -2474,41 +2500,42 @@ ErrorStatus RTC_SynchroShiftConfig(uint32_t RTC_ShiftAdd1S, uint32_t RTC_ShiftSu
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
All RTC interrupts are connected to the EXTI controller.
[..] All RTC interrupts are connected to the EXTI controller.
- To enable the RTC Alarm interrupt, the following sequence is required:
- Configure and enable the EXTI Line 17 in interrupt mode and select the rising
edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
- Configure and enable the RTC_Alarm IRQ channel in the NVIC using the NVIC_Init()
function.
- Configure the RTC to generate RTC alarms (Alarm A and/or Alarm B) using
the RTC_SetAlarm() and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
(+) To enable the RTC Alarm interrupt, the following sequence is required:
(++) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 17 in interrupt mode and select
the rising edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
(++) Configure and enable the RTC_Alarm IRQ channel in the NVIC using the
NVIC_Init() function.
(++) Configure the RTC to generate RTC alarms (Alarm A and/or Alarm B) using
the RTC_SetAlarm() and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
- To enable the RTC Wakeup interrupt, the following sequence is required:
- Configure and enable the EXTI Line 22 in interrupt mode and select the rising
edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
- Configure and enable the RTC_WKUP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the NVIC_Init()
function.
- Configure the RTC to generate the RTC wakeup timer event using the
RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(), RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and RTC_WakeUpCmd() functions.
(+) To enable the RTC Wakeup interrupt, the following sequence is required:
(++) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 22 in interrupt mode and select the
rising edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
(++) Configure and enable the RTC_WKUP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the
NVIC_Init() function.
(++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC wakeup timer event using the
RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(), RTC_SetWakeUpCounter() and RTC_WakeUpCmd()
functions.
- To enable the RTC Tamper interrupt, the following sequence is required:
- Configure and enable the EXTI Line 21 in interrupt mode and select the rising
edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
- Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the NVIC_Init()
function.
- Configure the RTC to detect the RTC tamper event using the
RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd() functions.
(+) To enable the RTC Tamper interrupt, the following sequence is required:
(++) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 21 in interrupt mode and select
the rising edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
(++) Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the
NVIC_Init() function.
(++) Configure the RTC to detect the RTC tamper event using the
RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd() functions.
- To enable the RTC TimeStamp interrupt, the following sequence is required:
- Configure and enable the EXTI Line 21 in interrupt mode and select the rising
edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
- Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the NVIC_Init()
function.
- Configure the RTC to detect the RTC time-stamp event using the
RTC_TimeStampCmd() functions.
(+) To enable the RTC TimeStamp interrupt, the following sequence is required:
(++) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 21 in interrupt mode and select the
rising edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
(++) Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the
NVIC_Init() function.
(++) Configure the RTC to detect the RTC time stamp event using the
RTC_TimeStampCmd() functions.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -2559,6 +2586,7 @@ void RTC_ITConfig(uint32_t RTC_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
* @brief Checks whether the specified RTC flag is set or not.
* @param RTC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg RTC_FLAG_RECALPF: RECALPF event flag.
* @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F: Tamper 1 event flag
* @arg RTC_FLAG_TSOVF: Time Stamp OverFlow flag
* @arg RTC_FLAG_TSF: Time Stamp event flag
@ -2568,6 +2596,7 @@ void RTC_ITConfig(uint32_t RTC_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
* @arg RTC_FLAG_INITF: Initialization mode flag
* @arg RTC_FLAG_RSF: Registers Synchronized flag
* @arg RTC_FLAG_INITS: Registers Configured flag
* @arg RTC_FLAG_SHPF: Shift operation pending flag.
* @arg RTC_FLAG_WUTWF: WakeUp Timer Write flag
* @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRBWF: Alarm B Write flag
* @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRAWF: Alarm A write flag
@ -2729,4 +2758,4 @@ static uint8_t RTC_Bcd2ToByte(uint8_t Value)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

283
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_sdio.c
View File

@ -2,146 +2,153 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_sdio.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Secure digital input/output interface (SDIO)
* peripheral:
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - Command path state machine (CPSM) management
* - Data path state machine (DPSM) management
* - SDIO IO Cards mode management
* - CE-ATA mode management
* - DMA transfers management
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + Command path state machine (CPSM) management
* + Data path state machine (DPSM) management
* + SDIO IO Cards mode management
* + CE-ATA mode management
* + DMA transfers management
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. The SDIO clock (SDIOCLK = 48 MHz) is coming from a specific output
* of PLL (PLL48CLK). Before to start working with SDIO peripheral
* make sure that the PLL is well configured.
* The SDIO peripheral uses two clock signals:
* - SDIO adapter clock (SDIOCLK = 48 MHz)
* - APB2 bus clock (PCLK2)
* PCLK2 and SDIO_CK clock frequencies must respect the following condition:
* Frequenc(PCLK2) >= (3 / 8 x Frequency(SDIO_CK))
*
* 2. Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SDIO, ENABLE).
*
* 3. According to the SDIO mode, enable the GPIO clocks using
* RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd() function.
* The I/O can be one of the following configurations:
* - 1-bit data length: SDIO_CMD, SDIO_CK and D0.
* - 4-bit data length: SDIO_CMD, SDIO_CK and D[3:0].
* - 8-bit data length: SDIO_CMD, SDIO_CK and D[7:0].
*
* 4. Peripheral's alternate function:
* - Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
* Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
* - Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
* GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
* - Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
* GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
* - Call GPIO_Init() function
*
* 5. Program the Clock Edge, Clock Bypass, Clock Power Save, Bus Wide,
* hardware, flow control and the Clock Divider using the SDIO_Init()
* function.
*
* 6. Enable the Power ON State using the SDIO_SetPowerState(SDIO_PowerState_ON)
* function.
*
* 7. Enable the clock using the SDIO_ClockCmd() function.
*
* 8. Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
* SDIO_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
*
* 9. When using the DMA mode
* - Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function
* - Active the needed channel Request using SDIO_DMACmd() function
*
* 10. Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function, when using DMA mode.
*
* 11. To control the CPSM (Command Path State Machine) and send
* commands to the card use the SDIO_SendCommand(),
* SDIO_GetCommandResponse() and SDIO_GetResponse() functions.
* First, user has to fill the command structure (pointer to
* SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef) according to the selected command to be sent.
* The parameters that should be filled are:
* - Command Argument
* - Command Index
* - Command Response type
* - Command Wait
* - CPSM Status (Enable or Disable)
*
* To check if the command is well received, read the SDIO_CMDRESP
* register using the SDIO_GetCommandResponse().
* The SDIO responses registers (SDIO_RESP1 to SDIO_RESP2), use the
* SDIO_GetResponse() function.
*
* 12. To control the DPSM (Data Path State Machine) and send/receive
* data to/from the card use the SDIO_DataConfig(), SDIO_GetDataCounter(),
* SDIO_ReadData(), SDIO_WriteData() and SDIO_GetFIFOCount() functions.
*
* Read Operations
* ---------------
* a) First, user has to fill the data structure (pointer to
* SDIO_DataInitTypeDef) according to the selected data type to
* be received.
* The parameters that should be filled are:
* - Data TimeOut
* - Data Length
* - Data Block size
* - Data Transfer direction: should be from card (To SDIO)
* - Data Transfer mode
* - DPSM Status (Enable or Disable)
*
* b) Configure the SDIO resources to receive the data from the card
* according to selected transfer mode (Refer to Step 8, 9 and 10).
*
* c) Send the selected Read command (refer to step 11).
*
* d) Use the SDIO flags/interrupts to check the transfer status.
*
* Write Operations
* ---------------
* a) First, user has to fill the data structure (pointer to
* SDIO_DataInitTypeDef) according to the selected data type to
* be received.
* The parameters that should be filled are:
* - Data TimeOut
* - Data Length
* - Data Block size
* - Data Transfer direction: should be to card (To CARD)
* - Data Transfer mode
* - DPSM Status (Enable or Disable)
*
* b) Configure the SDIO resources to send the data to the card
* according to selected transfer mode (Refer to Step 8, 9 and 10).
*
* c) Send the selected Write command (refer to step 11).
*
* d) Use the SDIO flags/interrupts to check the transfer status.
*
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(#) The SDIO clock (SDIOCLK = 48 MHz) is coming from a specific output of PLL
(PLL48CLK). Before to start working with SDIO peripheral make sure that the
PLL is well configured.
The SDIO peripheral uses two clock signals:
(++) SDIO adapter clock (SDIOCLK = 48 MHz)
(++) APB2 bus clock (PCLK2)
-@@- PCLK2 and SDIO_CK clock frequencies must respect the following condition:
Frequency(PCLK2) >= (3 / 8 x Frequency(SDIO_CK))
(#) Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SDIO, ENABLE).
(#) According to the SDIO mode, enable the GPIO clocks using
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd() function.
The I/O can be one of the following configurations:
(++) 1-bit data length: SDIO_CMD, SDIO_CK and D0.
(++) 4-bit data length: SDIO_CMD, SDIO_CK and D[3:0].
(++) 8-bit data length: SDIO_CMD, SDIO_CK and D[7:0].
(#) Peripheral alternate function:
(++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate Function (AF)
using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
(++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
(++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via GPIO_PuPd,
GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
(++) Call GPIO_Init() function
(#) Program the Clock Edge, Clock Bypass, Clock Power Save, Bus Wide,
hardware, flow control and the Clock Divider using the SDIO_Init()
function.
(#) Enable the Power ON State using the SDIO_SetPowerState(SDIO_PowerState_ON)
function.
(#) Enable the clock using the SDIO_ClockCmd() function.
(#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
SDIO_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
(#) When using the DMA mode
(++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function
(++) Active the needed channel Request using SDIO_DMACmd() function
(#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function, when using DMA mode.
(#) To control the CPSM (Command Path State Machine) and send
commands to the card use the SDIO_SendCommand(),
SDIO_GetCommandResponse() and SDIO_GetResponse() functions. First, user has
to fill the command structure (pointer to SDIO_CmdInitTypeDef) according
to the selected command to be sent.
The parameters that should be filled are:
(++) Command Argument
(++) Command Index
(++) Command Response type
(++) Command Wait
(++) CPSM Status (Enable or Disable).
-@@- To check if the command is well received, read the SDIO_CMDRESP
register using the SDIO_GetCommandResponse().
The SDIO responses registers (SDIO_RESP1 to SDIO_RESP2), use the
SDIO_GetResponse() function.
(#) To control the DPSM (Data Path State Machine) and send/receive
data to/from the card use the SDIO_DataConfig(), SDIO_GetDataCounter(),
SDIO_ReadData(), SDIO_WriteData() and SDIO_GetFIFOCount() functions.
*** Read Operations ***
=======================
[..]
(#) First, user has to fill the data structure (pointer to
SDIO_DataInitTypeDef) according to the selected data type to be received.
The parameters that should be filled are:
(++) Data TimeOut
(++) Data Length
(++) Data Block size
(++) Data Transfer direction: should be from card (To SDIO)
(++) Data Transfer mode
(++) DPSM Status (Enable or Disable)
(#) Configure the SDIO resources to receive the data from the card
according to selected transfer mode (Refer to Step 8, 9 and 10).
(#) Send the selected Read command (refer to step 11).
(#) Use the SDIO flags/interrupts to check the transfer status.
*** Write Operations ***
========================
[..]
(#) First, user has to fill the data structure (pointer to
SDIO_DataInitTypeDef) according to the selected data type to be received.
The parameters that should be filled are:
(++) Data TimeOut
(++) Data Length
(++) Data Block size
(++) Data Transfer direction: should be to card (To CARD)
(++) Data Transfer mode
(++) DPSM Status (Enable or Disable)
(#) Configure the SDIO resources to send the data to the card according to
selected transfer mode (Refer to Step 8, 9 and 10).
(#) Send the selected Write command (refer to step 11).
(#) Use the SDIO flags/interrupts to check the transfer status.
@endverbatim
*
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -244,7 +251,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -371,7 +378,7 @@ uint32_t SDIO_GetPowerState(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Command path state machine (CPSM) management functions
##### Command path state machine (CPSM) management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to program and read the Command path
@ -476,7 +483,7 @@ uint32_t SDIO_GetResponse(uint32_t SDIO_RESP)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Data path state machine (DPSM) management functions
##### Data path state machine (DPSM) management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to program and read the Data path
@ -594,7 +601,7 @@ uint32_t SDIO_GetFIFOCount(void)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
SDIO IO Cards mode management functions
##### SDIO IO Cards mode management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to program and read the SDIO IO Cards.
@ -684,7 +691,7 @@ void SDIO_SendSDIOSuspendCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
CE-ATA mode management functions
##### CE-ATA mode management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to program and read the CE-ATA card.
@ -744,7 +751,7 @@ void SDIO_SendCEATACmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
DMA transfers management functions
##### DMA transfers management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provide functions allowing to program SDIO DMA transfer.
@ -776,7 +783,7 @@ void SDIO_DMACmd(FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@ -1001,4 +1008,4 @@ void SDIO_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t SDIO_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

592
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_spi.c
View File

@ -2,149 +2,156 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_spi.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Serial peripheral interface (SPI):
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - Data transfers functions
* - Hardware CRC Calculation
* - DMA transfers management
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + Data transfers functions
* + Hardware CRC Calculation
* + DMA transfers management
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
*
* 1. Enable peripheral clock using the following functions
* RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, ENABLE) for SPI1
* RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE) for SPI2
* RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE) for SPI3.
*
* 2. Enable SCK, MOSI, MISO and NSS GPIO clocks using RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd()
* function.
* In I2S mode, if an external clock source is used then the I2S CKIN pin GPIO
* clock should also be enabled.
*
* 3. Peripherals alternate function:
* - Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
* Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
* - Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
* GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
* - Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
* GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
* - Call GPIO_Init() function
* In I2S mode, if an external clock source is used then the I2S CKIN pin
* should be also configured in Alternate function Push-pull pull-up mode.
*
* 4. Program the Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate Prescaler, Slave
* Management, Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial values using the SPI_Init()
* function.
* In I2S mode, program the Mode, Standard, Data Format, MCLK Output, Audio
* frequency and Polarity using I2S_Init() function.
* For I2S mode, make sure that either:
* - I2S PLL is configured using the functions RCC_I2SCLKConfig(RCC_I2S2CLKSource_PLLI2S),
* RCC_PLLI2SCmd(ENABLE) and RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_PLLI2SRDY).
* or
* - External clock source is configured using the function
* RCC_I2SCLKConfig(RCC_I2S2CLKSource_Ext) and after setting correctly the define constant
* I2S_EXTERNAL_CLOCK_VAL in the stm32f4xx_conf.h file.
*
* 5. Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
* SPI_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
*
* 6. When using the DMA mode
* - Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function
* - Active the needed channel Request using SPI_I2S_DMACmd() function
*
* 7. Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function or enable the I2S using
* I2S_Cmd().
*
* 8. Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode.
*
* 9. Optionally, you can enable/configure the following parameters without
* re-initialization (i.e there is no need to call again SPI_Init() function):
* - When bidirectional mode (SPI_Direction_1Line_Rx or SPI_Direction_1Line_Tx)
* is programmed as Data direction parameter using the SPI_Init() function
* it can be possible to switch between SPI_Direction_Tx or SPI_Direction_Rx
* using the SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig() function.
* - When SPI_NSS_Soft is selected as Slave Select Management parameter
* using the SPI_Init() function it can be possible to manage the
* NSS internal signal using the SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig() function.
* - Reconfigure the data size using the SPI_DataSizeConfig() function
* - Enable or disable the SS output using the SPI_SSOutputCmd() function
*
* 10. To use the CRC Hardware calculation feature refer to the Peripheral
* CRC hardware Calculation subsection.
*
*
* It is possible to use SPI in I2S full duplex mode, in this case, each SPI
* peripheral is able to manage sending and receiving data simultaneously
* using two data lines. Each SPI peripheral has an extended block called I2Sxext
* (ie. I2S2ext for SPI2 and I2S3ext for SPI3).
* The extension block is not a full SPI IP, it is used only as I2S slave to
* implement full duplex mode. The extension block uses the same clock sources
* as its master.
* To configure I2S full duplex you have to:
*
* 1. Configure SPIx in I2S mode (I2S_Init() function) as described above.
*
* 2. Call the I2S_FullDuplexConfig() function using the same strucutre passed to
* I2S_Init() function.
*
* 3. Call I2S_Cmd() for SPIx then for its extended block.
*
* 4. To configure interrupts or DMA requests and to get/clear flag status,
* use I2Sxext instance for the extension block.
*
* Functions that can be called with I2Sxext instances are:
* I2S_Cmd(), I2S_FullDuplexConfig(), SPI_I2S_ReceiveData(), SPI_I2S_SendData(),
* SPI_I2S_DMACmd(), SPI_I2S_ITConfig(), SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(), SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(),
* SPI_I2S_GetITStatus() and SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit().
*
* Example: To use SPI3 in Full duplex mode (SPI3 is Master Tx, I2S3ext is Slave Rx):
*
* RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE);
* I2S_StructInit(&I2SInitStruct);
* I2SInitStruct.Mode = I2S_Mode_MasterTx;
* I2S_Init(SPI3, &I2SInitStruct);
* I2S_FullDuplexConfig(SPI3ext, &I2SInitStruct)
* I2S_Cmd(SPI3, ENABLE);
* I2S_Cmd(SPI3ext, ENABLE);
* ...
* while (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI2, SPI_FLAG_TXE) == RESET)
* {}
* SPI_I2S_SendData(SPI3, txdata[i]);
* ...
* while (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(I2S3ext, SPI_FLAG_RXNE) == RESET)
* {}
* rxdata[i] = SPI_I2S_ReceiveData(I2S3ext);
* ...
*
*
* @note In I2S mode: if an external clock is used as source clock for the I2S,
* then the define I2S_EXTERNAL_CLOCK_VAL in file stm32f4xx_conf.h should
* be enabled and set to the value of the source clock frequency (in Hz).
*
* @note In SPI mode: To use the SPI TI mode, call the function SPI_TIModeCmd()
* just after calling the function SPI_Init().
*
* @endverbatim
@verbatim
===================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable peripheral clock using the following functions
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, ENABLE) for SPI1
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE) for SPI2
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE) for SPI3
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE) for SPI4
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE) for SPI5
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE) for SPI6.
(#) Enable SCK, MOSI, MISO and NSS GPIO clocks using RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd()
function. In I2S mode, if an external clock source is used then the I2S
CKIN pin GPIO clock should also be enabled.
(#) Peripherals alternate function:
(++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate Function (AF)
using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
(++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
(++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via GPIO_PuPd,
GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
(++) Call GPIO_Init() function In I2S mode, if an external clock source is
used then the I2S CKIN pin should be also configured in Alternate
function Push-pull pull-up mode.
(#) Program the Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate Prescaler, Slave
Management, Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial values using the SPI_Init()
function.
In I2S mode, program the Mode, Standard, Data Format, MCLK Output, Audio
frequency and Polarity using I2S_Init() function. For I2S mode, make sure
that either:
(++) I2S PLL is configured using the functions
RCC_I2SCLKConfig(RCC_I2S2CLKSource_PLLI2S), RCC_PLLI2SCmd(ENABLE) and
RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_PLLI2SRDY); or
(++) External clock source is configured using the function
RCC_I2SCLKConfig(RCC_I2S2CLKSource_Ext) and after setting correctly
the define constant I2S_EXTERNAL_CLOCK_VAL in the stm32f4xx_conf.h file.
(#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
SPI_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
(#) When using the DMA mode
(++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function
(++) Active the needed channel Request using SPI_I2S_DMACmd() function
(#) Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function or enable the I2S using
I2S_Cmd().
(#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode.
(#) Optionally, you can enable/configure the following parameters without
re-initialization (i.e there is no need to call again SPI_Init() function):
(++) When bidirectional mode (SPI_Direction_1Line_Rx or SPI_Direction_1Line_Tx)
is programmed as Data direction parameter using the SPI_Init() function
it can be possible to switch between SPI_Direction_Tx or SPI_Direction_Rx
using the SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig() function.
(++) When SPI_NSS_Soft is selected as Slave Select Management parameter
using the SPI_Init() function it can be possible to manage the
NSS internal signal using the SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig() function.
(++) Reconfigure the data size using the SPI_DataSizeConfig() function
(++) Enable or disable the SS output using the SPI_SSOutputCmd() function
(#) To use the CRC Hardware calculation feature refer to the Peripheral
CRC hardware Calculation subsection.
[..] It is possible to use SPI in I2S full duplex mode, in this case, each SPI
peripheral is able to manage sending and receiving data simultaneously
using two data lines. Each SPI peripheral has an extended block called I2Sxext
(ie. I2S2ext for SPI2 and I2S3ext for SPI3).
The extension block is not a full SPI IP, it is used only as I2S slave to
implement full duplex mode. The extension block uses the same clock sources
as its master.
To configure I2S full duplex you have to:
(#) Configure SPIx in I2S mode (I2S_Init() function) as described above.
(#) Call the I2S_FullDuplexConfig() function using the same strucutre passed to
I2S_Init() function.
(#) Call I2S_Cmd() for SPIx then for its extended block.
(#) To configure interrupts or DMA requests and to get/clear flag status,
use I2Sxext instance for the extension block.
[..] Functions that can be called with I2Sxext instances are: I2S_Cmd(),
I2S_FullDuplexConfig(), SPI_I2S_ReceiveData(), SPI_I2S_SendData(),
SPI_I2S_DMACmd(), SPI_I2S_ITConfig(), SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(),
SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(), SPI_I2S_GetITStatus() and SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit().
Example: To use SPI3 in Full duplex mode (SPI3 is Master Tx, I2S3ext is Slave Rx):
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE);
I2S_StructInit(&I2SInitStruct);
I2SInitStruct.Mode = I2S_Mode_MasterTx;
I2S_Init(SPI3, &I2SInitStruct);
I2S_FullDuplexConfig(SPI3ext, &I2SInitStruct)
I2S_Cmd(SPI3, ENABLE);
I2S_Cmd(SPI3ext, ENABLE);
...
while (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI2, SPI_FLAG_TXE) == RESET)
{}
SPI_I2S_SendData(SPI3, txdata[i]);
...
while (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(I2S3ext, SPI_FLAG_RXNE) == RESET)
{}
rxdata[i] = SPI_I2S_ReceiveData(I2S3ext);
...
[..]
(@) In I2S mode: if an external clock is used as source clock for the I2S,
then the define I2S_EXTERNAL_CLOCK_VAL in file stm32f4xx_conf.h should
be enabled and set to the value of the source clock frequency (in Hz).
(@) In SPI mode: To use the SPI TI mode, call the function SPI_TIModeCmd()
just after calling the function SPI_Init().
@endverbatim
*
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -189,28 +196,27 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the SPI Direction,
SPI Mode, SPI Data Size, SPI Polarity, SPI Phase, SPI NSS Management, SPI Baud
Rate Prescaler, SPI First Bit and SPI CRC Polynomial.
[..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the SPI
Direction, SPI Mode, SPI Data Size, SPI Polarity, SPI Phase, SPI NSS
Management, SPI Baud Rate Prescaler, SPI First Bit and SPI CRC Polynomial.
The SPI_Init() function follows the SPI configuration procedures for Master mode
and Slave mode (details for these procedures are available in reference manual
(RM0090)).
[..] The SPI_Init() function follows the SPI configuration procedures for Master
mode and Slave mode (details for these procedures are available in reference
manual (RM0090)).
@endverbatim
* @{
*/
/**
* @brief Deinitialize the SPIx peripheral registers to their default reset values.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3
* @brief De-initialize the SPIx peripheral registers to their default reset values.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode.
*
* @note The extended I2S blocks (ie. I2S2ext and I2S3ext blocks) are deinitialized
* when the relative I2S peripheral is deinitialized (the extended block's clock
* @note The extended I2S blocks (ie. I2S2ext and I2S3ext blocks) are de-initialized
* when the relative I2S peripheral is de-initialized (the extended block's clock
* is managed by the I2S peripheral clock).
*
* @retval None
@ -233,15 +239,36 @@ void SPI_I2S_DeInit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE);
/* Release SPI2 from reset state */
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, DISABLE);
}
else
}
else if (SPIx == SPI3)
{
if (SPIx == SPI3)
/* Enable SPI3 reset state */
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE);
/* Release SPI3 from reset state */
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, DISABLE);
}
else if (SPIx == SPI4)
{
/* Enable SPI4 reset state */
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI4, ENABLE);
/* Release SPI4 from reset state */
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI4, DISABLE);
}
else if (SPIx == SPI5)
{
/* Enable SPI5 reset state */
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI5, ENABLE);
/* Release SPI5 from reset state */
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI5, DISABLE);
}
else
{
if (SPIx == SPI6)
{
/* Enable SPI3 reset state */
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, ENABLE);
/* Release SPI3 from reset state */
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI3, DISABLE);
/* Enable SPI6 reset state */
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI6, ENABLE);
/* Release SPI6 from reset state */
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI6, DISABLE);
}
}
}
@ -249,7 +276,7 @@ void SPI_I2S_DeInit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
/**
* @brief Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified
* parameters in the SPI_InitStruct.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPI_InitStruct: pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure that
* contains the configuration information for the specified SPI peripheral.
* @retval None
@ -395,7 +422,7 @@ void I2S_Init(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct)
/* Get the PLLM value */
pllm = (uint32_t)(RCC->PLLCFGR & RCC_PLLCFGR_PLLM);
/* Get the I2S source clock value */
i2sclk = (uint32_t)(((HSE_VALUE / pllm) * plln) / pllr);
#endif /* I2S_EXTERNAL_CLOCK_VAL */
@ -502,7 +529,7 @@ void I2S_StructInit(I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct)
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the SPIx peripheral.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -552,7 +579,7 @@ void I2S_Cmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
/**
* @brief Configures the data size for the selected SPI.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPI_DataSize: specifies the SPI data size.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg SPI_DataSize_16b: Set data frame format to 16bit
@ -572,7 +599,7 @@ void SPI_DataSizeConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_DataSize)
/**
* @brief Selects the data transfer direction in bidirectional mode for the specified SPI.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPI_Direction: specifies the data transfer direction in bidirectional mode.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg SPI_Direction_Tx: Selects Tx transmission direction
@ -598,7 +625,7 @@ void SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_Direction)
/**
* @brief Configures internally by software the NSS pin for the selected SPI.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPI_NSSInternalSoft: specifies the SPI NSS internal state.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set: Set NSS pin internally
@ -624,7 +651,7 @@ void SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_NSSInternalSo
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the SS output for the selected SPI.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the SPIx SS output.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -655,7 +682,7 @@ void SPI_SSOutputCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
* are not taken into consideration and are configured by hardware
* respectively to the TI mode requirements.
*
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* @param NewState: new state of the selected SPI TI communication mode.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -748,19 +775,18 @@ void I2S_FullDuplexConfig(SPI_TypeDef* I2Sxext, I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Data transfers functions
##### Data transfers functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI data transfers
In reception, data are received and then stored into an internal Rx buffer while
In transmission, data are first stored into an internal Tx buffer before being
transmitted.
[..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI data
transfers. In reception, data are received and then stored into an internal
Rx buffer while. In transmission, data are first stored into an internal Tx
buffer before being transmitted.
The read access of the SPI_DR register can be done using the SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()
function and returns the Rx buffered value. Whereas a write access to the SPI_DR
can be done using SPI_I2S_SendData() function and stores the written data into
Tx buffer.
[..] The read access of the SPI_DR register can be done using the SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()
function and returns the Rx buffered value. Whereas a write access to the SPI_DR
can be done using SPI_I2S_SendData() function and stores the written data into
Tx buffer.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -768,7 +794,7 @@ void I2S_FullDuplexConfig(SPI_TypeDef* I2Sxext, I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct)
/**
* @brief Returns the most recent received data by the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full duplex mode.
* @retval The value of the received data.
*/
@ -783,7 +809,7 @@ uint16_t SPI_I2S_ReceiveData(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
/**
* @brief Transmits a Data through the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full duplex mode.
* @param Data: Data to be transmitted.
* @retval None
@ -806,65 +832,66 @@ void SPI_I2S_SendData(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t Data)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Hardware CRC Calculation functions
##### Hardware CRC Calculation functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI CRC hardware
calculation
[..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI CRC hardware
calculation
SPI communication using CRC is possible through the following procedure:
1. Program the Data direction, Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate Prescaler,
Slave Management, Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial values using the SPI_Init()
function.
2. Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
3. Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function
4. Before writing the last data to the TX buffer, set the CRCNext bit using the
SPI_TransmitCRC() function to indicate that after transmission of the last
data, the CRC should be transmitted.
5. After transmitting the last data, the SPI transmits the CRC. The SPI_CR1_CRCNEXT
[..] SPI communication using CRC is possible through the following procedure:
(#) Program the Data direction, Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate Prescaler,
Slave Management, Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial values using the SPI_Init()
function.
(#) Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
(#) Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function
(#) Before writing the last data to the TX buffer, set the CRCNext bit using the
SPI_TransmitCRC() function to indicate that after transmission of the last
data, the CRC should be transmitted.
(#) After transmitting the last data, the SPI transmits the CRC. The SPI_CR1_CRCNEXT
bit is reset. The CRC is also received and compared against the SPI_RXCRCR
value.
If the value does not match, the SPI_FLAG_CRCERR flag is set and an interrupt
can be generated when the SPI_I2S_IT_ERR interrupt is enabled.
@note It is advised not to read the calculated CRC values during the communication.
[..]
(@) It is advised not to read the calculated CRC values during the communication.
@note When the SPI is in slave mode, be careful to enable CRC calculation only
when the clock is stable, that is, when the clock is in the steady state.
If not, a wrong CRC calculation may be done. In fact, the CRC is sensitive
to the SCK slave input clock as soon as CRCEN is set, and this, whatever
the value of the SPE bit.
(@) When the SPI is in slave mode, be careful to enable CRC calculation only
when the clock is stable, that is, when the clock is in the steady state.
If not, a wrong CRC calculation may be done. In fact, the CRC is sensitive
to the SCK slave input clock as soon as CRCEN is set, and this, whatever
the value of the SPE bit.
@note With high bitrate frequencies, be careful when transmitting the CRC.
As the number of used CPU cycles has to be as low as possible in the CRC
transfer phase, it is forbidden to call software functions in the CRC
transmission sequence to avoid errors in the last data and CRC reception.
In fact, CRCNEXT bit has to be written before the end of the transmission/reception
of the last data.
(@) With high bitrate frequencies, be careful when transmitting the CRC.
As the number of used CPU cycles has to be as low as possible in the CRC
transfer phase, it is forbidden to call software functions in the CRC
transmission sequence to avoid errors in the last data and CRC reception.
In fact, CRCNEXT bit has to be written before the end of the transmission/reception
of the last data.
@note For high bit rate frequencies, it is advised to use the DMA mode to avoid the
degradation of the SPI speed performance due to CPU accesses impacting the
SPI bandwidth.
(@) For high bit rate frequencies, it is advised to use the DMA mode to avoid the
degradation of the SPI speed performance due to CPU accesses impacting the
SPI bandwidth.
@note When the STM32F4xx is configured as slave and the NSS hardware mode is
used, the NSS pin needs to be kept low between the data phase and the CRC
phase.
(@) When the STM32F4xx is configured as slave and the NSS hardware mode is
used, the NSS pin needs to be kept low between the data phase and the CRC
phase.
@note When the SPI is configured in slave mode with the CRC feature enabled, CRC
calculation takes place even if a high level is applied on the NSS pin.
This may happen for example in case of a multi-slave environment where the
communication master addresses slaves alternately.
(@) When the SPI is configured in slave mode with the CRC feature enabled, CRC
calculation takes place even if a high level is applied on the NSS pin.
This may happen for example in case of a multi-slave environment where the
communication master addresses slaves alternately.
@note Between a slave de-selection (high level on NSS) and a new slave selection
(low level on NSS), the CRC value should be cleared on both master and slave
sides in order to resynchronize the master and slave for their respective
CRC calculation.
(@) Between a slave de-selection (high level on NSS) and a new slave selection
(low level on NSS), the CRC value should be cleared on both master and slave
sides in order to resynchronize the master and slave for their respective
CRC calculation.
@note To clear the CRC, follow the procedure below:
1. Disable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function
2. Disable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
3. Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
4. Enable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function.
(@) To clear the CRC, follow the procedure below:
(#@) Disable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function
(#@) Disable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
(#@) Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
(#@) Enable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -872,7 +899,7 @@ void SPI_I2S_SendData(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t Data)
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the CRC value calculation of the transferred bytes.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the SPIx CRC value calculation.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
* @retval None
@ -896,7 +923,7 @@ void SPI_CalculateCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
/**
* @brief Transmit the SPIx CRC value.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @retval None
*/
void SPI_TransmitCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
@ -910,7 +937,7 @@ void SPI_TransmitCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
/**
* @brief Returns the transmit or the receive CRC register value for the specified SPI.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPI_CRC: specifies the CRC register to be read.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg SPI_CRC_Tx: Selects Tx CRC register
@ -939,7 +966,7 @@ uint16_t SPI_GetCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_CRC)
/**
* @brief Returns the CRC Polynomial register value for the specified SPI.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @param SPIx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the SPI peripheral.
* @retval The CRC Polynomial register value.
*/
uint16_t SPI_GetCRCPolynomial(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
@ -960,7 +987,7 @@ uint16_t SPI_GetCRCPolynomial(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
DMA transfers management functions
##### DMA transfers management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -969,7 +996,7 @@ uint16_t SPI_GetCRCPolynomial(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the SPIx/I2Sx DMA interface.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full duplex mode.
* @param SPI_I2S_DMAReq: specifies the SPI DMA transfer request to be enabled or disabled.
* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
@ -1007,69 +1034,68 @@ void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
This section provides a set of functions allowing to configure the SPI Interrupts
sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status.
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode.
[..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to configure the SPI Interrupts
sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status.
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode.
Polling Mode
=============
In Polling Mode, the SPI/I2S communication can be managed by 9 flags:
1. SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
2. SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
3. SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY : to indicate the state of the communication layer of the SPI.
4. SPI_FLAG_CRCERR : to indicate if a CRC Calculation error occur
5. SPI_FLAG_MODF : to indicate if a Mode Fault error occur
6. SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
7. I2S_FLAG_TIFRFE: to indicate a Frame Format error occurs.
8. I2S_FLAG_UDR: to indicate an Underrun error occurs.
9. I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE: to indicate Channel Side.
*** Polling Mode ***
====================
[..] In Polling Mode, the SPI/I2S communication can be managed by 9 flags:
(#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
(#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
(#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY : to indicate the state of the communication layer of the SPI.
(#) SPI_FLAG_CRCERR : to indicate if a CRC Calculation error occur
(#) SPI_FLAG_MODF : to indicate if a Mode Fault error occur
(#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
(#) I2S_FLAG_TIFRFE: to indicate a Frame Format error occurs.
(#) I2S_FLAG_UDR: to indicate an Underrun error occurs.
(#) I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE: to indicate Channel Side.
@note Do not use the BSY flag to handle each data transmission or reception. It is
(@) Do not use the BSY flag to handle each data transmission or reception. It is
better to use the TXE and RXNE flags instead.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG);
- void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG);
[..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(+) FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG);
(+) void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG);
Interrupt Mode
===============
In Interrupt Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 3 interrupt sources
and 7 pending bits:
Pending Bits:
-------------
1. SPI_I2S_IT_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
2. SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
3. SPI_IT_CRCERR : to indicate if a CRC Calculation error occur (available in SPI mode only)
4. SPI_IT_MODF : to indicate if a Mode Fault error occur (available in SPI mode only)
5. SPI_I2S_IT_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
6. I2S_IT_UDR : to indicate an Underrun Error occurs (available in I2S mode only).
7. I2S_FLAG_TIFRFE : to indicate a Frame Format error occurs (available in TI mode only).
*** Interrupt Mode ***
======================
[..] In Interrupt Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 3 interrupt sources
and 7 pending bits:
(+) Pending Bits:
(##) SPI_I2S_IT_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
(##) SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
(##) SPI_IT_CRCERR : to indicate if a CRC Calculation error occur (available in SPI mode only)
(##) SPI_IT_MODF : to indicate if a Mode Fault error occur (available in SPI mode only)
(##) SPI_I2S_IT_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
(##) I2S_IT_UDR : to indicate an Underrun Error occurs (available in I2S mode only).
(##) I2S_FLAG_TIFRFE : to indicate a Frame Format error occurs (available in TI mode only).
Interrupt Source:
-----------------
1. SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: specifies the interrupt source for the Tx buffer empty
interrupt.
2. SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : specifies the interrupt source for the Rx buffer not
empty interrupt.
3. SPI_I2S_IT_ERR : specifies the interrupt source for the errors interrupt.
(+) Interrupt Source:
(##) SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: specifies the interrupt source for the Tx buffer empty
interrupt.
(##) SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : specifies the interrupt source for the Rx buffer not
empty interrupt.
(##) SPI_I2S_IT_ERR : specifies the interrupt source for the errors interrupt.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
- ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT);
- void SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT);
[..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(+) void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
(+) ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT);
(+) void SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT);
DMA Mode
========
In DMA Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel requests:
1. SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request
2. SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request
*** DMA Mode ***
================
[..] In DMA Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel requests:
(#) SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request
(#) SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request
In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:
- void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState);
[..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:
(+) void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState
NewState);
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1077,7 +1103,7 @@ void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the specified SPI/I2S interrupts.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full duplex mode.
* @param SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt source to be enabled or disabled.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -1117,7 +1143,7 @@ void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState New
/**
* @brief Checks whether the specified SPIx/I2Sx flag is set or not.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full duplex mode.
* @param SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI flag to check.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -1156,7 +1182,7 @@ FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG)
/**
* @brief Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) flag.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full duplex mode.
* @param SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI flag to clear.
* This function clears only CRCERR flag.
@ -1185,7 +1211,7 @@ void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG)
/**
* @brief Checks whether the specified SPIx/I2Sx interrupt has occurred or not.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full duplex mode.
* @param SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt source to check.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -1236,7 +1262,7 @@ ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT)
/**
* @brief Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) interrupt pending bit.
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2 or 3
* @param SPIx: To select the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral, where x can be: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
* in SPI mode or 2 or 3 in I2S mode or I2Sxext for I2S full duplex mode.
* @param SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt pending bit to clear.
* This function clears only CRCERR interrupt pending bit.
@ -1283,4 +1309,4 @@ void SPI_I2S_ClearITPendingBit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

75
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_syscfg.c
View File

@ -2,40 +2,44 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_syscfg.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the SYSCFG peripheral.
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
*
* This driver provides functions for:
*
* 1. Remapping the memory accessible in the code area using SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig()
*
* 2. Manage the EXTI lines connection to the GPIOs using SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig()
*
* 3. Select the ETHERNET media interface (RMII/RII) using SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterfaceConfig()
*
* @note SYSCFG APB clock must be enabled to get write access to SYSCFG registers,
* using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..] This driver provides functions for:
(#) Remapping the memory accessible in the code area using SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig()
(#) Manage the EXTI lines connection to the GPIOs using SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig()
(#) Select the ETHERNET media interface (RMII/RII) using SYSCFG_ETH_MediaInterfaceConfig()
-@- SYSCFG APB clock must be enabled to get write access to SYSCFG registers,
using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -56,6 +60,7 @@
/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
/* ------------ RCC registers bit address in the alias region ----------- */
#define SYSCFG_OFFSET (SYSCFG_BASE - PERIPH_BASE)
/* --- PMC Register ---*/
/* Alias word address of MII_RMII_SEL bit */
#define PMC_OFFSET (SYSCFG_OFFSET + 0x04)
@ -95,8 +100,8 @@ void SYSCFG_DeInit(void)
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
* @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_Flash: Main Flash memory mapped at 0x00000000
* @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SystemFlash: System Flash memory mapped at 0x00000000
* @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_FSMC: FSMC (Bank1 (NOR/PSRAM 1 and 2) mapped at 0x00000000
* @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM: Embedded SRAM (112kB) mapped at 0x00000000
* @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_FSMC: FSMC (Bank1 (NOR/PSRAM 1 and 2) mapped at 0x00000000
* @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM: Embedded SRAM (112kB) mapped at 0x00000000
* @retval None
*/
void SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig(uint8_t SYSCFG_MemoryRemap)
@ -110,10 +115,14 @@ void SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig(uint8_t SYSCFG_MemoryRemap)
/**
* @brief Selects the GPIO pin used as EXTI Line.
* @param EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx : selects the GPIO port to be used as source for
* EXTI lines where x can be (A..I).
* EXTI lines where x can be (A..I) for STM32F40xx/STM32F41xx
* and STM32F427x/STM32F437x devices.
*
* @param EXTI_PinSourcex: specifies the EXTI line to be configured.
* This parameter can be EXTI_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15, except
* for EXTI_PortSourceGPIOI x can be (0..11).
* for EXTI_PortSourceGPIOI x can be (0..11) for STM32F40xx/STM32F41xx
* and STM32F427x/STM32F437x devices.
*
* @retval None
*/
void SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig(uint8_t EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx, uint8_t EXTI_PinSourcex)
@ -194,4 +203,4 @@ FlagStatus SYSCFG_GetCompensationCellStatus(void)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

425
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_tim.c
View File

@ -2,111 +2,116 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_tim.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the TIM peripheral:
* - TimeBase management
* - Output Compare management
* - Input Capture management
* - Advanced-control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) specific features
* - Interrupts, DMA and flags management
* - Clocks management
* - Synchronization management
* - Specific interface management
* - Specific remapping management
* + TimeBase management
* + Output Compare management
* + Input Capture management
* + Advanced-control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) specific features
* + Interrupts, DMA and flags management
* + Clocks management
* + Synchronization management
* + Specific interface management
* + Specific remapping management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* This driver provides functions to configure and program the TIM
* of all STM32F4xx devices.
* These functions are split in 9 groups:
*
* 1. TIM TimeBase management: this group includes all needed functions
* to configure the TM Timebase unit:
* - Set/Get Prescaler
* - Set/Get Autoreload
* - Counter modes configuration
* - Set Clock division
* - Select the One Pulse mode
* - Update Request Configuration
* - Update Disable Configuration
* - Auto-Preload Configuration
* - Enable/Disable the counter
*
* 2. TIM Output Compare management: this group includes all needed
* functions to configure the Capture/Compare unit used in Output
* compare mode:
* - Configure each channel, independently, in Output Compare mode
* - Select the output compare modes
* - Select the Polarities of each channel
* - Set/Get the Capture/Compare register values
* - Select the Output Compare Fast mode
* - Select the Output Compare Forced mode
* - Output Compare-Preload Configuration
* - Clear Output Compare Reference
* - Select the OCREF Clear signal
* - Enable/Disable the Capture/Compare Channels
*
* 3. TIM Input Capture management: this group includes all needed
* functions to configure the Capture/Compare unit used in
* Input Capture mode:
* - Configure each channel in input capture mode
* - Configure Channel1/2 in PWM Input mode
* - Set the Input Capture Prescaler
* - Get the Capture/Compare values
*
* 4. Advanced-control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) specific features
* - Configures the Break input, dead time, Lock level, the OSSI,
* the OSSR State and the AOE(automatic output enable)
* - Enable/Disable the TIM peripheral Main Outputs
* - Select the Commutation event
* - Set/Reset the Capture Compare Preload Control bit
*
* 5. TIM interrupts, DMA and flags management
* - Enable/Disable interrupt sources
* - Get flags status
* - Clear flags/ Pending bits
* - Enable/Disable DMA requests
* - Configure DMA burst mode
* - Select CaptureCompare DMA request
*
* 6. TIM clocks management: this group includes all needed functions
* to configure the clock controller unit:
* - Select internal/External clock
* - Select the external clock mode: ETR(Mode1/Mode2), TIx or ITRx
*
* 7. TIM synchronization management: this group includes all needed
* functions to configure the Synchronization unit:
* - Select Input Trigger
* - Select Output Trigger
* - Select Master Slave Mode
* - ETR Configuration when used as external trigger
*
* 8. TIM specific interface management, this group includes all
* needed functions to use the specific TIM interface:
* - Encoder Interface Configuration
* - Select Hall Sensor
*
* 9. TIM specific remapping management includes the Remapping
* configuration of specific timers
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
This driver provides functions to configure and program the TIM
of all STM32F4xx devices.
These functions are split in 9 groups:
(#) TIM TimeBase management: this group includes all needed functions
to configure the TM Timebase unit:
(++) Set/Get Prescaler
(++) Set/Get Autoreload
(++) Counter modes configuration
(++) Set Clock division
(++) Select the One Pulse mode
(++) Update Request Configuration
(++) Update Disable Configuration
(++) Auto-Preload Configuration
(++) Enable/Disable the counter
(#) TIM Output Compare management: this group includes all needed
functions to configure the Capture/Compare unit used in Output
compare mode:
(++) Configure each channel, independently, in Output Compare mode
(++) Select the output compare modes
(++) Select the Polarities of each channel
(++) Set/Get the Capture/Compare register values
(++) Select the Output Compare Fast mode
(++) Select the Output Compare Forced mode
(++) Output Compare-Preload Configuration
(++) Clear Output Compare Reference
(++) Select the OCREF Clear signal
(++) Enable/Disable the Capture/Compare Channels
(#) TIM Input Capture management: this group includes all needed
functions to configure the Capture/Compare unit used in
Input Capture mode:
(++) Configure each channel in input capture mode
(++) Configure Channel1/2 in PWM Input mode
(++) Set the Input Capture Prescaler
(++) Get the Capture/Compare values
(#) Advanced-control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) specific features
(++) Configures the Break input, dead time, Lock level, the OSSI,
the OSSR State and the AOE(automatic output enable)
(++) Enable/Disable the TIM peripheral Main Outputs
(++) Select the Commutation event
(++) Set/Reset the Capture Compare Preload Control bit
(#) TIM interrupts, DMA and flags management
(++) Enable/Disable interrupt sources
(++) Get flags status
(++) Clear flags/ Pending bits
(++) Enable/Disable DMA requests
(++) Configure DMA burst mode
(++) Select CaptureCompare DMA request
(#) TIM clocks management: this group includes all needed functions
to configure the clock controller unit:
(++) Select internal/External clock
(++) Select the external clock mode: ETR(Mode1/Mode2), TIx or ITRx
(#) TIM synchronization management: this group includes all needed
functions to configure the Synchronization unit:
(++) Select Input Trigger
(++) Select Output Trigger
(++) Select Master Slave Mode
(++) ETR Configuration when used as external trigger
(#) TIM specific interface management, this group includes all
needed functions to use the specific TIM interface:
(++) Encoder Interface Configuration
(++) Select Hall Sensor
(#) TIM specific remapping management includes the Remapping
configuration of specific timers
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -157,29 +162,30 @@ static void TI4_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
TimeBase management functions
##### TimeBase management functions #####
===============================================================================
===================================================================
TIM Driver: how to use it in Timing(Time base) Mode
===================================================================
To use the Timer in Timing(Time base) mode, the following steps are mandatory:
##### TIM Driver: how to use it in Timing(Time base) Mode #####
===============================================================================
[..]
To use the Timer in Timing(Time base) mode, the following steps are mandatory:
1. Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx, ENABLE) function
(#) Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx, ENABLE) function
2. Fill the TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct with the desired parameters.
(#) Fill the TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct with the desired parameters.
3. Call TIM_TimeBaseInit(TIMx, &TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct) to configure the Time Base unit
(#) Call TIM_TimeBaseInit(TIMx, &TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct) to configure the Time Base unit
with the corresponding configuration
4. Enable the NVIC if you need to generate the update interrupt.
(#) Enable the NVIC if you need to generate the update interrupt.
5. Enable the corresponding interrupt using the function TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_Update)
(#) Enable the corresponding interrupt using the function TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_Update)
6. Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
(#) Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
Note1: All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed,
a specific feature of the Timer.
-@- All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed,
a specific feature of the Timer.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -609,46 +615,48 @@ void TIM_Cmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Output Compare management functions
##### Output Compare management functions #####
===============================================================================
===================================================================
TIM Driver: how to use it in Output Compare Mode
===================================================================
To use the Timer in Output Compare mode, the following steps are mandatory:
##### TIM Driver: how to use it in Output Compare Mode #####
===============================================================================
[..]
To use the Timer in Output Compare mode, the following steps are mandatory:
1. Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx, ENABLE) function
(#) Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx, ENABLE)
function
2. Configure the TIM pins by configuring the corresponding GPIO pins
(#) Configure the TIM pins by configuring the corresponding GPIO pins
2. Configure the Time base unit as described in the first part of this driver,
if needed, else the Timer will run with the default configuration:
- Autoreload value = 0xFFFF
- Prescaler value = 0x0000
- Counter mode = Up counting
- Clock Division = TIM_CKD_DIV1
(#) Configure the Time base unit as described in the first part of this driver,
(++) if needed, else the Timer will run with the default configuration:
Autoreload value = 0xFFFF
(++) Prescaler value = 0x0000
(++) Counter mode = Up counting
(++) Clock Division = TIM_CKD_DIV1
3. Fill the TIM_OCInitStruct with the desired parameters including:
- The TIM Output Compare mode: TIM_OCMode
- TIM Output State: TIM_OutputState
- TIM Pulse value: TIM_Pulse
- TIM Output Compare Polarity : TIM_OCPolarity
(#) Fill the TIM_OCInitStruct with the desired parameters including:
(++) The TIM Output Compare mode: TIM_OCMode
(++) TIM Output State: TIM_OutputState
(++) TIM Pulse value: TIM_Pulse
(++) TIM Output Compare Polarity : TIM_OCPolarity
4. Call TIM_OCxInit(TIMx, &TIM_OCInitStruct) to configure the desired channel with the
corresponding configuration
(#) Call TIM_OCxInit(TIMx, &TIM_OCInitStruct) to configure the desired
channel with the corresponding configuration
5. Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
(#) Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
Note1: All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed,
a specific feature of the Timer.
-@- All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed,
a specific feature of the Timer.
Note2: In case of PWM mode, this function is mandatory:
TIM_OCxPreloadConfig(TIMx, TIM_OCPreload_ENABLE);
-@- In case of PWM mode, this function is mandatory:
TIM_OCxPreloadConfig(TIMx, TIM_OCPreload_ENABLE);
Note3: If the corresponding interrupt or DMA request are needed, the user should:
1. Enable the NVIC (or the DMA) to use the TIM interrupts (or DMA requests).
2. Enable the corresponding interrupt (or DMA request) using the function
TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_CCx) (or TIM_DMA_Cmd(TIMx, TIM_DMA_CCx))
-@- If the corresponding interrupt or DMA request are needed, the user should:
(+@) Enable the NVIC (or the DMA) to use the TIM interrupts (or DMA requests).
(+@) Enable the corresponding interrupt (or DMA request) using the function
TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_CCx) (or TIM_DMA_Cmd(TIMx, TIM_DMA_CCx))
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1831,49 +1839,51 @@ void TIM_CCxNCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_Channel, uint16_t TIM_CCxN)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Input Capture management functions
##### Input Capture management functions #####
===============================================================================
===================================================================
TIM Driver: how to use it in Input Capture Mode
===================================================================
To use the Timer in Input Capture mode, the following steps are mandatory:
##### TIM Driver: how to use it in Input Capture Mode #####
===============================================================================
[..]
To use the Timer in Input Capture mode, the following steps are mandatory:
1. Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx, ENABLE) function
(#) Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx, ENABLE)
function
2. Configure the TIM pins by configuring the corresponding GPIO pins
(#) Configure the TIM pins by configuring the corresponding GPIO pins
2. Configure the Time base unit as described in the first part of this driver,
(#) Configure the Time base unit as described in the first part of this driver,
if needed, else the Timer will run with the default configuration:
- Autoreload value = 0xFFFF
- Prescaler value = 0x0000
- Counter mode = Up counting
- Clock Division = TIM_CKD_DIV1
(++) Autoreload value = 0xFFFF
(++) Prescaler value = 0x0000
(++) Counter mode = Up counting
(++) Clock Division = TIM_CKD_DIV1
3. Fill the TIM_ICInitStruct with the desired parameters including:
- TIM Channel: TIM_Channel
- TIM Input Capture polarity: TIM_ICPolarity
- TIM Input Capture selection: TIM_ICSelection
- TIM Input Capture Prescaler: TIM_ICPrescaler
- TIM Input CApture filter value: TIM_ICFilter
(#) Fill the TIM_ICInitStruct with the desired parameters including:
(++) TIM Channel: TIM_Channel
(++) TIM Input Capture polarity: TIM_ICPolarity
(++) TIM Input Capture selection: TIM_ICSelection
(++) TIM Input Capture Prescaler: TIM_ICPrescaler
(++) TIM Input CApture filter value: TIM_ICFilter
4. Call TIM_ICInit(TIMx, &TIM_ICInitStruct) to configure the desired channel with the
corresponding configuration and to measure only frequency or duty cycle of the input signal,
or,
Call TIM_PWMIConfig(TIMx, &TIM_ICInitStruct) to configure the desired channels with the
corresponding configuration and to measure the frequency and the duty cycle of the input signal
(#) Call TIM_ICInit(TIMx, &TIM_ICInitStruct) to configure the desired channel
with the corresponding configuration and to measure only frequency
or duty cycle of the input signal, or, Call TIM_PWMIConfig(TIMx, &TIM_ICInitStruct)
to configure the desired channels with the corresponding configuration
and to measure the frequency and the duty cycle of the input signal
5. Enable the NVIC or the DMA to read the measured frequency.
(#) Enable the NVIC or the DMA to read the measured frequency.
6. Enable the corresponding interrupt (or DMA request) to read the Captured value,
using the function TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_CCx) (or TIM_DMA_Cmd(TIMx, TIM_DMA_CCx))
(#) Enable the corresponding interrupt (or DMA request) to read the Captured
value, using the function TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_CCx)
(or TIM_DMA_Cmd(TIMx, TIM_DMA_CCx))
7. Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
(#) Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
8. Use TIM_GetCapturex(TIMx); to read the captured value.
(#) Use TIM_GetCapturex(TIMx); to read the captured value.
Note1: All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed,
a specific feature of the Timer.
-@- All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed,
a specific feature of the Timer.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -2176,23 +2186,23 @@ void TIM_SetIC4Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPSC)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Advanced-control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) specific features
##### Advanced-control timers (TIM1 and TIM8) specific features #####
===============================================================================
===================================================================
TIM Driver: how to use the Break feature
===================================================================
After configuring the Timer channel(s) in the appropriate Output Compare mode:
##### TIM Driver: how to use the Break feature #####
===============================================================================
[..]
After configuring the Timer channel(s) in the appropriate Output Compare mode:
1. Fill the TIM_BDTRInitStruct with the desired parameters for the Timer
(#) Fill the TIM_BDTRInitStruct with the desired parameters for the Timer
Break Polarity, dead time, Lock level, the OSSI/OSSR State and the
AOE(automatic output enable).
2. Call TIM_BDTRConfig(TIMx, &TIM_BDTRInitStruct) to configure the Timer
(#) Call TIM_BDTRConfig(TIMx, &TIM_BDTRInitStruct) to configure the Timer
3. Enable the Main Output using TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs(TIM1, ENABLE)
(#) Enable the Main Output using TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs(TIM1, ENABLE)
4. Once the break even occurs, the Timer's output signals are put in reset
(#) Once the break even occurs, the Timer's output signals are put in reset
state or in a known state (according to the configuration made in
TIM_BDTRConfig() function).
@ -2327,7 +2337,7 @@ void TIM_CCPreloadControl(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts, DMA and flags management functions
##### Interrupts, DMA and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -2657,7 +2667,7 @@ void TIM_SelectCCDMA(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Clocks management functions
##### Clocks management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -2832,29 +2842,32 @@ void TIM_ETRClockMode2Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Synchronization management functions
##### Synchronization management functions #####
===============================================================================
===================================================================
TIM Driver: how to use it in synchronization Mode
===================================================================
Case of two/several Timers
**************************
1. Configure the Master Timers using the following functions:
- void TIM_SelectOutputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_TRGOSource);
- void TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_MasterSlaveMode);
2. Configure the Slave Timers using the following functions:
- void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_InputTriggerSource);
- void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_SlaveMode);
##### TIM Driver: how to use it in synchronization Mode #####
===============================================================================
[..]
*** Case of two/several Timers ***
==================================
[..]
(#) Configure the Master Timers using the following functions:
(++) void TIM_SelectOutputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_TRGOSource);
(++) void TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_MasterSlaveMode);
(#) Configure the Slave Timers using the following functions:
(++) void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_InputTriggerSource);
(++) void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_SlaveMode);
Case of Timers and external trigger(ETR pin)
********************************************
1. Configure the External trigger using this function:
- void TIM_ETRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity,
*** Case of Timers and external trigger(ETR pin) ***
====================================================
[..]
(#) Configure the External trigger using this function:
(++) void TIM_ETRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity,
uint16_t ExtTRGFilter);
2. Configure the Slave Timers using the following functions:
- void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_InputTriggerSource);
- void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_SlaveMode);
(#) Configure the Slave Timers using the following functions:
(++) void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_InputTriggerSource);
(++) void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_SlaveMode);
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -3027,7 +3040,7 @@ void TIM_ETRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Specific interface management functions
##### Specific interface management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -3132,7 +3145,7 @@ void TIM_SelectHallSensor(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Specific remapping management function
##### Specific remapping management function #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -3349,4 +3362,4 @@ static void TI4_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

705
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_usart.c
View File

@ -2,82 +2,89 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_usart.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
* transmitter (USART):
* - Initialization and Configuration
* - Data transfers
* - Multi-Processor Communication
* - LIN mode
* - Half-duplex mode
* - Smartcard mode
* - IrDA mode
* - DMA transfers management
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Initialization and Configuration
* + Data transfers
* + Multi-Processor Communication
* + LIN mode
* + Half-duplex mode
* + Smartcard mode
* + IrDA mode
* + DMA transfers management
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable peripheral clock using the follwoing functions
* RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USARTx, ENABLE) for USART1 and USART6
* RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USARTx, ENABLE) for USART2, USART3, UART4 or UART5.
*
* 2. According to the USART mode, enable the GPIO clocks using
* RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd() function. (The I/O can be TX, RX, CTS,
* or/and SCLK).
*
* 3. Peripheral's alternate function:
* - Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
* Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
* - Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
* GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
* - Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
* GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
* - Call GPIO_Init() function
*
* 4. Program the Baud Rate, Word Length , Stop Bit, Parity, Hardware
* flow control and Mode(Receiver/Transmitter) using the USART_Init()
* function.
*
* 5. For synchronous mode, enable the clock and program the polarity,
* phase and last bit using the USART_ClockInit() function.
*
* 5. Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
* USART_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
*
* 6. When using the DMA mode
* - Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function
* - Active the needed channel Request using USART_DMACmd() function
*
* 7. Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
*
* 8. Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function, when using DMA mode.
*
* Refer to Multi-Processor, LIN, half-duplex, Smartcard, IrDA sub-sections
* for more details
*
* In order to reach higher communication baudrates, it is possible to
* enable the oversampling by 8 mode using the function USART_OverSampling8Cmd().
* This function should be called after enabling the USART clock (RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd())
* and before calling the function USART_Init().
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable peripheral clock using the following functions
RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USARTx, ENABLE) for USART1 and USART6
RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USARTx, ENABLE) for USART2, USART3,
UART4 or UART5.
(#) According to the USART mode, enable the GPIO clocks using
RCC_AHB1PeriphClockCmd() function. (The I/O can be TX, RX, CTS,
or/and SCLK).
(#) Peripheral's alternate function:
(++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function
(++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
(++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
(++) Call GPIO_Init() function
(#) Program the Baud Rate, Word Length , Stop Bit, Parity, Hardware
flow control and Mode(Receiver/Transmitter) using the USART_Init()
function.
(#) For synchronous mode, enable the clock and program the polarity,
phase and last bit using the USART_ClockInit() function.
(#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
USART_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
(#) When using the DMA mode
(++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function
(++) Active the needed channel Request using USART_DMACmd() function
(#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
(#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function, when using DMA mode.
-@- Refer to Multi-Processor, LIN, half-duplex, Smartcard, IrDA sub-sections
for more details
[..]
In order to reach higher communication baudrates, it is possible to
enable the oversampling by 8 mode using the function USART_OverSampling8Cmd().
This function should be called after enabling the USART clock (RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd())
and before calling the function USART_Init().
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -126,19 +133,19 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Initialization and Configuration functions
##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the USART
in asynchronous and in synchronous modes.
- For the asynchronous mode only these parameters can be configured:
- Baud Rate
- Word Length
- Stop Bit
- Parity: If the parity is enabled, then the MSB bit of the data written
in the data register is transmitted but is changed by the parity bit.
Depending on the frame length defined by the M bit (8-bits or 9-bits),
the possible USART frame formats are as listed in the following table:
[..]
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the USART
in asynchronous and in synchronous modes.
(+) For the asynchronous mode only these parameters can be configured:
(++) Baud Rate
(++) Word Length
(++) Stop Bit
(++) Parity: If the parity is enabled, then the MSB bit of the data written
in the data register is transmitted but is changed by the parity bit.
Depending on the frame length defined by the M bit (8-bits or 9-bits),
the possible USART frame formats are as listed in the following table:
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
| M bit | PCE bit | USART frame |
|---------------------|---------------------------------------|
@ -150,20 +157,22 @@
|---------|-----------|---------------------------------------|
| 1 | 1 | | SB | 8 bit data | PB | STB | |
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
- Hardware flow control
- Receiver/transmitter modes
(++) Hardware flow control
(++) Receiver/transmitter modes
The USART_Init() function follows the USART asynchronous configuration procedure
(details for the procedure are available in reference manual (RM0090)).
[..]
The USART_Init() function follows the USART asynchronous configuration
procedure (details for the procedure are available in reference manual (RM0090)).
- For the synchronous mode in addition to the asynchronous mode parameters these
parameters should be also configured:
- USART Clock Enabled
- USART polarity
- USART phase
- USART LastBit
(+) For the synchronous mode in addition to the asynchronous mode parameters these
parameters should be also configured:
(++) USART Clock Enabled
(++) USART polarity
(++) USART phase
(++) USART LastBit
These parameters can be configured using the USART_ClockInit() function.
[..]
These parameters can be configured using the USART_ClockInit() function.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -171,7 +180,7 @@
/**
* @brief Deinitializes the USARTx peripheral registers to their default reset values.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @retval None
*/
@ -204,13 +213,23 @@ void USART_DeInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
{
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART5, ENABLE);
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART5, DISABLE);
}
else if (USARTx == USART6)
{
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART6, ENABLE);
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART6, DISABLE);
}
else if (USARTx == UART7)
{
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART7, ENABLE);
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART7, DISABLE);
}
else
{
if (USARTx == USART6)
if (USARTx == UART8)
{
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART6, ENABLE);
RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART6, DISABLE);
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART8, ENABLE);
RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_UART8, DISABLE);
}
}
}
@ -218,7 +237,7 @@ void USART_DeInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
/**
* @brief Initializes the USARTx peripheral according to the specified
* parameters in the USART_InitStruct .
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_InitStruct: pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef structure that contains
* the configuration information for the specified USART peripheral.
@ -399,7 +418,7 @@ void USART_ClockStructInit(USART_ClockInitTypeDef* USART_ClockInitStruct)
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the specified USART peripheral.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the USARTx peripheral.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
@ -425,7 +444,7 @@ void USART_Cmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
/**
* @brief Sets the system clock prescaler.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_Prescaler: specifies the prescaler clock.
* @note The function is used for IrDA mode with UART4 and UART5.
@ -446,7 +465,7 @@ void USART_SetPrescaler(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_Prescaler)
* @brief Enables or disables the USART's 8x oversampling mode.
* @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Init() function
* in order to have correct baudrate Divider value.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the USART 8x oversampling mode.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
@ -472,7 +491,7 @@ void USART_OverSampling8Cmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the USART's one bit sampling method.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the USART one bit sampling method.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
@ -505,24 +524,24 @@ void USART_OneBitMethodCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Data transfers functions
##### Data transfers functions #####
===============================================================================
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART data
transfers.
During an USART reception, data shifts in least significant bit first through
the RX pin. In this mode, the USART_DR register consists of a buffer (RDR)
between the internal bus and the received shift register.
When a transmission is taking place, a write instruction to the USART_DR register
stores the data in the TDR register and which is copied in the shift register
at the end of the current transmission.
The read access of the USART_DR register can be done using the USART_ReceiveData()
function and returns the RDR buffered value. Whereas a write access to the USART_DR
can be done using USART_SendData() function and stores the written data into
TDR buffer.
[..]
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART data
transfers.
[..]
During an USART reception, data shifts in least significant bit first through
the RX pin. In this mode, the USART_DR register consists of a buffer (RDR)
between the internal bus and the received shift register.
[..]
When a transmission is taking place, a write instruction to the USART_DR register
stores the data in the TDR register and which is copied in the shift register
at the end of the current transmission.
[..]
The read access of the USART_DR register can be done using the USART_ReceiveData()
function and returns the RDR buffered value. Whereas a write access to the USART_DR
can be done using USART_SendData() function and stores the written data into
TDR buffer.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -530,7 +549,7 @@ void USART_OneBitMethodCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
/**
* @brief Transmits single data through the USARTx peripheral.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param Data: the data to transmit.
* @retval None
@ -547,7 +566,7 @@ void USART_SendData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t Data)
/**
* @brief Returns the most recent received data by the USARTx peripheral.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @retval The received data.
*/
@ -569,27 +588,28 @@ uint16_t USART_ReceiveData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Multi-Processor Communication functions
##### Multi-Processor Communication functions #####
===============================================================================
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
multiprocessor communication.
For instance one of the USARTs can be the master, its TX output is connected to
the RX input of the other USART. The others are slaves, their respective TX outputs
are logically ANDed together and connected to the RX input of the master.
USART multiprocessor communication is possible through the following procedure:
1. Program the Baud rate, Word length = 9 bits, Stop bits, Parity, Mode transmitter
or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init()
function.
2. Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function.
3. Configures the wake up method (USART_WakeUp_IdleLine or USART_WakeUp_AddressMark)
using USART_WakeUpConfig() function only for the slaves.
4. Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
5. Enter the USART slaves in mute mode using USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd() function.
The USART Slave exit from mute mode when receive the wake up condition.
[..]
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
multiprocessor communication.
[..]
For instance one of the USARTs can be the master, its TX output is connected
to the RX input of the other USART. The others are slaves, their respective
TX outputs are logically ANDed together and connected to the RX input of the
master.
[..]
USART multiprocessor communication is possible through the following procedure:
(#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 9 bits, Stop bits, Parity, Mode
transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using
the USART_Init() function.
(#) Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function.
(#) Configures the wake up method (USART_WakeUp_IdleLine or USART_WakeUp_AddressMark)
using USART_WakeUpConfig() function only for the slaves.
(#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
(#) Enter the USART slaves in mute mode using USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd() function.
[..]
The USART Slave exit from mute mode when receive the wake up condition.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -597,7 +617,7 @@ uint16_t USART_ReceiveData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
/**
* @brief Sets the address of the USART node.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_Address: Indicates the address of the USART node.
* @retval None
@ -616,7 +636,7 @@ void USART_SetAddress(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_Address)
/**
* @brief Determines if the USART is in mute mode or not.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the USART mute mode.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
@ -641,7 +661,7 @@ void USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
}
/**
* @brief Selects the USART WakeUp method.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_WakeUp: specifies the USART wakeup method.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -668,41 +688,41 @@ void USART_WakeUpConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_WakeUp)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
LIN mode functions
##### LIN mode functions #####
===============================================================================
[..]
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART LIN
Mode communication.
[..]
In LIN mode, 8-bit data format with 1 stop bit is required in accordance with
the LIN standard.
[..]
Only this LIN Feature is supported by the USART IP:
(+) LIN Master Synchronous Break send capability and LIN slave break detection
capability : 13-bit break generation and 10/11 bit break detection
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART LIN
Mode communication.
In LIN mode, 8-bit data format with 1 stop bit is required in accordance with
the LIN standard.
Only this LIN Feature is supported by the USART IP:
- LIN Master Synchronous Break send capability and LIN slave break detection
capability : 13-bit break generation and 10/11 bit break detection
USART LIN Master transmitter communication is possible through the following procedure:
1. Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity,
[..]
USART LIN Master transmitter communication is possible through the following
procedure:
(#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity,
Mode transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using
the USART_Init() function.
2. Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
3. Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function.
4. Send the break character using USART_SendBreak() function.
(#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
(#) Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function.
(#) Send the break character using USART_SendBreak() function.
[..]
USART LIN Master receiver communication is possible through the following procedure:
(#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity,
Mode transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using
the USART_Init() function.
(#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
(#) Configures the break detection length using the USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig()
function.
(#) Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function.
USART LIN Master receiver communication is possible through the following procedure:
1. Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity,
Mode transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using
the USART_Init() function.
2. Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
3. Configures the break detection length using the USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig()
function.
4. Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function.
@note In LIN mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
- CLKEN in the USART_CR2 register,
- STOP[1:0], SCEN, HDSEL and IREN in the USART_CR3 register.
-@- In LIN mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
(+@) CLKEN in the USART_CR2 register,
(+@) STOP[1:0], SCEN, HDSEL and IREN in the USART_CR3 register.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -710,7 +730,7 @@ void USART_WakeUpConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_WakeUp)
/**
* @brief Sets the USART LIN Break detection length.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_LINBreakDetectLength: specifies the LIN break detection length.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -730,7 +750,7 @@ void USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_LINB
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the USART's LIN mode.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the USART LIN mode.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
@ -756,7 +776,7 @@ void USART_LINCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
/**
* @brief Transmits break characters.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @retval None
*/
@ -778,28 +798,28 @@ void USART_SendBreak(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Half-duplex mode function
##### Half-duplex mode function #####
===============================================================================
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
Half-duplex communication.
The USART can be configured to follow a single-wire half-duplex protocol where
the TX and RX lines are internally connected.
USART Half duplex communication is possible through the following procedure:
1. Program the Baud rate, Word length, Stop bits, Parity, Mode transmitter
or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init()
function.
2. Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function.
3. Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
4. Enable the half duplex mode using USART_HalfDuplexCmd() function.
[..]
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
Half-duplex communication.
[..]
The USART can be configured to follow a single-wire half-duplex protocol where
the TX and RX lines are internally connected.
[..]
USART Half duplex communication is possible through the following procedure:
(#) Program the Baud rate, Word length, Stop bits, Parity, Mode transmitter
or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init()
function.
(#) Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function.
(#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
(#) Enable the half duplex mode using USART_HalfDuplexCmd() function.
@note The RX pin is no longer used
@note In Half-duplex mode the following bits must be kept cleared:
- LINEN and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register.
- SCEN and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.
-@- The RX pin is no longer used
-@- In Half-duplex mode the following bits must be kept cleared:
(+@) LINEN and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register.
(+@) SCEN and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -807,7 +827,7 @@ void USART_SendBreak(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the USART's Half Duplex communication.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the USART Communication.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
@ -841,51 +861,50 @@ void USART_HalfDuplexCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Smartcard mode functions
##### Smartcard mode functions #####
===============================================================================
[..]
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
Smartcard communication.
[..]
The Smartcard interface is designed to support asynchronous protocol Smartcards as
defined in the ISO 7816-3 standard.
[..]
The USART can provide a clock to the smartcard through the SCLK output.
In smartcard mode, SCLK is not associated to the communication but is simply derived
from the internal peripheral input clock through a 5-bit prescaler.
[..]
Smartcard communication is possible through the following procedure:
(#) Configures the Smartcard Prescaler using the USART_SetPrescaler() function.
(#) Configures the Smartcard Guard Time using the USART_SetGuardTime() function.
(#) Program the USART clock using the USART_ClockInit() function as following:
(++) USART Clock enabled
(++) USART CPOL Low
(++) USART CPHA on first edge
(++) USART Last Bit Clock Enabled
(#) Program the Smartcard interface using the USART_Init() function as following:
(++) Word Length = 9 Bits
(++) 1.5 Stop Bit
(++) Even parity
(++) BaudRate = 12096 baud
(++) Hardware flow control disabled (RTS and CTS signals)
(++) Tx and Rx enabled
(#) POptionally you can enable the parity error interrupt using the USART_ITConfig()
function
(#) PEnable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
(#) PEnable the Smartcard NACK using the USART_SmartCardNACKCmd() function.
(#) PEnable the Smartcard interface using the USART_SmartCardCmd() function.
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
Smartcard communication.
The Smartcard interface is designed to support asynchronous protocol Smartcards as
defined in the ISO 7816-3 standard.
Please refer to the ISO 7816-3 specification for more details.
The USART can provide a clock to the smartcard through the SCLK output.
In smartcard mode, SCLK is not associated to the communication but is simply derived
from the internal peripheral input clock through a 5-bit prescaler.
Smartcard communication is possible through the following procedure:
1. Configures the Smartcard Prescaler using the USART_SetPrescaler() function.
2. Configures the Smartcard Guard Time using the USART_SetGuardTime() function.
3. Program the USART clock using the USART_ClockInit() function as following:
- USART Clock enabled
- USART CPOL Low
- USART CPHA on first edge
- USART Last Bit Clock Enabled
4. Program the Smartcard interface using the USART_Init() function as following:
- Word Length = 9 Bits
- 1.5 Stop Bit
- Even parity
- BaudRate = 12096 baud
- Hardware flow control disabled (RTS and CTS signals)
- Tx and Rx enabled
5. Optionally you can enable the parity error interrupt using the USART_ITConfig()
function
6. Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
7. Enable the Smartcard NACK using the USART_SmartCardNACKCmd() function.
8. Enable the Smartcard interface using the USART_SmartCardCmd() function.
Please refer to the ISO 7816-3 specification for more details.
@note It is also possible to choose 0.5 stop bit for receiving but it is recommended
to use 1.5 stop bits for both transmitting and receiving to avoid switching
between the two configurations.
@note In smartcard mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
- LINEN bit in the USART_CR2 register.
- HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.
@note Smartcard mode is available on USART peripherals only (not available on UART4
and UART5 peripherals).
-@- It is also possible to choose 0.5 stop bit for receiving but it is recommended
to use 1.5 stop bits for both transmitting and receiving to avoid switching
between the two configurations.
-@- In smartcard mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
(+@) LINEN bit in the USART_CR2 register.
(+@) HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.
-@- Smartcard mode is available on USART peripherals only (not available on UART4
and UART5 peripherals).
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -968,36 +987,36 @@ void USART_SmartCardNACKCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
IrDA mode functions
##### IrDA mode functions #####
===============================================================================
[..]
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
IrDA communication.
[..]
IrDA is a half duplex communication protocol. If the Transmitter is busy, any data
on the IrDA receive line will be ignored by the IrDA decoder and if the Receiver
is busy, data on the TX from the USART to IrDA will not be encoded by IrDA.
While receiving data, transmission should be avoided as the data to be transmitted
could be corrupted.
[..]
IrDA communication is possible through the following procedure:
(#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8 bits, Stop bits, Parity, Transmitter/Receiver
modes and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init() function.
(#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
(#) Configures the IrDA pulse width by configuring the prescaler using
the USART_SetPrescaler() function.
(#) Configures the IrDA USART_IrDAMode_LowPower or USART_IrDAMode_Normal mode
using the USART_IrDAConfig() function.
(#) Enable the IrDA using the USART_IrDACmd() function.
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
IrDA communication.
IrDA is a half duplex communication protocol. If the Transmitter is busy, any data
on the IrDA receive line will be ignored by the IrDA decoder and if the Receiver
is busy, data on the TX from the USART to IrDA will not be encoded by IrDA.
While receiving data, transmission should be avoided as the data to be transmitted
could be corrupted.
IrDA communication is possible through the following procedure:
1. Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8 bits, Stop bits, Parity, Transmitter/Receiver
modes and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init() function.
2. Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
3. Configures the IrDA pulse width by configuring the prescaler using
the USART_SetPrescaler() function.
4. Configures the IrDA USART_IrDAMode_LowPower or USART_IrDAMode_Normal mode
using the USART_IrDAConfig() function.
5. Enable the IrDA using the USART_IrDACmd() function.
@note A pulse of width less than two and greater than one PSC period(s) may or may
not be rejected.
@note The receiver set up time should be managed by software. The IrDA physical layer
specification specifies a minimum of 10 ms delay between transmission and
reception (IrDA is a half duplex protocol).
@note In IrDA mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
- LINEN, STOP and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register.
- SCEN and HDSEL bits in the USART_CR3 register.
-@- A pulse of width less than two and greater than one PSC period(s) may or may
not be rejected.
-@- The receiver set up time should be managed by software. The IrDA physical layer
specification specifies a minimum of 10 ms delay between transmission and
reception (IrDA is a half duplex protocol).
-@- In IrDA mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
(+@) LINEN, STOP and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register.
(+@) SCEN and HDSEL bits in the USART_CR3 register.
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1005,7 +1024,7 @@ void USART_SmartCardNACKCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
/**
* @brief Configures the USART's IrDA interface.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_IrDAMode: specifies the IrDA mode.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -1025,7 +1044,7 @@ void USART_IrDAConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IrDAMode)
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the USART's IrDA interface.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param NewState: new state of the IrDA mode.
* This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
@ -1058,7 +1077,7 @@ void USART_IrDACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
DMA transfers management functions
##### DMA transfers management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -1067,7 +1086,7 @@ void USART_IrDACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the USART's DMA interface.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_DMAReq: specifies the DMA request.
* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
@ -1107,81 +1126,85 @@ void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_DMAReq, FunctionalState
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to configure the USART
Interrupts sources, DMA channels requests and check or clear the flags or
pending bits status.
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode.
[..]
This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to configure the USART
Interrupts sources, DMA channels requests and check or clear the flags or
pending bits status.
The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode.
Polling Mode
=============
In Polling Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 10 flags:
1. USART_FLAG_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
2. USART_FLAG_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
3. USART_FLAG_TC : to indicate the status of the transmit operation
4. USART_FLAG_IDLE : to indicate the status of the Idle Line
5. USART_FLAG_CTS : to indicate the status of the nCTS input
6. USART_FLAG_LBD : to indicate the status of the LIN break detection
7. USART_FLAG_NE : to indicate if a noise error occur
8. USART_FLAG_FE : to indicate if a frame error occur
9. USART_FLAG_PE : to indicate if a parity error occur
10. USART_FLAG_ORE : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
*** Polling Mode ***
====================
[..]
In Polling Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 10 flags:
(#) USART_FLAG_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
(#) USART_FLAG_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
(#) USART_FLAG_TC : to indicate the status of the transmit operation
(#) USART_FLAG_IDLE : to indicate the status of the Idle Line
(#) USART_FLAG_CTS : to indicate the status of the nCTS input
(#) USART_FLAG_LBD : to indicate the status of the LIN break detection
(#) USART_FLAG_NE : to indicate if a noise error occur
(#) USART_FLAG_FE : to indicate if a frame error occur
(#) USART_FLAG_PE : to indicate if a parity error occur
(#) USART_FLAG_ORE : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
[..]
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(+) FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG);
(+) void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG);
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG);
- void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG);
*** Interrupt Mode ***
======================
[..]
In Interrupt Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 8 interrupt sources
and 10 pending bits:
Interrupt Mode
===============
In Interrupt Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 8 interrupt sources
and 10 pending bits:
(#) Pending Bits:
Pending Bits:
-------------
1. USART_IT_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
2. USART_IT_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
3. USART_IT_TC : to indicate the status of the transmit operation
4. USART_IT_IDLE : to indicate the status of the Idle Line
5. USART_IT_CTS : to indicate the status of the nCTS input
6. USART_IT_LBD : to indicate the status of the LIN break detection
7. USART_IT_NE : to indicate if a noise error occur
8. USART_IT_FE : to indicate if a frame error occur
9. USART_IT_PE : to indicate if a parity error occur
10. USART_IT_ORE : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
(##) USART_IT_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
(##) USART_IT_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
(##) USART_IT_TC : to indicate the status of the transmit operation
(##) USART_IT_IDLE : to indicate the status of the Idle Line
(##) USART_IT_CTS : to indicate the status of the nCTS input
(##) USART_IT_LBD : to indicate the status of the LIN break detection
(##) USART_IT_NE : to indicate if a noise error occur
(##) USART_IT_FE : to indicate if a frame error occur
(##) USART_IT_PE : to indicate if a parity error occur
(##) USART_IT_ORE : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
Interrupt Source:
-----------------
1. USART_IT_TXE : specifies the interrupt source for the Tx buffer empty
interrupt.
2. USART_IT_RXNE : specifies the interrupt source for the Rx buffer not
empty interrupt.
3. USART_IT_TC : specifies the interrupt source for the Transmit complete
interrupt.
4. USART_IT_IDLE : specifies the interrupt source for the Idle Line interrupt.
5. USART_IT_CTS : specifies the interrupt source for the CTS interrupt.
6. USART_IT_LBD : specifies the interrupt source for the LIN break detection
interrupt.
7. USART_IT_PE : specifies the interrupt source for the parity error interrupt.
8. USART_IT_ERR : specifies the interrupt source for the errors interrupt.
(#) Interrupt Source:
@note Some parameters are coded in order to use them as interrupt source or as pending bits.
(##) USART_IT_TXE : specifies the interrupt source for the Tx buffer empty
interrupt.
(##) USART_IT_RXNE : specifies the interrupt source for the Rx buffer not
empty interrupt.
(##) USART_IT_TC : specifies the interrupt source for the Transmit complete
interrupt.
(##) USART_IT_IDLE : specifies the interrupt source for the Idle Line interrupt.
(##) USART_IT_CTS : specifies the interrupt source for the CTS interrupt.
(##) USART_IT_LBD : specifies the interrupt source for the LIN break detection
interrupt.
(##) USART_IT_PE : specifies the interrupt source for the parity error interrupt.
(##) USART_IT_ERR : specifies the interrupt source for the errors interrupt.
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
- void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
- ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT);
- void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT);
-@@- Some parameters are coded in order to use them as interrupt source
or as pending bits.
[..]
In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
(+) void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
(+) ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT);
(+) void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT);
DMA Mode
========
In DMA Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel requests:
1. USART_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request
2. USART_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request
In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:
- void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState);
*** DMA Mode ***
================
[..]
In DMA Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel requests:
(#) USART_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request
(#) USART_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request
[..]
In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:
(+) void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState);
@endverbatim
* @{
@ -1189,7 +1212,7 @@ void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_DMAReq, FunctionalState
/**
* @brief Enables or disables the specified USART interrupts.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -1253,7 +1276,7 @@ void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT, FunctionalState Ne
/**
* @brief Checks whether the specified USART flag is set or not.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -1295,7 +1318,7 @@ FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG)
/**
* @brief Clears the USARTx's pending flags.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
* This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
@ -1335,7 +1358,7 @@ void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG)
/**
* @brief Checks whether the specified USART interrupt has occurred or not.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt source to check.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -1402,7 +1425,7 @@ ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT)
/**
* @brief Clears the USARTx's interrupt pending bits.
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 to select the USART or
* @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 to select the USART or
* UART peripheral.
* @param USART_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
* This parameter can be one of the following values:
@ -1460,4 +1483,4 @@ void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/

140
flight/pios/stm32f4xx/libraries/STM32F4xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f4xx_wwdg.c
View File

@ -2,77 +2,81 @@
******************************************************************************
* @file stm32f4xx_wwdg.c
* @author MCD Application Team
* @version V1.0.0
* @date 30-September-2011
* @version V1.1.0
* @date 11-January-2013
* @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
* functionalities of the Window watchdog (WWDG) peripheral:
* - Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration
* - WWDG activation
* - Interrupts and flags management
* + Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration
* + WWDG activation
* + Interrupts and flags management
*
* @verbatim
*
* ===================================================================
* WWDG features
* ===================================================================
*
* Once enabled the WWDG generates a system reset on expiry of a programmed
* time period, unless the program refreshes the counter (downcounter)
* before to reach 0x3F value (i.e. a reset is generated when the counter
* value rolls over from 0x40 to 0x3F).
* An MCU reset is also generated if the counter value is refreshed
* before the counter has reached the refresh window value. This
* implies that the counter must be refreshed in a limited window.
*
* Once enabled the WWDG cannot be disabled except by a system reset.
*
* WWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a WWDG
* reset occurs.
*
* The WWDG counter input clock is derived from the APB clock divided
* by a programmable prescaler.
*
* WWDG counter clock = PCLK1 / Prescaler
* WWDG timeout = (WWDG counter clock) * (counter value)
*
* Min-max timeout value @42 MHz(PCLK1): ~97.5 us / ~49.9 ms
*
* ===================================================================
* How to use this driver
* ===================================================================
* 1. Enable WWDG clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, ENABLE) function
*
* 2. Configure the WWDG prescaler using WWDG_SetPrescaler() function
*
* 3. Configure the WWDG refresh window using WWDG_SetWindowValue() function
*
* 4. Set the WWDG counter value and start it using WWDG_Enable() function.
* When the WWDG is enabled the counter value should be configured to
* a value greater than 0x40 to prevent generating an immediate reset.
*
* 5. Optionally you can enable the Early wakeup interrupt which is
* generated when the counter reach 0x40.
* Once enabled this interrupt cannot be disabled except by a system reset.
*
* 6. Then the application program must refresh the WWDG counter at regular
* intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset, using
* WWDG_SetCounter() function. This operation must occur only when
* the counter value is lower than the refresh window value,
* programmed using WWDG_SetWindowValue().
*
* @endverbatim
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
##### WWDG features #####
===============================================================================
[..]
Once enabled the WWDG generates a system reset on expiry of a programmed
time period, unless the program refreshes the counter (downcounter)
before to reach 0x3F value (i.e. a reset is generated when the counter
value rolls over from 0x40 to 0x3F).
An MCU reset is also generated if the counter value is refreshed
before the counter has reached the refresh window value. This
implies that the counter must be refreshed in a limited window.
Once enabled the WWDG cannot be disabled except by a system reset.
WWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a WWDG
reset occurs.
The WWDG counter input clock is derived from the APB clock divided
by a programmable prescaler.
WWDG counter clock = PCLK1 / Prescaler
WWDG timeout = (WWDG counter clock) * (counter value)
Min-max timeout value @42 MHz(PCLK1): ~97.5 us / ~49.9 ms
##### How to use this driver #####
===============================================================================
[..]
(#) Enable WWDG clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, ENABLE) function
(#) Configure the WWDG prescaler using WWDG_SetPrescaler() function
(#) Configure the WWDG refresh window using WWDG_SetWindowValue() function
(#) Set the WWDG counter value and start it using WWDG_Enable() function.
When the WWDG is enabled the counter value should be configured to
a value greater than 0x40 to prevent generating an immediate reset.
(#) Optionally you can enable the Early wakeup interrupt which is
generated when the counter reach 0x40.
Once enabled this interrupt cannot be disabled except by a system reset.
(#) Then the application program must refresh the WWDG counter at regular
intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset, using
WWDG_SetCounter() function. This operation must occur only when
the counter value is lower than the refresh window value,
programmed using WWDG_SetWindowValue().
@endverbatim
******************************************************************************
* @attention
*
* THE PRESENT FIRMWARE WHICH IS FOR GUIDANCE ONLY AIMS AT PROVIDING CUSTOMERS
* WITH CODING INFORMATION REGARDING THEIR PRODUCTS IN ORDER FOR THEM TO SAVE
* TIME. AS A RESULT, STMICROELECTRONICS SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO ANY CLAIMS ARISING
* FROM THE CONTENT OF SUCH FIRMWARE AND/OR THE USE MADE BY CUSTOMERS OF THE
* CODING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONNECTION WITH THEIR PRODUCTS.
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2013 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
*
* Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
* You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
* You may obtain a copy of the License at:
*
* http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
*
* Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
* distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
* WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
* See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
* limitations under the License.
*
* <h2><center>&copy; COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics</center></h2>
******************************************************************************
*/
@ -119,7 +123,7 @@
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions
##### Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -218,7 +222,7 @@ void WWDG_SetCounter(uint8_t Counter)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
WWDG activation function
##### WWDG activation function #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -247,7 +251,7 @@ void WWDG_Enable(uint8_t Counter)
*
@verbatim
===============================================================================
Interrupts and flags management functions
##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
===============================================================================
@endverbatim
@ -300,4 +304,4 @@ void WWDG_ClearFlag(void)
* @}
*/
/******************* (C) COPYRIGHT 2011 STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/